ZT125/310/350T-M

Maintenance Manual

2024-01-16

1 / 223
 Introduction
All the materials, illustrations, photos, etc. collected in this manual are compiled according to the latest products of ZT310-
M National IV. However, due to the continuous improvement of the product and other changes, there may be some
inconsistencies between your motorcycle and this manual. For colors or upgrades, please refer to the part codes on the official
website of Zontes. This manual will not be listed in detail; if the part names in this manual are inconsistent with the official
website of Zontes, please refer to the official website of Zontes.Individual parts of different displacements that differ in shape or
size but are disassembled and assembled in the same way, will not listed in this manual.
The M125/350/M125(2024) steps are similar to the M310, taking the M310 as an example.
If part of the content of this manual is insufficient, please refer to the "Driver's Manual" included with the bike. The latest
version of the driver's manual can be downloaded as a PDF in the model introduction corresponding to the official website of
Zontes.

©GUANG DONG TAYO MOTORCYCLE TECHNOLOGY Co.,Ltd

All rights reserved

2 / 223
 User notice
This manual is compiled by Guangdong Tayo Motorcycle Technology Co., Ltd. to guide dealers or service personnel to use it. This
manual cannot provide more detailed knowledge about motorcycles, and is only for reference for maintenance. If you do not
have the corresponding knowledge such as electrician, machine repair, etc., improper assembly or repair failure may occur
during repair.
If you need to clean or wash the body parts of the vehicle, you should use neutral car wash fluid or tap water, diesel, kerosene,
etc. Acidic or alkaline car wash liquid will cause irreversible corrosion of the surface paint, electroplating surface, and anodized
surface of the parts; gasoline will cause premature aging or hardening of sealants, gaskets, and rubber parts, reducing the
service life. Non-woven fabrics should be used for wiping with no residue. Ordinary rags may leave cloth scraps or wool, etc.,
which may affect the assembly or cause other adverse effects.
Our company will update this manual as soon as possible after the product changes.
The following is the meaning of the icons marked in this manual：
Failure to observe will cause personal injury or death of the driver or maintenance
personnel; or cause serious damage to parts and shorten the service life, etc.
Failure to comply may result in personal injury or death of the driver or maintenance
personnel; or damage to parts, abnormalities, etc.
Failure to observe the warning will cause personal injury to the driver or
maintenance personnel; or matters requiring special attention during disassembly
and assembly

Indicates that there is a requirement for torque there

Indicates that the piece needs to be replaced after disassembly

3 / 223
Content

Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2

User notice .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3

Content ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 4

1. Vehicle information ...................................................................................................................................................................... 13

Know Before Service ......................................................................................................................................................... 13
Body label ................................................................................................................................................................................. 14
M310 Technical specification.................................................................................................................................................... 15
Front wheel/steering system ............................................................................................................................................ 15
Rear wheel/suspension system ........................................................................................................................................ 15
Brake system ..................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Battery/charging system ................................................................................................................................................... 16
M125/M125(2024) Technical specification .............................................................................................................................. 16
Front wheel/steering system ............................................................................................................................................ 16
Rear wheel/suspension system ........................................................................................................................................ 17
Brake system ..................................................................................................................................................................... 17
Battery/charging system ................................................................................................................................................... 17
M350 Technical specification.................................................................................................................................................... 18
Front wheel/steering system ............................................................................................................................................ 18
Rear wheel/suspension system ........................................................................................................................................ 18
Brake system ..................................................................................................................................................................... 18
Battery/charging system ................................................................................................................................................... 19
Lamp/Speedometer/switch description ................................................................................................................................... 19
Tightening torque ..................................................................................................................................................................... 20
Bolt tightening torque of general tightening part............................................................................................................. 20
Cable/ pipe/electrical device distribution map......................................................................................................................... 21
1. Distribution map of lamps and lanterns ....................................................................................................................... 21
2. Throttle cable ................................................................................................................................................................ 21
3. Brake upper pump and brake hose ............................................................................................................................... 22
4. Calipers, brake hoses and wheel speed sensors ........................................................................................................... 22
5. Distribution map of brake system accessories.............................................................................................................. 23
5.1 M310 ................................................................................................................................................................... 23
5.2 M125 ................................................................................................................................................................... 24
5.3 M350 ................................................................................................................................................................... 25
6. Oil supply system .......................................................................................................................................................... 26
6.1 M310 Fuel evaporation ....................................................................................................................................... 26
6.2 M125 Fuel evaporation ....................................................................................................................................... 27
6.3 M350 Fuel evaporation ....................................................................................................................................... 27
6.4 M310 Fuel supply ................................................................................................................................................ 28
6.5 M125 Fuel supply ................................................................................................................................................ 28
6.6 M350 Fuel supply ................................................................................................................................................ 29
7. Distribution map of cooling system accessories ........................................................................................................... 29
7.1 M310 ................................................................................................................................................................... 29
7.2 M125 ................................................................................................................................................................... 30
7.3 M350 ................................................................................................................................................................... 31
8. Electrical device layout.................................................................................................................................................. 31
8.1 M125 ................................................................................................................................................................... 31
8.2 M310 ................................................................................................................................................................... 34
8.3 M350 ................................................................................................................................................................... 36
9. Intake and exhaust system............................................................................................................................................ 37
9.1 M310 ................................................................................................................................................................... 37
9.2 M125 ................................................................................................................................................................... 38
9.3 M350 ................................................................................................................................................................... 39
Tool ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 40
Swell nail description ................................................................................................................................................................ 41

4 / 223
2. Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................................................. 42
Know Before Service ................................................................................................................................................................. 42
M310 Maintenance schedule ................................................................................................................................................... 43
M125/M125(2024) Maintenance schedule .............................................................................................................................. 44
M350 Maintenance schedule ................................................................................................................................................... 45
M310 Air filter (filter element), air inlet filter element ............................................................................................................ 46
1. Support the vehicle firmly ............................................................................................................................................. 46
2. Remove the left engine cover ....................................................................................................................................... 46
3. Remove the air inlet cover ............................................................................................................................................ 47
4. Replace the air inlet filter .............................................................................................................................................. 47
5. Remove the air filter housing ........................................................................................................................................ 47
6. Replace Air filter element ............................................................................................................................................. 47
7. Inspection air filter waste oil pipe ................................................................................................................................. 48
8. Reinstall ......................................................................................................................................................................... 48
M125 Air filter (filter element), air inlet filter element ............................................................................................................ 49
1. Support the vehicle firmly ............................................................................................................................................. 49
2. Remove the left engine cover ....................................................................................................................................... 49
3. Replace the air inlet filter .............................................................................................................................................. 49
4. Remove the air filter housing ........................................................................................................................................ 50
5. Replace Air filter element ............................................................................................................................................. 50
6. Inspection air filter waste oil pipe ................................................................................................................................. 50
7. Reinstall ......................................................................................................................................................................... 50
M125(2024) Air filter (filter element), air inlet filter element .................................................................................................. 51
1. Support the vehicle firmly ............................................................................................................................................. 51
2. Remove the left engine cover ....................................................................................................................................... 51
3. Remove the air intake cover ......................................................................................................................................... 51
4. Replace the air inlet filter element ............................................................................................................................... 51
5. Replace Air filter element ............................................................................................................................................. 52
6. Inspection air filter waste oil pipe ................................................................................................................................. 52
7. Reinstall ......................................................................................................................................................................... 52
M350 Air filter (filter element), air inlet filter element ............................................................................................................ 52
1. Support the vehicle firmly ............................................................................................................................................. 52
2. Remove the left engine cover ....................................................................................................................................... 52
3. Replace the air inlet filter element ............................................................................................................................... 53
4. Remove the air filter shell ............................................................................................................................................. 53
5. Replace the filter element of the air filter .................................................................................................................... 54
6. Check the waste oil pipe of air filter ............................................................................................................................. 54
7. Reassembly ................................................................................................................................................................... 54
Bolts and nuts of muffler .......................................................................................................................................................... 55
1. Check for air leaks at the engine exhaust. .................................................................................................................... 55
2. Check for nut and bolts at the muffler .......................................................................................................................... 55
M310/350 Spark plug................................................................................................................................................................ 55
1. Disassemble the spark plug ........................................................................................................................................... 56
2. Check the spark plug ..................................................................................................................................................... 57
3. Refer to the steps to remove the spark plug to restore all parts. ................................................................................. 57
M125 Spark plug ....................................................................................................................................................................... 57
1. Disassemble the spark plug ........................................................................................................................................... 57
2. Check the spark plug ..................................................................................................................................................... 59
3. Refer to the steps to remove the spark plug to restore all parts. ................................................................................. 59
Engine oil................................................................................................................................................................................... 59
M310 ................................................................................................................................................................................. 60
1. Drain the oil ........................................................................................................................................................... 60
2. Replace fine filter .................................................................................................................................................. 60
3. Add oil ................................................................................................................................................................... 60
4. Change gear box oil ............................................................................................................................................... 61
5. Confirm the oil level .............................................................................................................................................. 61
M125 ................................................................................................................................................................................. 61
1. Drain the oil ........................................................................................................................................................... 61
2. Replace fine filter .................................................................................................................................................. 62
3. Add oil ................................................................................................................................................................... 62
4. Change gear box oil ............................................................................................................................................... 62
5 / 223
 5. Confirm the oil level .............................................................................................................................................. 63
M350 ................................................................................................................................................................................. 63
1. Drain the oil ........................................................................................................................................................... 63
2. Replace the fine filter ............................................................................................................................................ 63
3. Add oil ................................................................................................................................................................... 64
4. Replace the gearbox oil ......................................................................................................................................... 64
M310/350 Throttle valve body ................................................................................................................................................. 65
1. Do not dismantle the throttle body to clean up carbon deposits ................................................................................. 65
2. Remove the stepper motor and clean up carbon deposits........................................................................................... 65
3. Remove the throttle valve body assembly to clean up carbon deposits ...................................................................... 67
4. M310 Disassemble the three-in-one sensor ................................................................................................................. 68
5. M350 Disassemble the three-in-one sensor ................................................................................................................. 68
6. Throttle valve body troubleshooting process ............................................................................................................... 70
M125 Throttle valve body ......................................................................................................................................................... 70
1. Do not dismantle the throttle body to clean up carbon deposits ................................................................................. 70
2. Remove the stepper motor and clean up carbon deposits........................................................................................... 70
3. Remove the throttle valve body assembly to clean up carbon deposits ...................................................................... 71
4. Disassemble the sensor................................................................................................................................................. 71
5. Throttle valve body troubleshooting process ............................................................................................................... 72
Throttle cable ............................................................................................................................................................................ 73
1. Inspection ...................................................................................................................................................................... 73
2. Adjust the throttle cable clearance ............................................................................................................................... 73
3. Lube door cable............................................................................................................................................................. 73
Idle speed .................................................................................................................................................................................. 73
Check idle speed: .............................................................................................................................................................. 74
Fuel evaporative pollutant control system ............................................................................................................................... 74
M310 fuel evaporation ..................................................................................................................................................... 74
M125 fuel evaporation ..................................................................................................................................................... 75
M350 fuel evaporation ..................................................................................................................................................... 76
Radiator..................................................................................................................................................................................... 77
1.Check the coolant .......................................................................................................................................................... 77
M125/310 ................................................................................................................................................................. 77
M350 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 77
2. Add coolant (antifreeze) to the Coolant expansion tank .............................................................................................. 77
M125/310 ................................................................................................................................................................. 77
M350 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 78
3. Add coolant to the Radiator .......................................................................................................................................... 78
M310 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 78
M350 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 79
4. Put coolant .................................................................................................................................................................... 79
M310 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 79
M125 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 79
5. Check whether the fins of the radiator water tank are deformed or the air duct is blocked ....................................... 79
M310 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 79
M125 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 79
M350 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 80
6. Check all water pipes for leaks; aging. .......................................................................................................................... 81
M310 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 81
M125 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 81
M350 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 82
Fuel pipe.................................................................................................................................................................................... 83
1. Check the fuel pipe for leaks with the help of an endoscope with LED light ................................................................ 83
2. Replace high pressure oil pipe ...................................................................................................................................... 83
3. Fuel pump ..................................................................................................................................................................... 84
3.1 Use oil pressure gauge to measure fuel pressure ............................................................................................... 84
3.2 Simple test of fuel pump ..................................................................................................................................... 84
4. Treatment of abnormal fuel pressure ........................................................................................................................... 85
M310 V belt............................................................................................................................................................................... 86
1. System Components ..................................................................................................................................................... 86
2. Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................................. 86
2.1 Remove the belt .................................................................................................................................................. 86
6 / 223
 2.2 Disassemble the continuously variable transmission components .................................................................... 87
2.3 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................................ 88
2.4 Assembly ............................................................................................................................................................. 89
3. Common fault phenomena/troubleshooting................................................................................................................ 91
3.1 The engine can be started, but the rear wheel does not rotate ......................................................................... 91
3.2 Engine stall or lack of power ............................................................................................................................... 91
3.3 Insufficient high-speed power ............................................................................................................................ 91
3.4 When the engine is at normal idling speed, the rear wheel rotates rapidly....................................................... 91
Braking System .......................................................................................................................................................................... 92
M310 Braking system component diagram: ..................................................................................................................... 92
M125 Braking system component diagram: ..................................................................................................................... 92
M350 Braking system component diagram: ..................................................................................................................... 93
M125 (2024) Braking system component diagram:.......................................................................................................... 93
1. Check the brake components ....................................................................................................................................... 94
2. Check the front and rear brake switches ...................................................................................................................... 95
2.1 Check the brake switch ....................................................................................................................................... 95
2.2 Replace the brake switch .................................................................................................................................... 95
3. Lubricate the movable parts of the brake handle ......................................................................................................... 95
3.1 Lubricate the front brake handle. ....................................................................................................................... 95
3.2 Lubricating the rear brake handle ....................................................................................................................... 96
3.3 Replacing the brake handle ................................................................................................................................. 96
4. Adjust the brake handle ................................................................................................................................................ 96
5. Replace the brake pads ................................................................................................................................................. 96
5.1 Replace the front brake pads .............................................................................................................................. 96
M125/310 ......................................................................................................................................................... 96
M350 ................................................................................................................................................................. 97
5.2 Replace the rear brake pads ............................................................................................................................... 98
5.3 Abnormal sound of brake pads ........................................................................................................................... 98
6. Replace the brake disc .................................................................................................................................................. 98
6.1 Replacing the front brake disc ............................................................................................................................ 99
6.2 Replacing the rear brake disc .............................................................................................................................. 99
Brake hose .............................................................................................................................................................................. 100
Brake fluid ............................................................................................................................................................................... 100
1. Add brake fluid to the main pumps of the front and rear disc brakes ........................................................................ 100
2. Replace the brake fluid ............................................................................................................................................... 101
2.1 Replace the front brake brake fluid .................................................................................................................. 101
2.2 Replace the rear brake fluid .............................................................................................................................. 101
3. Brake system exhaust ................................................................................................................................................. 102
Tire .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 102
1. Check the tires ............................................................................................................................................................ 102
2. Replace tires ................................................................................................................................................................ 103
Steering mechanism................................................................................................................................................................ 103
1. Check the steering mechanism ................................................................................................................................... 103
2. Adjust the steering mechanism .................................................................................................................................. 103
M125/310 ............................................................................................................................................................... 103
M350 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 104
3. Maintain steering bearings ......................................................................................................................................... 104
4. Malfunction ................................................................................................................................................................. 104
Front fork ................................................................................................................................................................................ 104
1. Check the appearance................................................................................................................................................. 104
2. Check the shock absorption performance .................................................................................................................. 105
3. Remove the front shock absorption ........................................................................................................................... 105
4. Correct the front fork tube ......................................................................................................................................... 105
5. Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................................................... 105
Rear shock absorption ............................................................................................................................................................ 106
1. Check ........................................................................................................................................................................... 106
2. Adjust the preload....................................................................................................................................................... 106
2.1 Adjust the right rear shock absorption ............................................................................................................. 106
M125/310 ....................................................................................................................................................... 106
M350 ............................................................................................................................................................... 106
2.2 Adjust the left rear shock absorption................................................................................................................ 106
7 / 223
 2.2.1 M310 ...................................................................................................................................................... 106
2.2.2 M125 ...................................................................................................................................................... 107
2.2.3 M350 ...................................................................................................................................................... 107
3. Replace the shock absorption ..................................................................................................................................... 107
Bolts and nuts for body and engine installation ..................................................................................................................... 108
1. Check the fasteners for the critical parts .................................................................................................................... 108
2. Check engine fasteners ............................................................................................................................................... 108
Valve clearance adjustment (M310) ....................................................................................................................................... 110
1. Maintenance information ........................................................................................................................................... 110
1.1 General information .......................................................................................................................................... 110
1.2 Assemble torque value...................................................................................................................................... 110
1.3 Tools, measuring tools, accessories .................................................................................................................. 110
2. Operation steps ........................................................................................................................................................... 110
Side bracket ............................................................................................................................................................................ 114
1. Check ........................................................................................................................................................................... 114
2. Lubrication .................................................................................................................................................................. 114
Main bracket ........................................................................................................................................................................... 115
1. Check ........................................................................................................................................................................... 115
2. Lubrication .................................................................................................................................................................. 115
3. Install the main bracket .............................................................................................................................................. 115
4. Replace the return spring post of the main support................................................................................................... 115
Sound, light, and electrical device Inspection ......................................................................................................................... 116
1. Check ........................................................................................................................................................................... 116
M125/310 charging ................................................................................................................................................. 117
M350 charging ........................................................................................................................................................ 117
2. Headlight height adjustment ...................................................................................................................................... 117
3.Fuse box ....................................................................................................................................................................... 118
4. Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................................................... 119
4.1 Right hand switch .............................................................................................................................................. 119
4.2 Right hand handle vice switch........................................................................................................................... 119
4.3Left hand handle auxiliary switch....................................................................................................................... 120
4.4 Horn .................................................................................................................................................................. 121
4.5 Left hand switch ................................................................................................................................................ 121
4.6 Light................................................................................................................................................................... 123
4.7 Windshield failure ............................................................................................................................................. 123

3. EFI system ................................................................................................................................................................................... 124

Know Before Service ............................................................................................................................................................... 124
Error code ............................................................................................................................................................................... 125
1. M310 Read the fault code through the meter ............................................................................................................ 125
2. Read the fault code through the diagnostic tool ........................................................................................................ 125
M125/310 ............................................................................................................................................................... 125
M350 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 125
3. Error code.................................................................................................................................................................... 126
4. Clear fault code ........................................................................................................................................................... 126
4.1 M310 manually clear ......................................................................................................................................... 126
4.2 Use the diagnostic tool to clear ........................................................................................................................ 127
EFI parts layout ....................................................................................................................................................................... 127
Fault diagnosis and elimination of EFI parts ........................................................................................................................... 128
1. Dump switch ............................................................................................................................................................... 128
2. OBD port ..................................................................................................................................................................... 128
3. Fuel pump ................................................................................................................................................................... 129
4. Carbon canister solenoid valve ................................................................................................................................... 129
5. EFI relay ....................................................................................................................................................................... 129
6. Fuel injector ................................................................................................................................................................ 130
7. Ignition coils ................................................................................................................................................................ 130
M125/310 ............................................................................................................................................................... 131
M350 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 131
8. Throttle valve body ..................................................................................................................................................... 132
8.1 Common failure phenomena ............................................................................................................................ 132
8.2 Disassembly ....................................................................................................................................................... 132
8 / 223
 8.3Troubleshooting process .................................................................................................................................... 132
8.4 Sensor................................................................................................................................................................ 132
M310 Three-in-one sensor .............................................................................................................................. 132
M125/350 sensor ............................................................................................................................................ 132
9. Water and oil shared sensor ....................................................................................................................................... 132
10. Oxygen Sensor........................................................................................................................................................... 133
10.1 Check ............................................................................................................................................................... 133
10.2 Replace ............................................................................................................................................................ 133
M310 ............................................................................................................................................................... 133
M125 ............................................................................................................................................................... 133
M350 ............................................................................................................................................................... 134
11. ECU ............................................................................................................................................................................ 134
M310/350 ............................................................................................................................................................... 134
M125 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 135
12. Crankshaft position sensor........................................................................................................................................ 135
The engine cannot start and there is no sign of fault diagnosis process ................................................................................ 136
The engine cannot be started and there is a car symptom fault diagnosis process ............................................................... 136
Poor acceleration .................................................................................................................................................................... 137
High idling speed of hot car .................................................................................................................................................... 137
Unsteady idle speed of cooling car ......................................................................................................................................... 137
Unsteady idling, easy to cutoff ............................................................................................................................................... 138
Analysis flow chart of EFI failure indicator light always on ..................................................................................................... 139
Electrical schematic diagram of EFI system ............................................................................................................................ 140

4. Ignition system ............................................................................................................................................................................ 141

Know Before Service ............................................................................................................................................................... 141
Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................................................................... 142
Ignition system layout ............................................................................................................................................................. 143
Electrical schematic diagram of ignition system ..................................................................................................................... 143
Ignition system inspection ...................................................................................................................................................... 144
Ignition timing ......................................................................................................................................................................... 144
Check： ........................................................................................................................................................................... 144
Installation: ..................................................................................................................................................................... 144
Ignition coils ............................................................................................................................................................................ 145

5. Starting system ........................................................................................................................................................................... 146

Know Before Service ............................................................................................................................................................... 146
Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................................................................... 146
1. Starting relay ............................................................................................................................................................... 146
2. Starter motor .............................................................................................................................................................. 147
3. The starter motor runs slowly ..................................................................................................................................... 147
4. The starter motor is working normally, but the engine cannot be started ................................................................ 147
Ignition system layout ............................................................................................................................................................. 147
Starting system electrical schematic diagram......................................................................................................................... 148
Starter motor .......................................................................................................................................................................... 148
1. Remove the starter motor .......................................................................................................................................... 148
2. Disassemble the starter motor ................................................................................................................................... 149
Examination ............................................................................................................................................................ 150
Starter motor front cover：............................................................................................................................ 150
Motor back cover： ........................................................................................................................................ 150
Denki： ........................................................................................................................................................... 150
Check the starting relay .......................................................................................................................................................... 150
1. Operation check .......................................................................................................................................................... 150
2. Check the relay coil ..................................................................................................................................................... 151
2.1 Input line ........................................................................................................................................................... 151
2.2 Ground wire ...................................................................................................................................................... 151
3. Check the starting relay .............................................................................................................................................. 151
4. Disassembly and assembly of the starting relay ......................................................................................................... 151

6. Fuel supply system ...................................................................................................................................................................... 152

Know Before Service ............................................................................................................................................................... 152
9 / 223
 Fuel tank removal ................................................................................................................................................................... 152
1. Disassemble the fuel tank assembly ........................................................................................................................... 152
2. Disassemble the fuel pump ......................................................................................................................................... 153
4. Remove the external parts of the fuel tank assembly. ............................................................................................... 154
Examination ............................................................................................................................................................................ 154
1. Fuel pressure test ........................................................................................................................................................ 154
2. Fuel pump inspection .................................................................................................................................................. 154
3. Oil level sensor ............................................................................................................................................................ 154

7. Cooling system ............................................................................................................................................................................ 155

Know Before Service ............................................................................................................................................................... 155
Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................................................................... 155
1. The engine temperature is too high: .......................................................................................................................... 155
2. The engine temperature is too low:............................................................................................................................ 155
3. Coolant leakage ........................................................................................................................................................... 155
Coolant system distribution map ............................................................................................................................................ 156
M310 ............................................................................................................................................................................... 156
M125 ............................................................................................................................................................................... 156
M350 ............................................................................................................................................................................... 157
Coolant flow diagram .............................................................................................................................................................. 158
M310 ............................................................................................................................................................................... 158
M125 ............................................................................................................................................................................... 159
M350 ............................................................................................................................................................................... 159
Cooling system disassembly.................................................................................................................................................... 160
M310 Remove the radiator assembly ............................................................................................................................. 160
M310 Coolant system hoop/clamp distribution map ..................................................................................................... 161
M310 Thermostat assembly and small loop ................................................................................................................... 161
M125 Remove the radiator assembly ............................................................................................................................. 162
M350 Remove the radiator assembly ............................................................................................................................. 162
M350 Coolant system hoop/clamp distribution map ..................................................................................................... 163
M350 Thermostat assembly and small loop ................................................................................................................... 163
Cooling system accessories ..................................................................................................................................................... 164
1. Main water tank .......................................................................................................................................................... 164
M310 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 164
M350 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 164
2. Attention to the water tank filling port....................................................................................................................... 164
M310 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 164
2.1 Overall leak check ............................................................................................................................................. 164
2.2 Check of pressure relief valve ........................................................................................................................... 165
M350 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 165
3. Auxiliary water tank .................................................................................................................................................... 165
4. Aluminum inlet pipe and aluminum outlet pipe(M310) ............................................................................................. 165
5. Small water tank(M310).............................................................................................................................................. 165
6. Water and oil shared sensor ....................................................................................................................................... 165
7. Thermostat .................................................................................................................................................................. 166
7.1 Inspection .......................................................................................................................................................... 166
7.2 Failure phenomenon ......................................................................................................................................... 166
7.3 Disassembly ....................................................................................................................................................... 166
7.4 Thermostat core inspection .............................................................................................................................. 166
8. Water pipe .................................................................................................................................................................. 166
9. Check the water pump cover assembly(M310) .......................................................................................................... 167

8. Braking system ............................................................................................................................................................................ 168

Know Before Service ............................................................................................................................................................... 168
Trouble shooting ..................................................................................................................................................................... 169
Soft feeling from brake lever .......................................................................................................................................... 169
Hard feeling from brake lever ......................................................................................................................................... 169
Disassemble the disc brake main pump and calipers ............................................................................................................. 169
Disassemble the front disc brake main pump................................................................................................................. 169
Disassemble the rear disc brake main pump .................................................................................................................. 170
Disassemble the front disc brake caliper ........................................................................................................................ 170
10 / 223
 M125/310 ............................................................................................................................................................... 170
M350 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 170
Disassemble the rear disc brake caliper.......................................................................................................................... 171
Brake hose and wheel speed sensor ....................................................................................................................................... 172
Check the gap between the wheel speed sensor and the induction ring gear ............................................................... 172
Remove the brake hose and wheel speed sensor........................................................................................................... 172
Release brake fluid .................................................................................................................................................. 172
FMC-HU and RMC-HU ............................................................................................................................................. 173
FC-HU and wheel speed sensor (front wheel) ........................................................................................................ 173
RC-HU and wheel speed sensor (rear wheel).......................................................................................................... 173
ABS system layout ................................................................................................................................................................... 175
ABS hydraulic control unit....................................................................................................................................................... 175
Disassemble .................................................................................................................................................................... 175
ABS troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................................... 177
M310 Troubleshooting process with portable ABS diagnostic scanner.................................................................................. 178

9. Battery/charging system ............................................................................................................................................................. 179

Know Before Service ............................................................................................................................................................... 179
Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................................................................... 180
Charging system layout diagram ............................................................................................................................................. 181
Electrical schematic diagram .................................................................................................................................................. 181
Battery disassembly ................................................................................................................................................................ 181
1. Disassembly................................................................................................................................................................. 181
2. Check ........................................................................................................................................................................... 182
3. Charging ...................................................................................................................................................................... 182
Charging system check ............................................................................................................................................................ 182
1. Leakage test ................................................................................................................................................................ 182
2. Check the charging voltage ......................................................................................................................................... 182
3. Inspection of magneto stator charging coil ................................................................................................................ 182
Remove the rectifier ............................................................................................................................................................... 183

10. Front fork assembly .................................................................................................................................................................. 184

Know Before Service ............................................................................................................................................................... 184
Exploded view of front fork components: .............................................................................................................................. 185
M125/310 Directional exploded view............................................................................................................................. 185
M350 Directional exploded view .................................................................................................................................... 186
M125(2024) .................................................................................................................................................................... 187
Front fork exploded view ................................................................................................................................................ 188
M125/310 ............................................................................................................................................................... 188
M350 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 189
Exploded view of lower link board .................................................................................................................................. 190
M125/310 ............................................................................................................................................................... 190
M125 2024 version ................................................................................................................................................. 191
M350 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 192
Change the direction of the handle ........................................................................................................................................ 193
1. Remove the direction of the handle ........................................................................................................................... 193
2. Remove the components ............................................................................................................................................ 193
3. Installation of the direction component ..................................................................................................................... 194
4. Installation of the direction handle cover ................................................................................................................... 194
Replace the front wheel .......................................................................................................................................................... 195
1. Remove the front wheel assembly ............................................................................................................................. 195
2. Install the front wheel assembly ................................................................................................................................. 195
Front wheel assembly exploded view： ......................................................................................................................... 196
M310 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 196
M125 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 196
M350 ............................................................................................................................................................................... 197
Inspection and maintenance of front wheel assembly： ............................................................................................... 197
1. Disc brake .................................................................................................................................................................... 197
1.1 The service life of the disc brake disc ................................................................................................................ 197
1.2 Disc brake Replacement method ...................................................................................................................... 197

11 / 223
 2. Front wheel oil seals and bearings .............................................................................................................................. 197
2.1 Service life of front wheel oil seals and bearings .............................................................................................. 197
2.2 Replacement method of front wheel oil seal and bearing................................................................................ 198
3. Front wheel rims and tires .......................................................................................................................................... 198
3.1 The service life of the front wheel rim and tire ................................................................................................ 198
3.2 How to replace the front wheel rim and tire .................................................................................................... 198
3.3 Dynamic balance ............................................................................................................................................... 198
M125/310 replacement of the front shock absorber ............................................................................................................. 198
1. Disassemble the front wheel and front fender assembly ........................................................................................... 198
2. Remove the left and right front shock absorbers ....................................................................................................... 199
3. Reinstall the shock absorber, front fender, front wheel and other components ....................................................... 199
M350 replacement of the front shock absorber..................................................................................................................... 199
1. Disassemble the front wheel and front fender assembly ........................................................................................... 199
2. Remove the left and right front shock absorbers ....................................................................................................... 200
3. Reinstall the shock absorber, front fender, front wheel and other components ....................................................... 200
M125/310 replace the lower link board ................................................................................................................................. 201
1. Disassemble parts ahead of time ................................................................................................................................ 201
2. Remove the faucet lock............................................................................................................................................... 201
3. Removing the direction pad ........................................................................................................................................ 201
4. Remove the lower link board assembly ...................................................................................................................... 202
5. Install the lower link board assembly ......................................................................................................................... 202
6. Install other disassembly components........................................................................................................................ 202
M350 replace the lower link board ......................................................................................................................................... 202

11. Disassemble the engine of the vehicle ..................................................................................................................................... 204

1. Disassemble the storage box .............................................................................................................................................. 204
2. Remove the cover ............................................................................................................................................................... 204
3. Put the coolant and pull out the connection plug .............................................................................................................. 205
4. Disassemble the engine ...................................................................................................................................................... 207
5. Install the engine................................................................................................................................................................. 207

12. Disassembly and assembly of vehicle covering parts ............................................................................................................... 209

Disassembly and assembly of vehicle panel ........................................................................................................................... 210
Windshield removal ................................................................................................................................................................ 210
Removal of the front sun visor................................................................................................................................................ 210
Removal of the front cover ..................................................................................................................................................... 211
Removal of the front panel ..................................................................................................................................................... 211
Disassembly of headlights....................................................................................................................................................... 211
Removal of front turn signal ................................................................................................................................................... 212
Disassembly of the of the Speedometer panel ....................................................................................................................... 212
Removal of the front left and right panels .............................................................................................................................. 212
Removal of the front part of vent ........................................................................................................................................... 213
Removal of the windshield base ............................................................................................................................................. 213
Removal of the left and right decorative covers of the front storage box ............................................................................. 214
Disassembly of the left &right side cover ............................................................................................................................... 215
Disassembly of the foot pedals and trim cover ...................................................................................................................... 215
Removal of the surrounding middle part ................................................................................................................................ 216
Disassembly of the surrounding bottom ................................................................................................................................ 216
Removal of the cooling fan air guide plate ............................................................................................................................. 216
Disassembly of the cushion..................................................................................................................................................... 216
Disassembly of the storage box .............................................................................................................................................. 217
Disassembly of the rear hand rest .......................................................................................................................................... 217
Disassembly of the left and right tail cover ............................................................................................................................ 217
Disassembly of tail light .......................................................................................................................................................... 218
Disassembly of rear fender ..................................................................................................................................................... 218
Disassembly of the left, right fuel tank cover ......................................................................................................................... 220
Disassembly the middle cover of the fuel tank ....................................................................................................................... 220
Disassembly the left and right storage boxes ......................................................................................................................... 221
Disassembly the front storage box panel................................................................................................................................ 222

12 / 223
 1. Vehicle information
Know Before Service
1. Use good quality tools, or special tools and fixtures designed by our company. The use of inferior tools may cause damage to
parts, peeling of plating, improper assembly, etc.
2. The O-rings, paper gaskets, copper gaskets, and component sealing rings used for sealing must be replaced before assembling.
3. Fasteners with torque requirements need to use a torque wrench to check the torque; if the torque is not required, refer to
the general torque value recommended by general fasteners.
4. Clean up before assembly; after assembly, check whether the assembly is correct and in place.
5. The vehicle should be parked balanced and pay attention to safety during disassembly and assembly. Including but not limited
to the use of electric tools, hand tools, pneumatic tools, hydraulic tools, handling; prevent contact with skin, eyes, burns, etc.
6. The replaced oils, liquids, batteries, etc. must be recycled and handed over to qualified institutions for disposal; it is forbidden
to dump them at will to pollute the environment or water sources.
7. Swallowing or inhaling coolant, brake fluid, etc. will cause certain harm to the human body. Any exposed skin such as hands
and face should be cleaned thoroughly after each addition. If swallowed by mistake, immediately contact the poison control
center or hospital; if inhaled, please immediately go to a ventilated environment. If it accidentally splashes into the eyes,
immediately rinse the eyes with a large amount of running water and seek medical advice or consultation in time. Keep away
from children and pets.
8 M310 and M125 vehicles produced before mid-August 2022 have the structure of M6×16 bolts + flanging bushing + flanging
bushing buffer rubber, which can be replaced by M6×14 shoulder socket head cap bolts. Similar places in subsequent chapters
of this manual will not be repeated.

Only part of the basic requirements for matters needing attention, prevention of accidental injury, etc. can be listed; it is not
possible to list all situations in detail. Be vigilant during disassembly and assembly to prevent accidents.

13 / 223
Body label
① The vehicle identification code VIN can be seen after opening the seat cushion, and the VIN code is engraved on the cross
tube at the rear of the frame.
② The muffler code is on the inner side above the muffler.
③ The nameplate is above the radiator.
④ PKE, OBD interface and water tank filling port position are pasted on the right storage box cover.
⑤ The engine identification code is engraved on the left crankcase.
⑥ The storage box warning label is pasted on the front of the storage box.
Remarks: Different rows of nameplate, muffler code and warning paste content is different.The figure below is illustrated by
M310.

14 / 223
M310 Technical specification
Item Specification
Front tire specification 110/80－14 CM－SC01 59S
Rear tire specification 140/70－14 CM－SC01 68S
Front rim specification MT:2.5×14
Rear rim specification MT:3.75×14
Vehicle
Brake fluid DOT4 0.23L（0.06 US gal,0.05 lmp gal）
Replace fine filter： 1.75L（0.46 US gal,0.39 lmp gal）
Oil consumption
Without replacing the fine filter： 1.7L（0.45 US gal,0.37 lmp gal）
Gearbox oil consumption 0.2L（0.05 US gal,0.04 lmp gal）
Fuel oil 95 and above
Engine
Idle speed (r/min) 1600±100
Spark plug model NGK LMAR8A－9
Spark plug Gap 0.8～0.9mm(0.031～0.035 in)
Resistance (kΩ) 3～7.5
Total amount of coolant 1.64L（0.43 US gal,0.36 lmp gal）
Thermostat opening temperature 80～84℃(176～183.2F)
Cooling
Thermostat fully open temperature 95℃(203F)
system
Thermostat opening stroke ≥3.5mm (0.13 in)
Coolant type Ethylene glycol + distilled water
Front wheel/steering system
Item Standard Limit
Tread depth - ≥1.6mm (0.063 in)
Normal temperature standard tire pressure 260kPa (2.7 kgf/cm2,37.7 PSI) -
Front wheel rim Radial - 1.5mm (0.006 in)
runout Axial - 1.5mm (0.006 in)
Rear wheel/suspension system
Item Standard Limit
Tread depth - ≥1.6mm (0.063 in)
Normal temperature standard tire pressure 260kPa (2.7 kgf/cm2,37.7 PSI) -
Radial - 1.5mm (0.006 in)
Rear wheel rim runout
Axial - 1.5mm (0.006 in)
V belt

Top width（1） 26.4mm(1.039 in) ≥25.4mm(1 in)

Standard position of rear shock absorber and preload regulator Third gear -
Brake system
Item Standard Limit
Brake fluid DOT4 -
Front brake disc Brake pad use limit - Trough bottom
Brake disc thickness ≥4.0mm(0.16 in) ＜4.0mm(0.16 in)
Brake fluid DOT4 -
Rear brake disc Brake pad use limit - Trough bottom
Brake disc thickness ≥4.0mm(0.16 in) ＜4.0mm(0.16 in)

15 / 223
Battery/charging system
Item Standard
Type YTX12-BS
Capacity 12Ah
Battery self-discharge current 1.1mA average
Full 13.1～13.3V
Charging voltage required for ≤12.8V
Voltage unloaded bike
Charging voltage required for ≤12V
Battery loading
Constant voltage range 14.4～14.8V
Constant voltage charging
Initial charging current 0.1～0.2 times the battery capacity
mode
Charging time 6～24 hours
Maximum charging current 0.1 times the battery capacity
Constant current charging Charging time 5～8 hours
mode Charging current × charging time must be controlled within the current
range of 0.5 to 0.8 times the battery capacity
M125/M125(2024) Technical specification
Item Specification
Front tire specification 100/80－14 CM576 48P
Rear tire specification 120/70－14 CM577 61P
Front rim specification MT:2.5×14
Rear rim specification MT:3.5×14
Brake fluid DOT4 0.23L（0.06 US gal,0.05 lmp gal）
Vehicle
0.95L（0.25 US gal,0.21 lmp
Replace fine filter：
gal）
Oil consumption
Without replacing the 0.9L（0.24 US gal,0.2 lmp
fine filter： gal）
Gearbox oil consumption 0.16L（0.04 US gal,0.04 lmp gal）
Idle speed (r/min) 1500±100
Engine
Fuel oil 95 and above
Spark plug model TORCH CR8EI
Spark plug Gap 0.7～0.9mm(0.028～0.035 in)
Resistance (kΩ) 3～7.5
Total amount of coolant 0.9L（0.24 US gal,0.2 lmp gal）
Thermostat opening temperature 80～84℃(176～183.2F)
Cooling
system Thermostat fully open temperature 95℃(203F)
Thermostat opening stroke ≥3.5mm (0.13 in)
Coolant type Ethylene glycol + distilled water
Front wheel/steering system
Item Standard Limit
Tread depth - ≥1.6mm (0.063 in)
Normal temperature standard tire pressure 220kPa (2.24 kgf/cm2, 32 PSI) -
Front wheel rim Radial - 1.5mm (0.006 in)
runout Axial - 1.5mm (0.006 in)

16 / 223
Rear wheel/suspension system
Item Standard Limit
Tread depth - ≥1.6mm (0.063 in)
Normal temperature standard tire pressure 270kPa (2.75 kgf/cm2,39 PSI) -
Radial - 1.5mm (0.006 in)
Rear wheel rim runout
Axial - 1.5mm (0.006 in)
V belt

Top width 25.3mm (0.996 in) ≥24.3mm (0.957 in)

Standard position of rear shock absorber and preload regulator Third gear -
Brake system
Item Standard Limit
Brake fluid DOT4 -
Front brake disc Brake pad use limit - Trough bottom
Brake disc thickness ≥4.0mm (0.16 in) ＜4.0mm(0.16 in)
Brake fluid DOT4 -
Rear brake disc Brake pad use limit - Trough bottom
Brake disc thickness ≥4.0mm (0.16 in) ＜4.0mm(0.16 in)
Battery/charging system
Item Standard
Type 6-FM-7L
Capacity 7Ah
Battery self-discharge current 1.1mA average
Full 13.1～13.3V
Charging voltage required for
≤12.8V
Voltage unloaded bike
Charging voltage required for
≤12V
Battery loading
Constant voltage range 14.4～14.8V
Constant voltage charging
Initial charging current 0.1～0.2 times the battery capacity
mode
Charging time 6～24 hours
Maximum charging current 0.1 times the battery capacity
Constant current charging Charging time 5～8 hours
mode Charging current × charging time must be controlled within the current
range of 0.5 to 0.8 times the battery capacity

17 / 223
M350 Technical specification
Item Specification
Front tire specification 120/70－15 CM576 56S
Rear tire specification 140/70－14 CM577 68S
Front rim specification MT:3.5×15
Rear rim specification MT:3.75×14
Vehicle
Brake fluid DOT4 0.23L（0.06 US gal,0.05 lmp gal）
Replace fine filter： 1.75L（0.46 US gal,0.39 lmp gal）
Oil consumption
Without replacing the fine filter： 1.55L（0.41 US gal,0.34 lmp gal）
Gearbox oil consumption 0.2L（0.05 US gal,0.04 lmp gal）
Fuel oil 95 and above
Engine
Idle speed (r/min) 1600±100
Spark plug model NGK LMAR8A－9
Spark plug Gap 0.8～0.9mm(0.031～0.035 in)
Resistance (kΩ) 3～7.5
Total amount of coolant 1.44L（0.38 US gal,0.32 lmp gal）
Thermostat opening temperature 80～84℃(176～183.2F)
Cooling
Thermostat fully open temperature 95℃(203F)
system
Thermostat opening stroke ≥3.5mm (0.13 in)
Coolant type Ethylene glycol + distilled water
Front wheel/steering system
Item Standard Limit
Tread depth - ≥1.6mm (0.063 in)
Normal temperature standard tire pressure 240kPa(2.45 kgf/cm2,34.8 PSI) -
Front wheel rim Radial - 1.5mm (0.006 in)
runout Axial - 1.5mm (0.006 in)
Rear wheel/suspension system
Item Standard Limit
Tread depth - ≥1.6mm (0.063 in)
Normal temperature standard tire pressure 260kPa (2.7 kgf/cm2,37.7 PSI) -
Radial - 1.5mm (0.006 in)
Rear wheel rim runout
Axial - 1.5mm (0.006 in)
V belt

Top width（1） 27.8mm(1.094 in) ≥26.8mm(1.055 in)

Standard position of rear shock absorber and preload regulator Third gear -
Brake system
Item Standard Limit
Brake fluid DOT4 -
Front brake disc Brake pad use limit - Trough bottom
Brake disc thickness ≥4.5mm(0.18 in) ＜4.5mm(0.18 in)
Brake fluid DOT4 -
Rear brake disc Brake pad use limit - Trough bottom
Brake disc thickness ≥4.0mm(0.16 in) ＜4.0mm(0.16 in)

18 / 223
Battery/charging system
Item Standard
Type YTX12-BS
Capacity 12Ah
Battery self-discharge current 1.1mA average
Full 13.1～13.3V
Charging voltage required for ≤12.8V
Voltage unloaded bike
Charging voltage required for ≤12V
Battery loading
Constant voltage range 14.4～14.8V
Constant voltage charging
Initial charging current 0.1～0.2 times the battery capacity
mode
Charging time 6～24 hours
Maximum charging current 0.1 times the battery capacity
Constant current charging Charging time 5～8 hours
mode Charging current × charging time must be controlled within the current
range of 0.5 to 0.8 times the battery capacity

Lamp/Speedometer/switch description
Item Specification
High beam 12V～23W
Front headlight
Low beam 12V～15W
Front position light 2.8W
Front turn signal 1.2W
Light（LED）
Rear turn signal 1W
License plate light 0.5W
Brake lights/tail lights 1.3/0.4W
Storage box atmosphere light 0.2W
Main insurance 25A
ECM 15A
ABS hydraulic control unit motor 25A
Insurance Hydraulic control unit ECU 10A
Lights 10A
Regular power supply 15A
spare 15A
Water
temperature Room temperature 1.5～4.0 KΩ
sensor

19 / 223
 Tightening torque
Bolt tightening torque of general tightening part
Intensity Grade 4.8-6.8 (mark "4" on the head of the Grade 8.8 (mark "7" or "8.8" on the head of
level bolt) the bolt)
Tightening torque Standar Breaking Tightening Standard Breaking
Bolt diameter
range d value torque torque range value torque
M4 1-2 1.4 / 1.5-3 2.5 /

M5 2-4 2.9 4.5 3-6 4.5 8

M6 4-7 4.9 10 8-12 10 14.5

M8 10-16 12.2 20 18-28 22 34

M10 22-25 24.5 45 40-60 44 76

M12 35-55 43 75 70-100 77 112

M14 50-80 69 123 110-160 124 200

M16 80-130 110 195 170-250 200 300

M18 130-190 150 285 200-280 270 450

Remarks: The connection tightening torque of plastic parts is half of the tightening torque of grade 6.8 bolts

20 / 223
Cable/ pipe/electrical device distribution map
1. Distribution map of lamps and lanterns

1-Left front turn signal 2-Left daytime running light 3-Side reflector 4-Position light 5-Right daytime running light 6-Headlight 7-
Right front turn signal 8-Right-hand handle auxiliary switch 9-Right-hand handle switch 10-Rear tail light/system Moving lamp
11-Rear right turn signal 12-Rear reflector 13-License plate lamp 14-Left rear turn signal 15-Left handle switch 16-Left handle
assistant switch
2. Throttle cable

1- Oil return line 2- Fuel line

21 / 223
3. Brake upper pump and brake hose

1-Front disc brake main pump 2-FMC-HU brake hose 3-RMC-HU brake hose 4-rear disc brake main pump
4. Calipers, brake hoses and wheel speed sensors

1-brake disc (front) 2- front whell ABS induction ring gear 3-wheel speed sensor (front wheel) 4-front disc brake caliper 5-FC-HU
brake hose 6- rear whell ABS induction ring gear 7-brake disc (rear) 8-rear disc brake caliper 9-wheel speed sensor (rear wheel)
10-RC-HU brake hose

22 / 223
5. Distribution map of brake system accessories
5.1 M310

1-wheel speed sensor (front wheel) 2-FC-HU brake hose 3-RC-HU brake hose 4-wheel speed sensor (rear wheel) 5-rear brake
lever 6-rear brake switch 7-RMC -HU brake hose 8-rear disc brake main pump 9-FMC-HU brake hose 10-front brake switch 11-
front disc brake main pump 12-front brake handle 13-hydraulic control unit

23 / 223
5.2 M125

1-wheel speed sensor (front wheel) 2-FC-HU brake hose 3-RC-HU brake hose 4-wheel speed sensor (rear wheel) 5-rear brake
lever 6-rear brake switch 7-RMC -HU brake hose 8-rear disc brake main pump 9-FMC-HU brake hose 10-front brake switch 11-
front disc brake main pump 12-front brake handle 13-hydraulic control unit

24 / 223
5.3 M350

1-wheel speed sensor (front wheel) 2-FC-HU brake hose 3-RC-HU brake hose 4-wheel speed sensor (rear wheel) 5-rear brake
lever 6-rear brake switch 7-RMC -HU brake hose 8-rear disc brake main pump 9-FMC-HU brake hose 10-front brake switch 11-
front disc brake main pump 12-front brake handle 13-hydraulic control unit

25 / 223
6. Oil supply system
6.1 M310 Fuel evaporation

1- Fuel level sensor 2- Fuel tank 3- Fuel pump 4- Oil-air separator (welded inside the fuel tank) 5- Fuel tank cap 6-
Adsorption/vent pipe 7-High pressure fuel pipe 8-Carbon tank 9-Carbon tank solenoid valve 10- Solenoid valve intake pipe 11-
solenoid valve outlet pipe 12-throttle valve body assembly 13-intake pipe
Caution:
The carbon canister assembly includes a carbon canister 8, an adsorption/vent pipe 6, a solenoid valve intake pipe 10, a solenoid
valve outlet pipe 11 and a vent/leakage pipe 13. The carbon canister components are sold as a complete set and are sold
separately without being disassembled. If the vent tube is damaged, you can purchase a reliable and weather-resistant hose
with the same or similar inner and outer diameters. A small amount of gasoline that enters the canister after reversing may leak
from the pipe 13.

Fuel evaporation:
Oil and gas → oil and gas separator (inside the oil tank) → adsorption/vent pipe → solenoid valve intake pipe → solenoid valve
outlet pipe → throttle valve body assembly → intake manifold → cylinder

26 / 223
6.2 M125 Fuel evaporation

1- Fuel level sensor 2- Fuel tank 3- Fuel pump 4- Oil-air separator (welded inside the fuel tank) 5- Fuel tank cap 6-
Adsorption/vent pipe 7-High pressure fuel pipe 8-Carbon tank 9-Carbon tank solenoid valve 10- Solenoid valve intake pipe 11-
solenoid valve outlet pipe 12-throttle valve body assembly
Fuel evaporation:
Oil and gas → oil and gas separator (inside the oil tank) → adsorption/vent pipe → solenoid valve intake pipe → solenoid valve
outlet pipe → throttle valve body assembly → intake manifold → cylinder
6.3 M350 Fuel evaporation

1- Fuel level sensor 2- Fuel tank 3- Fuel pump 4- Oil-air separator (welded inside the fuel tank) 5- Fuel tank cap 6-
Adsorption/vent pipe 7-High pressure fuel pipe 8-Carbon tank 9-Carbon tank solenoid valve 10- Solenoid valve intake pipe 11-
solenoid valve outlet pipe 12-throttle valve body assembly
Fuel evaporation:
Oil and gas → oil and gas separator (inside the oil tank) → adsorption/vent pipe → solenoid valve intake pipe → solenoid valve
outlet pipe → throttle valve body assembly → intake manifold → cylinder
27 / 223
6.4 M310 Fuel supply

Fuel supply system:

Air→Carbon canister→Adsorption/vent pipe→Oil separator (inside the oil tank)
Fuel → Fuel pump filter screen → Fuel pump → High pressure fuel pipe → Fuel injector → Cylinder
6.5 M125 Fuel supply

Fuel supply system:

Air→Carbon canister→Adsorption/vent pipe→Oil separator (inside the oil tank)
Fuel → Fuel pump filter screen → Fuel pump → High pressure fuel pipe → Fuel injector → Cylinder

28 / 223
6.6 M350 Fuel supply

Fuel supply system:

Air→Carbon canister→Adsorption/vent pipe→Oil separator (inside the oil tank)
Fuel → Fuel pump filter screen → Fuel pump → High pressure fuel pipe → Fuel injector → Cylinder

7. Distribution map of cooling system accessories

7.1 M310

1- Main water tank 2- Water tank filling port 3- Secondary water tank 4- Aluminum water inlet pipe 5- Aluminum water outlet
pipe 6- Small water tank 7- Water and oil shared sensor 8- Thermostat 9- Water pump cover assembly

29 / 223
7.2 M125

1- Secondary water tank 2-Secondary water tank link pipe 3-Engine inlet pipe 4- Thermostat outlet pipe 5- Thermostat 6- Water
tank inlet pipe 7- Water and oil shared sensor 8- Water tank outlet pipe 9- Water tank cover 10- Radiator assembly 11- Water
pump cover assembly

30 / 223
7.3 M350

1- Main water tank 2- Water tank filling port 3- Secondary water tank 4- auxiliary water tank is connected with water pipe 5-
main water tank inlet pipe 6- main water tank outlet pipe 7- Water and oil shared sensor 8- Thermostat 9- Water pump cover
assembly

8. Electrical device layout

8.1 M125

31 / 223
1-TFT Speedometer 2-Flasher 3-horn 4-faucet lock 5-PKE 6-main cable 7-ignition coil 8-side bracket flameout switch 9-engine
controller (ECU) 10-buzzer 11-cushion lock 12 -Dump switch 13-Windshield motor controller 14-USB charging cable 15-Front
storage box lock 16-Electronic fuel tank lock 17-Canister solenoid valve
18-Battery 19-Rectifier

32 / 223
1-TFT meter 2-Windshield motor controller 3-PKE 4-faucet lock 5-front storage box lock 6-speaker 7-USB charging cable 8-dump
switch

1- Cushion Lock 2- Rectifier 3- Buzzer 4- Engine Controller (ECU) 5- Battery 6- Fuse Box 1 7- Electronic Fuel Tank Lock 8- Fuse Box
2 9- Fuse Box 3 10- Ignition Coil 11- Side Bracket flameout switch

33 / 223
8.2 M310

1-TFT Speedometer 2-Flasher 3-horn 4-faucet lock 5-PKE 6-main cable 7-ignition coil 8-side bracket flameout switch 9-engine
controller (ECU) 10-buzzer 11-cushion lock 12 -Dump switch 13-Windshield motor controller 14-USB charging cable 15-Front
storage box lock 16-Electronic fuel tank lock 17-Canister solenoid valve

34 / 223
18-Battery 19-Rectifier

1-TFT meter 2-Windshield motor controller 3-PKE 4-faucet lock 5-front storage box lock 6-speaker 7-USB charging cable 8-dump
switch

1- Cushion Lock 2- Rectifier 3- Buzzer 4- Engine Controller (ECU) 5- Battery 6- Fuse Box 1 7- Electronic Fuel Tank Lock 8- Fuse Box
2 9- Fuse Box 3 10- Ignition Coil 11- Side Bracket flameout switch

35 / 223
8.3 M350

1-TFT Speedometer 2- horn 3- faucet lock 4- charging port holder 5-PKE 6-main cable 7-ignition coil 8-side bracket flameout
switch 9-engine controller (ECU) 10- Rectifier 11-cushion lock 12 -Dump switch 13-Windshield motor controller 14- Flasher 15-
antenna 16-- USB charging cable 17-Front storage box lock 18-Electronic fuel tank lock 19- Canister solenoid valve 20-Start relay
21- battery 22-buzzer

36 / 223
9. Intake and exhaust system
9.1 M310

1- External oil and gas separator 2- Cylinder head 3- Throttle valve body assembly 4- Intake manifold 5- Cylinder head exhaust
pipe 6- Air filter intake pipe 7- Air filter outlet pipe 8- Cylinder 9- Muffler 10- Crankshaft Box exhaust pipe

Intake system (indicated by the green arrow):

Air → Air filter intake pipe → Air filter element → Air filter outlet pipe → Throttle valve assembly body → Intake manifold →
Cylinder → Muffler

Cylinder head exhaust gas control system (red arrow indicates):

Exhaust gas → cylinder head cover → oil and gas separator → cylinder head exhaust pipe → air filter → air filter outlet pipe →
throttle valve body → intake manifold → cylinder → muffler

Gearbox exhaust gas control system (indicated by the blue arrow):

Exhaust gas → gearbox exhaust pipe → air filter outlet pipe → throttle valve body → intake manifold → cylinder → muffle

37 / 223
9.2 M125

1- Cylinder head 2-Cylinder head exhaust pipe 3- Air filter intake pipe 4- Crankshaft Box exhaust pipe 5-Air filter outlet pipe 6-
Throttle valve body assembly 7- Intake manifold 8-Cylinder 9- Muffler

Intake system (indicated by the green arrow):

Air → Air filter intake pipe → Air filter element → Air filter outlet pipe → Throttle valve assembly body → Intake manifold →
Cylinder → Muffler

Cylinder head exhaust gas control system (red arrow indicates):

Exhaust gas → cylinder head cover →cylinder head exhaust pipe → air filter → air filter outlet pipe → throttle valve body →
intake manifold → cylinder → muffler

Gearbox exhaust gas control system (indicated by the blue arrow):

Exhaust gas → gearbox exhaust pipe → air filter outlet pipe → throttle valve body → intake manifold → cylinder → muffle

38 / 223
9.3 M350

1- Cylinder head 2-Cylinder head exhaust pipe 3- Air filter intake pipe 4- Crankshaft Box exhaust pipe 5-Air filter outlet pipe 6-
Throttle valve body assembly 7- Intake manifold 8-Cylinder 9- Muffler

Intake system (indicated by the green arrow):

Air → Air filter intake pipe → Air filter element → Air filter outlet pipe → Throttle valve assembly body → Intake manifold →
Cylinder → Muffler

Cylinder head exhaust gas control system (red arrow indicates):

Exhaust gas → cylinder head cover →cylinder head exhaust pipe → air filter → air filter outlet pipe → throttle valve body →
intake manifold → cylinder → muffler

Gearbox exhaust gas control system (indicated by the blue arrow):

Exhaust gas → gearbox exhaust pipe → air filter outlet pipe → throttle valve body → intake manifold → cylinder → muffle

39 / 223
Tool

125-piece tool set Torque wrench On-board tools Claw hammer

Pull code Rubber hammer Dynamic Balancing Machine Tire raking machine

Oil pan Measuring cup Funnel Taps, dies

Micrometer Depth gauge Vernier caliper Feeler gauge

PT300 electronic spraying and

Tire pressure gauge Magnetic base + dial indicator writing diagnostic Speedometer 17#Inner hexagon
（16PIN）

40 / 223
 Hoop clamp Internal Circlip Pliers External circlip pliers Clamp multimeter

Multimeter Dust blow gun M350 replace the oil filter

Some of the above pictures are from the Internet, and the copyright belongs to the author of the original picture. Do not
use it for other purposes.
Swell nail description

①Press down the center cylinder with 4# inner hexagon or other tools, you can hear a sound or the center cylinder moves
axially by 2mm;
②Pry open the gap with a blade, nail or carving knife, etc. and remove it; if space permits, you can reach it Push out from the
back;
③Pinch the outer ring with two fingers, and push the center cylinder up to the initial position;
④Pinch the center cylinder with two fingers to install the swell nails to the installation position;
⑤The outer ring is attached to the connected parts; if not attached Check whether it is misaligned;
⑥Press the center cylinder with your fingers or other tools, and you can hear a sound or the top of the center cylinder is almost
flush with the top surface of the outer ring, indicating that the assembly is in place.

41 / 223
 2. Maintenance
Know Before Service
1. Use good quality tools, or special tools and fixtures designed by our company. The use of inferior tools may cause damage to
parts, peeling of plating, improper assembly, etc.
2. The O-rings, paper gaskets, copper gaskets, and component seals used for sealing must be replaced before assembly.
3. Fasteners with torque requirements need to use a torque wrench to check the torque; if the torque is not required, refer to
the general torque value recommended by general fasteners.
4. Clean up before assembly; after assembly, check whether the assembly is correct and in place.
5. The vehicle should be parked balanced and pay attention to safety during disassembly and assembly. Including but not limited
to the use of electric tools, hand tools, pneumatic tools, hydraulic tools, and handling. Prevent contact with skin, eyes, burns,
electric shocks, etc.
6. The replaced oils, liquids, batteries, etc. must be recycled and handed over to a qualified organization for disposal; it is
forbidden to dump them at will to pollute the environment or water sources.
7. Swallowing or inhaling coolant, brake fluid, etc. will cause certain harm to the human body. Any exposed skin such as hands
and face should be cleaned thoroughly after each addition. If swallowed by mistake, immediately contact the poison control
center or hospital; if inhaled, immediately go to a ventilated environment. If it accidentally splashes into the eyes, immediately
rinse the eyes with a large amount of running water and seek medical advice or consultation in time. Keep away from children
and pets.
8. If you need to clean or wash the body parts of the vehicle, you should use neutral car wash fluid or tap water, diesel,
kerosene, etc. Acidic or alkaline car wash fluid will cause irreversible corrosion of the surface paint, electroplating surface, and
anodized surface of the parts; gasoline will cause premature aging or hardening of sealants, gaskets, and rubber parts, reducing
the service life. Non-woven fabrics should be used for wiping with no residue. Ordinary rags may leave cloth scraps or wool, etc.,
which may affect the assembly or cause other adverse effects.
9. The following is the instructions for disassembly and assembly of swell nails.

①Press the center cylinder with 4# inner hexagon or other tools, you can hear a sound or the center cylinder moves axially by
2mm (0.079 in);
②Pry open the gap with a blade, nail or carving knife, etc. and remove it; if there is space It is allowed to reach to the back to
push out;
③Pinch the outer ring with two fingers and push the center cylinder up to the initial position;
④Pinch the center cylinder with two fingers to install the swell nails to the installation position;
⑤The outer ring fits the connected parts; if it does not fit, check for misalignment;
⑥ Press the center cylinder with your fingers or other tools, and you can hear a sound or the top of the center cylinder is
almost flush with the top surface of the outer ring, indicating that the assembly is in place.

Only part of the basic requirements for matters needing attention, prevention of accidental injury, etc. can be listed; it is not
possible to list all situations in detail. Be vigilant during disassembly and assembly to prevent accidents.

42 / 223
 M310 Maintenance schedule
I: inspection（Inspect and clean,adjust,lubricate or replace if necessary） R:replace T：Tighten ★:Comment
Inspectio km/ Initial Every Every
mile 1000/621 5000/3107 10000/6214 Replace regularly Torque
Check item n before
N.m/kgf.m
driving Months Initial 3 Every 15 Every 30
Inspection every 2 years or 20,000
Cradle buffer glue
kilometers (12427 mile)
Air filter (filter element) I R
Engine air inlet filter I R
M8：22±4/2.2±0.4
Bolts and nuts of muffler T T M10：45±5/4.6±0.5
** Spark plug I
★Replace when
the maintenance
Engine oil I
reminder light is
flashing
Oil filter R R
* Throttle body I I
* Throttle cable clearance I I
Idle speed I I
* Fuel evaporative pollutant
control system
I
Radiator I
* Fuel pipe I I
20,000 kilometers
V belt I (12427 mile)
** Braking System I I
Brake hose I Every 4 years
Brake fluid I Every 2 years
** Tire I
First adjust nut
** Steering mechanism bolts and
nuts
T T 15±2/1.5±0.2;the second
adjust nut align the first nut
Steering bearing in Steering Every5000km/3107mile inspection
mechanism or clean or lubricate
Front shock absorber I
Rear shock absorber I
** Bolts and nuts for body and M12：65±5/6.6±0.5
engine installation
T T
M16：80±5/8.2±0.5
4 years or 40,000
Coolant I I kilometers (24855
mile)
Gearbox oil R R
** Valve clearance (cold
inspection)
In: 0.08～0.12mm (0.003～0.005 I
in) Row: 0.18～0.22mm (0.007～
0.009 in)
*This service is provided by a dealer or a qualified maintenance organization, if the owner has the appropriate tools, service
information, and has a certain understanding of machinery, he can implement it by himself.
**For safety reasons, such items should be provided by dealers or qualified maintenance organizations.
★First maintenance for the first 1000 kilometers (621 mile) or 3 months (whichever comes first), second maintenance for the
actual mileage of the instrument when the actual mileage reaches 5000 kilometers (3107 mile), and every 5000 kilometers (3107
mile) or 15 months thereafter (whichever comes first) Perform a regular maintenance.

43 / 223
 M125/M125(2024) Maintenance schedule
I: inspection（Inspect and clean,adjust,lubricate or replace if necessary） R:replace T：Tighten ★: Comment
Inspectio km/ Initial Every Every
mile 1000/621 4000/2485 8000/4971 Replace regularly Torque
Check item n before
N.m/kgf.m
driving Months Initial 3 Every 6 Every 12
Inspection every 2 years or 20,000
Cradle buffer glue
kilometers (12427 mile)
Air filter (filter element) ★First
Engine air inlet filter ★First
M8：22±4/2.2±0.4
Bolts and nuts of muffler T T
M10：45±5/4.6±0.5
** Spark plug I
★Replace when the maintenance
Engine oil I
reminder light is flashing
Oil filter R R
* Throttle body I I
* hrottle cable clearance I I
Idle speed I I
* Fuel evaporative pollutant
control system
I
Radiator pipe I
* Fuel pipe I
24,000 kilometers
V belt I (14913 mile)
** Braking System I I
Brake hose I Every 4 years
Brake fluid I Every 2 years
** Tire I
** Steering mechanism bolts and
nuts
T T

Steering bearing in Steering Every 4000km/2485mile inspection

mechanism or clean or lubricate
Front shock absorber I
Rear shock absorber I
** Bolts and nuts for body and M12：65±5/6.6±0.5
engine installation
T T M16：80±5/8.2±0.5
4 years or 40,000
Coolant I I kilometers (24855
mile)
Gearbox oil R R
** Valve clearance (cold
inspection)
In: 0.08～0.12mm (0.003～0.005 I
in) Row: 0.12～0.16mm (0.005～
0.006 in)
*This service is provided by a dealer or a qualified maintenance organization, if the owner has the appropriate tools, service
information, and has a certain understanding of machinery, he can implement it by himself.
**For safety reasons, such items should be provided by dealers or qualified maintenance organizations.
★First:M125 2024 version:check every 3000 kilometers (1863 mile) and replace every 6000 kilometers (3726 mile).For M125 is
4000 kilometers (2485 mile) and 8000 kilometers (4971).
★Second maintenance for the first 1000 kilometers (621 mile) or 3 months (whichever comes first), second maintenance for the
actual mileage of the instrument when the actual mileage reaches 4000 kilometers (2485 mile), and every 4000 kilometers (2485
mile) or 6 months thereafter (whichever comes first) Perform a regular maintenance.

44 / 223
 M350 Maintenance schedule
I: inspection（Inspect and clean,adjust,lubricate or replace if necessary） R:replace T：Tighten ★:Comment
Inspectio km/ Initial Every Every
mile 1000/621 4000/2485 8000/4971 Replace regularly Torque
Check item n before
N.m/kgf.m
driving Months Initial 3 Every 15 Every 30
Inspection every 2 years or 20,000
Cradle buffer glue
kilometers (12427 mile)
Air filter (filter element) I R
Engine air inlet filter R
M8：22±4/2.2±0.4
Bolts and nuts of muffler T T M10：45±5/4.6±0.5
** Spark plug I
Engine oil I ★Note1
Oil filter R R
* Throttle body I I
* Throttle cable clearance I I
Idle speed I I
* Fuel evaporative pollutant
control system
I
Radiator I
* Fuel pipe I I
20,000 kilometers
V belt I (12427 mile)
** Braking System I I
Brake hose I Every 4 years
Brake fluid I Every 2 years
** Tire I
First adjust nut
** Steering mechanism bolts and
nuts
T 15±2/1.5±0.2;the second
adjust nut align the first nut
Steering bearing in Steering Every 4000km/2485mile inspection
mechanism or clean or lubricate
Front shock absorber I
Rear shock absorber I
** Bolts and nuts for body and M12：65±5/6.6±0.5
engine installation
T T M16：80±5/8.2±0.5
3 years or 30,000
Coolant I I I kilometers (18641
mile)
Gearbox oil R R
** Valve clearance (cold
inspection)
In: 0.08～0.12mm (0.003～0.005 I
in) Row: 0.18～0.22mm (0.007～
0.009 in)
Active wheel,driven wheel I ★Note2
*This service is provided by a dealer or a qualified maintenance organization, if the owner has the appropriate tools, service
information, and has a certain understanding of machinery, he can implement it by himself.
**For safety reasons, such items should be provided by dealers or qualified maintenance organizations.
★Note1: First maintenance for the first 1000 kilometers (621 mile) or 3 months (whichever comes first), second maintenance for
the actual mileage of the instrument when the actual mileage reaches 4000 kilometers (2485 mile), and every 4000 kilometers
(2485 mile) or 15 months thereafter (whichever comes first) Perform a regular maintenance.
★Note2：Active and driven wheel bushings are recommended to be maintained and lubricated every 10000km (6214 mile) with
Shell brand Gadus S3 V220 C2 extreme pressure grease or high temperature resistant No.2 grease of the same viscosity to

45 / 223
ensure riding comfort. Transmission system: If it is found th at the driving speed has dropped significantly, it is recommended to
maintain and inspect th e CVT transmission system at any time, and replace it in advance if necessary.

●The initial maintenance should be carried out strictly in accordance with the above table, otherwise it may cause damage to
the vehicle or other unpredictable failures.
●In order to keep your vehicle running normally, it is recommended to provide services by a dealer or a qualified maintenance
organization. Improper maintenance or maintenance may cause damage to the vehicle or other unpredictable failures.
●Replacement of unqualified parts will cause accelerated wear of your vehicle and shorten its service life.
●Check the brake disc, muffler, spark plug, coolant and other items after cooling down.
●Pay attention to protection when replacing brake fluid and coolant to avoid contact with skin and eyes and cause injury. At the
same time, it is necessary to avoid dripping onto the surface of the parts and damaging the paint or surface.

●The waste generated in the maintenance process, such as cleaning agent, waste engine oil, etc., should be properly disposed
of, and random dumping is prohibited to avoid environmental pollution.
●The items listed in the needle are used in regular environments. If they are often used in harsh environments, the frequency of
maintenance should be increased.
●Steering system, braking system, electronic fuel injection system, shock absorber and wheels are all key components, and it is
recommended to be carried out by a qualified maintenance organization.
M310 Air filter (filter element), air inlet
filter element
Step：
1. Support the vehicle firmly
Prop up the vehicle with the main bracket and put down
the side brackets, as shown in the figure.

b. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove the 4 M6×14 bolts as

shown in the figure.

2. Remove the left engine cover c. Pull out the front part of the left engine cover first and
a. Use your fingers to pull out the decorative buckle; note then move it about 30mm (1.2 in) in the direction of the rear
that vehicles produced after March 23, 2021 will only have mudguard to remove it. The bolts removed in the second
this decorative buckle, and early-produced vehicles do not step will fall off at this time. Early production vehicles have
have this decorative buckle. the shock-proof sponge shown in the figure, if it has fallen,
Use 4# inner hexagon to remove the M6×14 bolt as shown proceed to the next step, otherwise, remove it first. Vehicles
in the figure. The bolt here cannot be removed temporarily, that do not have it proceed directly to the next step.
just loosen it completely.

46 / 223
3. Remove the air inlet cover
a. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove the M6×16 bolt as
shown in the figure. The bolt here cannot be removed
temporarily, just loosen it completely.

5. Remove the air filter housing

a. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the 9 screws that
fix the housing of the air filter.

b. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove the 3 M6×14 bolts as

shown in the figure.

b. Remove the air filter housing.

c. Remove the air inlet cover and the air inlet filter element
together. Remove the rubber strip on the box.

6. Replace Air filter element

a. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the 6 screws that
fix the filter element that comes with the air filter.

4. Replace the air inlet filter

a. Remove the old air inlet filter element and the rubber
strip on the air inlet cover. Use a blow gun to blow away the
dust on the inside, then wipe the inner wall dry with a clean
non-woven fabric.

b. Remove the old air filter element. Blow the dust inside
the air inlet pipe with a dust blower, and then wipe the inner
wall with a clean non-woven cloth.

b. Replace with 2 new rubber strips (one is installed in the

air inlet cover, the other is installed in the box). Take out the c. Replace the new filter element and sealing strip.
new air inlet filter element and install it into the air inlet
cover in the direction shown.

47 / 223
7. Inspection air filter waste oil pipe
Wipe clean the surface of the waste oil pipe and visually
check for liquid. If so, use pliers to remove the waste oil pipe
clamp, clean the waste oil pipe, and then reinstall it. Pay
attention to increase the frequency of inspection
appropriately when the air humidity is high.

f. Before installing other bolts, install the exposed sponge

and plug it back into the left cover.

8. Reinstall
a. Refer to the steps of removing the filter housing to
install the housing back.
b. Replace the air inlet baffle and the air inlet cover of the
replaced air inlet filter element.

g. Use 4# inner hexagon to install the other 4 M6×14 bolts.

c. If the original scooter has a shock-proof sponge, it needs
Replace the decorative buckle.
to be placed well, if not, go to the next step.

d. Clip M6×14 bolts to the inner step hole of the engine left
cover, and then use a 4# inner hexagon to penetrate from
the outside and hold the bolt

.
e. Align the left bolt with the mounting hole and tighten it. ●The vehicle must be parked on a flat and stable ground or a
lifting platform.
●The operation can only be performed after the engine has
cooled down completely.

●The air filter element and the engine air inlet element
should be replaced every 10000km (621 mile).
48 / 223
●The air filter element and the engine air inlet element
should be cleaned regularly in accordance with the provisions
of the regular maintenance and lubrication table.
●If you often ride in humid or dusty areas, you should check
the air filter element more frequently. Be sure to inspect the
waste oil pipe of the air filter frequently.
●If the filter element is damaged, it must be replaced, and
otherwise the dirt will be directed into the engine and cause
damage to the engine.
●Ensure that the filter element is assembled in place.
b. Use 4# inner hexagon to press down the center
cylindrical pins of the 2 swell nails, and then remove the swell
nails and the engine rear decorative cover.
●If the air filter is clogged with dust, the air intake resistance
will increase and the output power will decrease.
●If the filter element of the engine air intake is blocked by
dust, the air intake resistance will increase, which will reduce
the heat dissipation of the belt and affect the life of the belt.
●If the replacement period is not reached, the surface of the
filter element is clean without damage, and you can use a
dust blow gun to blow air from the clean side of the filter
element to blow away the dust on the surface of the filter
element.
●Do not let water enter the air filter when washing the
c. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove the 4 pcs Hexagon
vehicle.
socket head screw M6×14 bolts as shown in the figure.
M125 Air filter (filter element), air inlet
filter element
Step：
1. Support the vehicle firmly
Prop up the vehicle with the main bracket and put down
the side brackets, as shown in the figure.

d. Remove the front part of the left engine cover. The bolts
removed in the second step will fall off at this time.
3. Replace the air inlet filter
Use a corss screwdriver to remove the 4 self-tapping
screws that come with the air inlet sponge filter assembly.
Remove the air inlet sponge after removing the front cover.
After replacing the new sponge, put the front shell back, pay
2. Remove the left engine cover attention to the screws should be installed vertically and the
torque should not be too large. The air inlet sponge filter
a. Use your fingers to pull out the decorative buckle.
should be replaced every 8000 kilometers (4971 miles) or 12
Use 4# inner hexagon to remove the M6×14 bolt as shown
months (whichever comes first).
in the figure. The bolt here cannot be removed temporarily,
just loosen it completely.

b. Remove the sponge and replace it with a new filter

element. Note that the black side faces the engine and the
white side faces outward

49 / 223
 c. Replace the new filter element and sealing strip.
6. Inspection air filter waste oil pipe
Wipe clean the surface of the waste oil pipe and visually
check for liquid. If so, use pliers to remove the waste oil pipe
clamp, clean the waste oil pipe, and then reinstall it. Pay
attention to increase the frequency of inspection
appropriately when the air humidity is high.

4. Remove the air filter housing

a. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the 9 pcs screws
that fix the housing of the air filter.

7. Reinstall
a. Refer to the steps of removing the filter housing to
install the housing back.
b. Replace the air inlet baffle and the air inlet cover of the
b. Remove the air filter housing. replaced air inlet filter element.
c. Clip M6×14 bolt to the inner step hole of the engine left
cover, and then use a 4# inner hexagon to penetrate from
the outside and hold the bolt

5. Replace Air filter element .

a. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the 6 screws that d. Align the left bolt with the mounting hole and tighten it.
fix the filter element that comes with the air filter.

e. Use 4# inner hexagon to install the other 4 M6×14 bolts.

Replace the decorative buckle.
b. Remove the old air filter element. Blow the dust inside
the air inlet pipe with a dust blower, and then wipe the inner
wall with a clean non-woven cloth.

50 / 223
 f. Reinstall the engine rear decorative cover.
2. Remove the left engine cover
a. Use your fingers to pull out the decorative buckle.
●The vehicle must be parked on a flat and stable ground or a Use 4# inner hexagon to remove the M6×14 bolt as shown
lifting platform. in the figure. The bolt here cannot be removed temporarily,
●The operation can only be performed after the engine has just loosen it completely. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove
cooled down completely. the 4 M6×14 bolts as shown in the figure.

●The air filter element is checked every 4000 kilometers or 6

months (whichever comes first), and replaced every 8000
kilometers or 12 months (whichever comes first).
●The air filter element and the engine air inlet element
should be cleaned regularly in accordance with the provisions
of the regular maintenance and lubrication table.
●If you often ride in humid or dusty areas, you should check
the air filter element more frequently. Be sure to inspect the
waste oil pipe of the air filter frequently. 3. Remove the air intake cover
●If the filter element is damaged, it must be replaced, Use a corss screwdriver to remove the 5 self-tapping
otherwise the dirt will be directed into the engine and cause screws that come with the air inlet sponge filter assembly.
damage to the engine. Remove the air inlet sponge after removing the front cover.
●Ensure that the filter element is assembled in place. After replacing the new sponge, put the front shell back, pay
attention to the screws should be installed vertically and the
torque should not be too large. The air inlet sponge filter
●If the air filter is clogged with dust, the air intake resistance should be replaced every 6000 kilometers (3728 miles) or 12
will increase and the output power will decrease. months (whichever comes first).
●If the filter element of the engine air intake is blocked by
dust, the air intake resistance will increase, which will reduce
the heat dissipation of the belt and affect the life of the belt.
●If the replacement period is not reached, the surface of the
filter element is clean without damage, and you can use a
dust blow gun to blow air from the clean side of the filter
element to blow away the dust on the surface of the filter
element.
●Do not let water enter the air filter when washing the
vehicle.
M125(2024) Air filter (filter element), air 4. Replace the air inlet filter element
inlet filter element a. Remove the sponge and replace it with a new filter
Step： element. Note that the black side faces the engine and the
1. Support the vehicle firmly white side faces outward
Prop up the vehicle with the main bracket and put down
the side brackets, as shown in the figure.

51 / 223
5. Replace Air filter element d. Align the left bolt with the mounting hole and tighten
a. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the bolt.remove it.Put the 4 bolts back in with the 4# inner hexagon.
the Air filter element cover.

b. Remove the old air filter element. Blow the dust inside
the air inlet pipe with a dust blower, and then wipe the inner
wall with a clean non-woven cloth.
●The vehicle must be parked on a flat and stable ground or a
lifting platform.
●The operation can only be performed after the engine has
cooled down completely.

●The air filter element is checked every 3000 kilometers or 6

months (whichever comes first), and replaced every 6000
kilometers (3728 miles) or 12 months (whichever comes
c. Replace the new filter element and sealing strip. first).
6. Inspection air filter waste oil pipe ●The air filter element and the engine air inlet element
Wipe clean the surface of the waste oil pipe and visually should be cleaned regularly in accordance with the provisions
check for liquid. If so, use pliers to remove the waste oil pipe of the regular maintenance and lubrication table.
clamp, clean the waste oil pipe, and then reinstall it. Pay ●If you often ride in humid or dusty areas, you should check
attention to increase the frequency of inspection the air filter element more frequently. Be sure to inspect the
appropriately when the air humidity is high. waste oil pipe of the air filter frequently.
●If the filter element is damaged, it must be replaced,
otherwise the dirt will be directed into the engine and cause
damage to the engine.
●Ensure that the filter element is assembled in place.
M350 Air filter (filter element), air inlet
filter element
Step：
1. Support the vehicle firmly
Prop up the vehicle with the main bracket and put down
the side bracket, as shown in the picture.
7. Reinstall
a. Refer to the steps of removing the filter housing to
install the housing back.
b. Replace the air inlet baffle and the air inlet cover of the
replaced air inlet filter element.
c. Clip M6×14 bolt to the inner step hole of the engine left
cover, and then use a 4# inner hexagon to penetrate from
the outside and hold the bolt

2. Remove the left engine cover

a. Press the center cylindrical pins of the four expansion
nails at the inner part of the back with 4# hex, and remove
the three expansion nails on the bottom plate of the
decorative cover of the air filter. Remove the expansion nail
from the rear top surface.
52 / 223
 b. Remove the sponge and replace it with a new filter
element. Note that the black side faces the engine and the
white side faces out.

Remove the expansion nails from the top of the front part.

4. Remove the air filter shell

a. Push 2 pieces of decorative glue inside the air filter with
4# hex.

b. Remove the four hexagon M6x14 bolts shown with the

4# hex socket.

b. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two tapping

nails.

c. Pull out the three mushroom buttons on air filter

decoration cover and remove the air filter decoration cover.

c. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws that

secure the cover of the air filter.

3. Replace the air inlet filter element

a. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four tapping
nails delivered with the air intake sponge filter assembly.
Remove the air intake sponge after removing the front shell.
Install the front shell back after replacing with new sponge.
Pay attention to install the screws vertically and the torque
should not be too large. The air intake sponge filter element d. Remove the shell of the air filter.
is replaced every 4000 km (2485mile) or 15 months
(whichever is reached first).

e. Place the rubber plug and tapping nail properly to avoid

loss.

53 / 223
5. Replace the filter element of the air filter
a. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the six screws used
to secure the filter element from the air filter.

c. Align the bolts to the mounting holes and tighten them.

b. Remove the old empty filter element. Use the dust

blower gun to clean the dust inside the inlet pipe and then
wipe the inner wall clean with a clean non-woven cloth.

c. Replace the filter element and seal with a new one.

6. Check the waste oil pipe of air filter d. Install the other three M6x14 bolts using the 4# hex
After removing the rubber plug, use a flashlight to polish it socket.
from the bottom according to the arrow direction, and
observe whether the waste oil drain pipe accumulates dirt or
water through the rubber plug hole.If yes, use pliers to
remove the waste oil pipe clamp ①, pull out the black plug,
and then install it again after draining the waste oil or
sewage.Pay attention to increase the inspection frequency
when the air humidity is high. If there is too much dirt in the
hose, be sure to check whether there is too much dirt or
damage in the air filter element, and replace the air filter
element if necessary.

●The vehicle must be parked on a flat and stable ground or a

lifting platform.
●The operation can only be performed after the engine has
cooled down completely.

7. Reassembly
a. Refer to the procedure for removing the air filter ●The air filter element is checked every 4000 kilometers or
housing to reassemble it. 15 months (whichever comes first), and replaced every 8000
b. Put the bolt M6 × 14 is clamped at the step hole on the kilometers or 30 months (whichever comes first). The air inlet
inside of the left engine hood, and then 4 # hexagonal socket sponge filter should be replaced every 4000 kilometers or 15
is penetrated from the outside to counter the bolt. months (whichever comes first).
●The air filter element and the engine air inlet element
should be cleaned regularly in accordance with the provisions
of the regular maintenance and lubrication table.
●If you often ride in humid or dusty areas, you should check
the air filter element more frequently. Be sure to inspect the
waste oil pipe of the air filter frequently.
●If the filter element is damaged, it must be replaced,
otherwise the dirt will be directed into the engine and cause
damage to the engine.
54 / 223
●Ensure that the filter element is assembled in place. Use the 14# sleeve to inspection whether the 3 pcs bolts at
the junction of the rear muffler and the swingarm are loose.
2.2 The modelsⅡ
●If the air filter is clogged with dust, the air intake resistance Use the 14# sleeve to inspection whether the 2 pcs bolts at
will increase and the output power will decrease. the junction of the rear muffler and the swingarm are loose.
●If the filter element of the engine air intake is blocked by 2.3 The modelsⅢ
dust, the air intake resistance will increase, which will reduce
Use the 8# inner hexgon socket to inspection whether the 2
the heat dissipation of the belt and affect the life of the belt.
pcs bolts at the junction of the rear muffler and the swingarm
●If the replacement period is not reached, the surface of the
are loose.
filter element is clean without damage, and you can use a
dust blow gun to blow air from the clean side of the filter
element to blow away the dust on the surface of the filter
element. ●Do not touch all metal surfaces of the muffler while the
●Do not let water enter the air filter when washing the engine is running or after riding to prevent burns.
vehicle. ●The vehicle must be parked on a flat and stable ground or a
lifting platform.
●If you need to replace the new exhaust port gasket, you
Bolts and nuts of muffler must wait for the muffler to cool down completely before
1. Check for air leaks at the engine exhaust. starting operation.
The modelsⅠ:

●Do not blast the throttle for a long time on the spot.
●Large load and long-term low-speed driving will damage the
engine and muffler.
●It is forbidden to use leaded gasoline to avoid the loss of
exhaust gas purification ability due to catalyst failure.

The modelsⅡ:
●If you need to remove the muffler for other operations, it is
recommended to cover the air inlet and outlet holes of the
muffler with textured paper to prevent foreign objects from
entering.

The models Ⅲ:
●Keep the drain hole at the bottom of the muffler unblocked
to prevent condensation water from accumulating in the
muffler cavity.

a. If there is a slight air leak, first try to tighten the exhaust

port nut with 6# inner hexagon; if the problem is not solved, ●Clean up the dirt, dirt and other stains on the surface of the
remove the muffler and replace with a new engine exhaust muffler in time.
port gasket.
b. If there is no sign of air leakage, use 6# inner hexagon to
check whether the M8 nut at the exhaust port of the engine M310/350 Spark plug
is loose. Caution:
2. Check for nut and bolts at the muffler ●Before disassembling, blow off the dust near the spark plug
with a dust blower.
2.1 The modelsⅠ
55 / 223
●After removing the spark plug, prevent foreign objects from
falling into the engine.
●The M350 steps are similar to the M310, taking the M310 as
an example.

1. Disassemble the spark plug

a. Put down the left rear pedal and use the 4# inner
hexagon to remove the M6×14 bolts.
f. Use your fingers or a plastic crowbar to forcefully break
out from the arrow point until the bolt near the arrow point
is exposed. Because there are still bolts on the upper part
that have not been removed, it cannot be removed directly.

b. Pull out in sequence in the direction of the arrow (from

the rear wheel to the front wheel). Note that there are 5
staples at the red circle and a circle of buckles around. It
takes a lot of force to pull out.

g. Use 5# inner hexagon to remove M6×14 bolt, then

remove bushing.

c. Use your fingers or a plastic crowbar to insert the arrow

indication point, first pry the arrow indication point open the
gap and then pull up.

h. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove 7pcs M6×14 bolts.

d. Respectively use 4# inner hexagon to remove the 2

M6×12 bolts at the front pedal.

i. Use 4# inner hexagon to press down the center

cylindrical pins of the 4 swell nails on the left, and then
remove the swell nails. Remove the bolt on the left front part
with a 4# inner hexagon for instructions on disassembly and
assembly of swell nails, please refer to the pre-service
instructions in this chapter. M310 vehicles produced before
May 18, 2022 have 4 expansion nails on the left side, and
e. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove the 3 M6×14 bolts that
vehicles after that have 3 expansion nails; those produced on
surround the left side(1).
May 18 should be distinguished.

56 / 223
 b. Clean the electrode with a special spark plug cleaner.
Use a hard iron wire or steel needle to remove the attached
carbon deposits.
c. Use a feeler gauge to inspect the gap between the
center electrode and the side electrode.

j. Press the blue part inward at the junction of green and

d. If necessary, the gap can be adjusted by bending the
blue as shown in the figure; pull the red and green
side electrodes, paying attention to the strength during
components outward. Then apply force from the rear wheel
adjustment.
to the front wheel along the junction of the red and blue
e. Clean the surface of the spark plug gasket and the joint
parts, push the red part outwards, and force the blue parts
surface, and wipe off the dirt on the thread.
inward to break apart. Remove the left pedal and left pedal
f. First screw it back to the engine by hand, and then use
trim cover assembly.
the tool to turn it clockwise to the standard torque.

Model: NGK LMAR8A-9

Resistance between the terminal screw and the center
electrode: 3～7.5kΩ
Clearance: 0.8-0.9mm (0.031-0.035in)
Torque: 14N.m (1.4kgf.m, 10 lbf.ft)
3. Refer to the steps to remove the spark plug to
k. Use a dust blow gun to blow away the dust and debris restore all parts.
near the spark plug.

●The vehicle must be parked on a flat and stable ground or a

lifting platform.
●The operation can only be performed after the engine has
cooled down completely.

●Do not pull or knock the center electrode.

l. Pull out the ignition coil high-voltage cap.
●If the replacement of inappropriate heating value or inferior
m. Remove the spark plug by turning it counterclockwise
spark plugs causes engine damage, it is not within the scope
with the vehicle-mounted tool or special 14# spark plug
of the three guarantees.
sleeve.
●When installing the spark plug, the torque should not be
too large, and the thread should be screwed in manually
before tightening. If there is no torque wrench to replace the
spark plug, you can turn it by hand until there is resistance
and then rotate it 1/2 turn. For example, if you use an old
spark plug, you can turn it to the standard torque as soon as
possible.
●Pay attention and order when removing the plastic buckle
to avoid the buckle from breaking.
n. It is recommended to seal the spark plug installation
hole with masking paper or other soft plastic bags to prevent M125 Spark plug
foreign matter from entering the engine. Caution:
2. Check the spark plug ●Before disassembling, blow off the dust near the spark plug
with a dust blower.
a. Check whether the insulator is cracked or damaged,
●After removing the spark plug, prevent foreign objects from
whether the center electrode is abraded, fouled, corroded,
falling into the engine.
excessively carbonized or discolored (the color of the ceramic
●The M125(2024) steps are similar to the M125, taking the
insulator around the middle electrode of the spark plug
M125 as an example.
should be light brown). If so, replace the spark plug with a
new one. 1. Disassemble the spark plug
a. Put down the right rear pedal and use the 4# inner
hexagon to remove the M6×14 bolt.

57 / 223
 is exposed. Because there are still bolts on the upper part
that have not been removed, it cannot be removed directly.

b. Pull out in sequence in the direction of the arrow (from

the rear wheel to the front wheel). Note that there are 5
g. Use 5# inner hexagon to remove the M6×16 bolt,
staples at the red circle and a circle of buckles around. It
takes a lot of force to pull out. remove bushing.

c. Use your fingers or a plastic crowbar to insert the arrow

indication point, first pry the arrow indication point open the
gap and then pull up. h. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove 7 pcs M6×14 bolts.

d. Respectively use 4# inner hexagon to remove the 2 i. Use 4# inner hexagon to press down the center
M6×12 bolts at the front pedal. cylindrical pins of the 3 swell nails on the right, and then
remove the swell nails. Remove the M6×14 bolt on the right
front part with a 4# inner hexagon. For instructions on
disassembly and assembly of swell nails, please refer to the
pre-service instructions in this chapter.

e. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove the 3 M6×14 bolts that

surround the right side.

j. Press the blue part inward at the junction of green and

blue as shown in the figure; pull the red and green
components outward. Then apply force from the rear wheel
to the front wheel along the junction of the red and blue
parts, push the red part outwards, and force the blue parts
inward to break apart. Remove the right pedal and right
pedal trim cover assembly.
f. Use your fingers or a plastic crowbar to forcefully break
out from the arrow point until the bolt near the arrow point

58 / 223
 d. If necessary, the gap can be adjusted by bending the
side electrodes, paying attention to the strength during
adjustment.
e. Clean the surface of the spark plug gasket and the joint
surface, and wipe off the dirt on the thread.
f. First screw it back to the engine by hand, and then use
the tool to turn it clockwise to the standard torque.

Model: NGK CR8EI-8

Resistance between the terminal screw and the center
k. Use a dust blow gun to blow away the dust and debris electrode: 3～7.5kΩ
near the spark plug. Clearance: 0.7-0.9mm (0.028-0.035in)
Torque: 14N.m (1.4kgf.m, 10 lbf.ft)
3. Refer to the steps to remove the spark plug to
restore all parts.

●The vehicle must be parked on a flat and stable ground or a

lifting platform.
●The operation can only be performed after the engine has
cooled down completely.

l. Pull out the ignition coil high-voltage cap.

m. Remove the spark plug by turning it counterclockwise
●Do not pull or knock the center electrode.
with the vehicle-mounted tool or special 16# spark plug
●If the replacement of inappropriate heating value or inferior
sleeve.
spark plugs causes engine damage, it is not within the scope
of the three guarantees.
●When installing the spark plug, the torque should not be
too large, and the thread should be screwed in manually
before tightening. If there is no torque wrench to replace the
spark plug, you can turn it by hand until there is resistance
and then rotate it 1/2 turn. For example, if you use an old
spark plug, you can turn it to the standard torque as soon as
possible.
●Pay attention and order when removing the plastic buckle
to avoid the buckle from breaking.
n. It is recommended to seal the spark plug installation
hole with masking paper or other soft plastic bags to prevent Engine oil
foreign matter from entering the engine.
2. Check the spark plug
a. Check whether the insulator is cracked or damaged,
●The vehicle must be parked on a flat and stable ground or a
whether the center electrode is abraded, fouled, corroded,
lifting platform.
excessively carbonized or discolored (the color of the ceramic
●Once the engine and muffler have cooled down, the
insulator around the middle electrode of the spark plug
operation can be performed.
should be light brown). If so, replace the spark plug with a
●When adding engine oil, prevent the engine oil from
new one.
dripping onto the surface of the muffler.
b. Clean the electrode with a special spark plug cleaner.
●The engine oil should be kept away from children and pets.
Use a hard iron wire or steel needle to remove the attached
Short-term contact with engine oil may irritate the skin.
carbon deposits.
Please wear long-sleeved clothes or sleeves and anti-shake
c. Use a feeler gauge to inspect the gap between the
gloves before changing the oil. If you accidentally get oil, you
center electrode and the side electrode.
need to clean it thoroughly with soapy water.
●Replaced waste engine oil must be collected uniformly and
handed over to professional organizations for proper
disposal. It is forbidden to dump at will, into trash cans or
directly onto the ground, etc.

59 / 223
●The engine oil and gear box oil should be replaced
according to the periodic table specified in the manual.
●It is necessary to purchase regular and qualified engine oil.
Inferior engine oil will aggravate engine wear and, in severe
cases, will cause engine failure and shorten service life.
●The amount of oil should meet the requirements, too much
or too little may cause engine damage.

●The copper gasket and the combination gasket need to be

replaced after disassembly; the O-ring and gasket are
recommended to be replaced with new ones.
●O-rings need to be assembled in place to avoid trimming. b. Use a 10# sleeve to loosen the 2 nuts (1b) at the bottom
●After removing the oil dipstick and the filler nut, it is of the fine filter cover; use a 10# torx wrench to remove the
necessary to prevent foreign matter from falling into the upper nut (1c). Then remove the nut (1b) at the bottom.
engine. c. Remove the fine filter cover⑵ and O ring (3a). Remove
the spring⑷, the fine filter (oil filter element) (3b) and the
M310 gasket (3c) in sequence.
1. Drain the oil d. Replace the new fine filter (oil filter element) and
a. Start the vehicle and turn off the engine for 3-5 minutes gasket. The fine filter assembly already contains O ring (3a),
after idling for 3-5 minutes. fine filter (oil filter element) (3b) and gasket (3c). Replace in
b. Use the main bracket to park the vehicle firmly. order.
c. Rotate the oil dipstick⑴ on the right side of the engine e. Remove the O ring on the fine filter cover and replace it
counterclockwise, and remove the oil dipstick⑴ and O ring with a new O ring. First put the O ring (3a) into the groove of
⑵ to accelerate the oil flow. the fine filter cover⑵, and then install it back to the engine
box.
f. Screw back the 3 nuts (1), first pre-tighten the bottom 2
with a 10# sleeve, and tighten the upper nut (1a) with a 10#
torx wrench; then tighten the bottom 2 screws. Torque: 12
N.m (1.2 kgf.m, 9 lbf.ft).
3. Add oil
a. Replace the filter element with a measuring cup with a
d. After placing an oil pan under the oil drain bolt, use a viscosity of SAE5W-40/10W-40/10W-50. The new API SN
14# sleeve to remove the oil drain bolt⑶ and the combined grade or higher motorcycle special machine 1.75L (1.85US qt,
seal gasket⑷. 1.54 lmp qt, 0.46 US gal, 0.39 lmp gal). If the filter element is
not replaced, the measuring cup is filled with 1.7L (1.8US qt,
1.49 lmp qt, 0.45 US gal, 0.37 lmp gal).
b. Use a funnel + measuring cup to add engine oil to the
fuel filler opening on the right crankcase cover of the engine.

e. Wipe clean the joint surface with a non-woven fabric.

Inspect the oil drain bolt⑶ whether the joint surface is
scratched; if there is any, replace it with a new one, if not,
wipe it clean.
f. Replace the new combination gasket⑷, and use a 14#
sleeve to install the oil drain bolt⑶ and combination gasket c. Wipe clean the fuel filler opening with a non-woven
⑷ back to the engine box. Torque: 25N.m (2.6 kgf.m, 18 cloth.
lbf.ft).
2. Replace fine filter
a. Place an oil pan under the fine filter cover.

60 / 223
 it clean and install it in order. Torque: 20 N.m (2 kgf.m, 15
lbf.ft).
f. Fill the measuring cup with 0.2L of oil or gearbox special
oil (0.21US qt, 0.18 lmp qt, 0.05 US gal, 0.04 lmp gal).
g. Check whether the O ring⑵ is damaged or aging, wipe
it clean if not, and replace it if there is any.
h. Wipe clean the nut⑴ and the fuel filler port with a non-
woven cloth, first put the O ring⑵ into the nut⑴, and then
turn it clockwise by hand and install it back to the fuel filler
d.inspection O ring⑵Whether there is damage or aging, if
port of the gear box.
not, wipe it clean, if any, replace it.
5. Confirm the oil level
a. After starting the vehicle and running at idle speed for
several minutes, check whether all the disassembled
positions are leaking, and if there is any leakage, it needs to
be checked.
b. After the engine has been idling for 5 minutes and then
turned off for 3 minutes, check whether the oil level meets
the standard. If it does not meet the standard, draw it out or
add it to the standard.
e. Wipe clean the oil dipstick, and turn the oil dipstick⑴
and O-ring⑵ clockwise by hand to replace the right
crankcase cover of the engine.
4. Change gear box oil
a. Place an oil pan under the rear of the left engine. Rotate
the fuel filler nut⑴ counterclockwise, and remove the nut⑴
and O ring⑵.

M125
●The M125(2024) steps are similar to the M125, taking the
M125 as an example.
1. Drain the oil
a. Start the vehicle and turn off the engine for 3-5 minutes
after idling for 3-5 minutes.
b. Use the main bracket to park the vehicle firmly.
c. Rotate the oil dipstick⑴ on the right side of the engine
b. Use a 14# sleeve to loosen the oil drain bolt⑶
counterclockwise, and remove the oil dipstick⑴ and O ring
counterclockwise, and remove the bolt⑶ and copper pad⑷.
⑵ to accelerate the oil flow.

d. After placing an oil pan under the oil drain bolt, use a
14# sleeve to remove the oil drain bolt⑶ and the combined
c. Remove the oil drain bolt⑶ and the copper pad⑷. seal gasket⑷. Use a 24# sleeve to remove the strainer cover
⑸ at the bottom, take off the 34.5×3.5 acrylate rubber O-
d. After the gear box oil is completely drained, wipe the
ring⑹, the φ25.8×34.2×1.8 strainer spring⑺ and the outer
surface of the drain port with a non-woven cloth.
diameter φ22×21 cap-shaped strainer⑻. Drain the oil from
e. Replace with a new copper pad⑷, check whether the
the crankcase.
joint surface of the oil drain bolt⑶ is scratched, if not, wipe

61 / 223
 b. Use a funnel + measuring cup to add engine oil to the
fuel filler opening on the right crankcase cover of the engine.

e. Check whether the strainer ⑻ is damaged, if it is

damaged, replace it, if not, clean it up.
f. Wipe clean the joint surface with a non-woven fabric. c. Wipe clean the fuel filler opening with a non-woven
Inspect the oil drain bolt⑶ whether the joint surface is cloth.
scratched; if there is any, replace it with a new one, if not,
wipe it clean.
g. Replace the new combination gasket⑷, and use a 14#
sleeve to install the oil drain bolt⑶ and combination gasket
⑷ back to the engine box. Torque: 25N.m (2.6 kgf.m, 18 lbf.
ft). Replace the new O-ring ⑹, put the O-ring ⑹, spring ⑺
and cap-type fine filter ⑻ into the fine filter cover ⑸ in
turn, and then put it back to the bottom of the engine with a
24# sleeve.
2. Replace fine filter d.inspection O ring⑵Whether there is damage or aging, if
a. Place an oil pan under the fine filter cover.
not, wipe it clean, if any, replace it.

b. Use a 10# sleeve to loosen the 3 nuts⑴ at the fine filter

cover. e. Wipe clean the oil dipstick, and turn the oil dipstick⑴
c. Remove the fine filter cover⑵ and O ring (3a). Remove
and O-ring⑵ clockwise by hand to replace the right
the spring⑷, the fine filter (oil filter element) (3b) and the
crankcase cover of the engine.
gasket (3c) in sequence.
d. Replace the new fine filter (oil filter element) and 4. Change gear box oil
gasket. The fine filter assembly already contains O ring (3a), a. Remove the left engine cover by referring to the steps
fine filter (oil filter element) (3b) and gasket (3c). Replace in for replacing the air inlet filter element.
order.
e. Remove the O ring on the fine filter cover and replace it
with a new O ring. First put the O ring (3a) into the groove of
the fine filter cover⑵, and then install it back to the engine
box.
f. Screw back the 3 nuts (1), Torque: 12 N.m (1.2 kgf.m, 9
lbf.ft).
3. Add oil
a. Replace the filter element with a measuring cup with a
viscosity of SAE5W-40/10W-40/10W-50. The new API SN b. Place an oil pan under the rear of the left engine. Rotate
grade or higher motorcycle special machine 0.95L (1 US qt, the fuel filler nut⑴ counterclockwise, and remove the nut⑴
0.84 lmp qt, 0.25 US gal, 0.21 lmp gal). If the filter element is and O ring⑵.
not replaced, the measuring cup is filled with 0.9L (0.95 US
qt, 0.79 lmp qt, 0.24 US gal, 0.2 lmp gal).

62 / 223
 M350
1. Drain the oil
a. Start the vehicle and turn off the engine for 3-5 minutes
after idling for 3-5 minutes.
b. Use the main bracket to park the vehicle firmly.
c. Rotate the oil dipstick⑴ on the right side of the engine
counterclockwise, and remove the oil dipstick⑴ and O ring
⑵ to accelerate the oil flow.

c. Use a 14# sleeve to loosen the oil drain bolt⑶

counterclockwise, and remove the bolt⑶ and copper pad⑷.

d. After placing the oil tray under the oil drain bolt, remove
the M12×1.5×15 oil drain bolt (3) and the 12×φ20×2
combined sealing pad with the 14# sleeve.

d. Remove the oil drain bolt⑶ and the copper pad⑷.

e. After the gear box oil is completely drained, wipe the
surface of the drain port with a non-woven cloth.
f. Replace with a new copper pad⑷, check whether the
joint surface of the oil drain bolt⑶ is scratched, if not, wipe
it clean and install it in order. Torque: 20 N.m (2 kgf.m, 15
lbf.ft).
g. Fill the measuring cup with 0.16L of oil or gearbox
special oil (0.17US qt, 0.14 lmp qt, 0.04 US gal, 0.04 lmp gal).
h. Check whether the O ring⑵ is damaged or aging, wipe e. Wipe the joint surface clean with non-woven cloth.
Check whether the joint surface(3) is scratched; If yes,it
it clean if not, and replace it if there is any.
needs to replace with new one, if not wipe clean.
i. Wipe clean the nut⑴ and the fuel filler port with a non-
f. Replace the new combination gasket (4) and install the
woven cloth, first put the O ring⑵ into the nut⑴, and then
oil drain bolt (3) and combination gasket (4) back on the
turn it clockwise by hand and install it back to the fuel filler engine box with the 14# sleeve. Torque: 25 N.m(2.6 kgf.m,18
port of the gear box. lbf.ft).
5. Confirm the oil level 2. Replace the fine filter
a. After starting the vehicle and running at idle speed for a. Use a 10# sleeve to fix the M6 nut and remove the bolt
several minutes, check whether all the disassembled with an 8# sleeve, and remove the flanging bushing and filter
positions are leaking, and if there is any leakage, it needs to guard plate.
be checked.
b. After the engine has been idling for 5 minutes and then
turned off for 3 minutes, check whether the oil level meets
the standard. If it does not meet the standard, draw it out or
add it to the standard.

63 / 223
 b. The oil tray is placed under the fine filter cover. b. After removing the oil gauge, use the funnel +
measuring cup to add the oil to the oil filling port on the right
crankcase cover of the engine.

c. Remove the fine filter by turning it counterclockwise

using a 14-sided 65mm cap filter wrench + a 1/2" (12.5mm)
ratchet wrench. The Skiden model of the filter wrench is
97401. Replace the first 1000km or 3 months (whichever is
reached first), and then every 8000 km or 30 months c. Clean the refueling port with non-woven cloth.
(whichever is reached first).

d. Drain the oil from the air filter.

d. Check whether the O ring (2) is damaged or aging. If not,
wipe it clean. If so, replace it. The O-ring size of the oil gauge
is 18×3×3.5.

e. Wipe the residual oil and impurities on the engine with a

clean non-woven cloth.
f. Coat the seal ring of the new fine filter with engine oil
and install it on the engine.
Torque: 20 N.m (2 kgf. m, 15 lbf. ft). Reassemble the filter
guard. e. Wipe the oil gauge clean, and install the oil gauge (1)
Be careful not to omit the seal ring, and check the surface and O ring (2) back to the right crankcase cover of the engine
of the seal ring for damage, hardening and other defects by clockwise rotation by hand.
before assembly. 4. Replace the gearbox oil
a. Rotate the refueling mouth nut (1) counterclockwise and
remove the nut (1) and O ring (2). The specification of O ring
for the nut of the refueling mouth is 13.8×2.5. The screw cap
(1) at the refueling port does not need to be removed to
prevent foreign matter from falling into the engine.

3. Add oil
a. Replace the filter element, then use a measuring cup to
fill 1.75L (1.85US qt, 1.54lmp qt, 0.46US gal, 0.39lmp gal) of
the new API SN class or higher motorcycle special machine
with viscosity SAE5W-40/10W-40/10W-50.Without replacing
the filter element, 1.55L of gasoline (1.64US qt, 1.36lmp qt, Place the oil tray under the rear of the left engine. Loosen
0.41US gal, 0.34lmp gal) is filled with a measuring cup. the drain bolt (3) counterclockwise with the 14# sleeve.

64 / 223
 continue riding for no less than 2 minutes. High-speed
scavenging can effectively remove carbon deposits.
b. Use a regular and qualified fuel cleaner to add in the
amount indicated. Frequent use may cause damage to the oil
supply line.
2. Remove the stepper motor and clean up carbon
deposits
a. After opening the seat cushion, use 10# sleeve + ratchet
wrench to remove 3 nuts⑴. Remove the seat cushion and
put it away. Be careful not to put it directly on the ground
and avoid scratching the cushion skin.
c. Remove the M8×25 drain bolt (3) and the 8.3×16×1.5
copper pad (4).
d. After the gearbox oil is completely discharged, wipe the
surface of the oil outlet with a non-woven cloth.
e. Replace the new copper pad⑷, check whether the oil
drain bolt (3) joint surface is scratched, if not, wipe it clean
and put it back in order. Torque: 20 N.m(2 kgf.m,15 lbf.ft).
f. 0.2L (0.21US qt, 0.18lmp qt, 0.05US gal, 0.04lmp gal) of
measuring cup oil or special gearbox oil.
g. Check whether there is any damage or aging of the O b. For vehicles produced before March 7, 2022, follow this
ring, if not, wipe it clean, if there is, replace it. step, and for vehicles produced after that, skip directly to
h. Wipe the nut (3) and the refueling mouth with non- step h.
woven cloth, first put the O ring (4) into the nut (3) and then Use 4# inner hexagon to press down 4 swell nails⑵ center
rotate it clockwise back to the gear box refueling mouth by cylindrical pins, and then a total of 4 swell nails on the left
hand. and right sides⑵.
5. Confirm the oil level
a. After idling the vehicle for several minutes, check all the
disassembled locations for leakage. If yes, check it.
b. The engine will idle for 5 minutes and then turn off for 3
minutes. Check whether the oil level meets the standard.If
not, it should be withdrawn or replenished to the standard.

c. Grasp the rear of the battery cover assembly, turn it up,

and then pull it out toward the rear of the vehicle. Note that
there are buckles on both sides of the front. The rebate
position needs to be inserted in the front when re-installing.

M310/350 Throttle valve body d. Open the black negative protection cap of the main
Caution: wiring harness, use a cross-battery or 10# sleeve to remove
●The three-in-one sensor and stepper motor cannot be the battery's own bolts and move the negative line away
immersed in any liquid. from the battery; then open the red positive protection cap
●It is forbidden to adjust the idle speed adjustment screw on and remove the positive bolts. Remove the positive wire.
the valve body. Remove the battery upwards.
●The M350 steps are similar to the M310, taking the M310 as Before March 7,2022:
an example.

1. Do not dismantle the throttle body to clean up

carbon deposits
a. In the process of riding, without affecting safety and
complying with traffic laws, appropriately increase the
throttle to increase the speed to more than 7000 and
65 / 223
After March 7,2022:

h. Straighten out the cables in the battery compartment.

For the medels before March 7,2022, remove the M6×16
bolts (3) on both sides with 4# inner hexagon according to
Figure 1, and remove the bushing⑷ and cushion rubber⑸.

For vehicles produced before March 7, 2022, follow this

step, and for vehicles produced after that, skip directly to
step h.
e. Pull up the 3 fuse boxes and pull out the cables. When
re-installing, you need to insert the fuse box back to the
corresponding position and arrange all the cables, otherwise
it will be difficult to fit the battery cover in place.

For the medels after March 7,2022,remove 2 pcs swell

nails⑵ on both sides.

f. Pull out the two relay wires.

Remove the M6×16 bolts(3) on both sides with a 4# inner

hexagon.

There are a total of 8 relays, the model is: KH-1A4T.

g. Unplug the two wires of the starting relay. Open the red
and black protective caps of the starting relay, and remove
the nuts with a 10# sleeve.

i. According to this step for folding rear storage box, and

the monolithic rear storage box skip directly to the next step.
Use your fingers or a plastic crowbar to pry the glove box
rubber strip⑺ from one end and remove it. Remove the
decorative buckle⑻ of the M6 hexagon socket bolt; remove
the M6×16 bolts⑶ on both sides with 4# hex socket, remove
the bushing⑷ and the cushion rubber⑸. Remove the 3
M4×16 bolts⑼ with a Phillips screwdriver.

66 / 223
 j. Remove the decorative buckle⑻ of the M6 hexagon n. Use throttle cleaner to clean the carbon deposits on the
head of the stepper motor. Spray a small amount of cleaning
socket bolt; remove the M6×16 bolts⑶ on both sides with agent into the valve body hole. It is forbidden to soak the
4# hex socket. stepper motor with any liquid.

o. Install the stepper motor back to the valve body, paying

attention not to miss the sealing ring. Plug the plug back in.
3. Remove the throttle valve body assembly to
k. Grasp the tail skirt of the storage box and pull it upward clean up carbon deposits
obliquely, paying attention to the cables in the battery a. Unplug the plugs of the stepping motor① and the
compartment. Pull up to see the left side of the glove box three-in-one sensor②.
atmosphere lamp thread, unplug the thread and remove the
glove box assembly.

b. Place the small container under the high-pressure oil

pipe, press the buckle indicated by③ and pull out the high-
pressure oil pipe⑴ in the direction of the arrow at the same
l. Unplug the plug of the stepping motor①. time. A small amount of fuel will flow out when it is pulled
out, and it is forbidden to drip onto the surface of the part.

m. Use a short Phillips screwdriver to remove the 2

GB9074.4 M4×12 bolts③ and the anti-off card④ that come
with the throttle valve body assembly, and then remove the
c. Find the circlip at the bottom of the valve body (2) pinch
stepping motor⑽.
both ends of the circlip with your hands and move it out, and
then pull out the desorption tube (3).

67 / 223
 engine. Reversely reset all materials in the order of
disassembly.
4. M310 Disassemble the three-in-one sensor
a. If the idling speed is abnormal, it is easy to extinguish
and the spark plug and high voltage coil are eliminated, the
three-in-one sensor needs to be removed for investigation. It
should not be disassembled under normal circumstances.
b. Refer to the steps for removing carbon deposits
d. Loosen the bolt of the clamp⑷ with a 4# inner hexagon
without disassembling the throttle valve body, and unplug
and pull out the air filter outlet pipe⑸ and clamp⑹ in the
the plugs of the stepping motor① and the CTS three-in-one
direction of the arrow to pull out the throttle valve body.
sensor②. Remove the stepper motor. After turning off the
power, take out the stepping motor, do not loosen the cable
plug, press the flameout switch at startup without ignition,
check whether the motor plug can shrink back and forth, and
finally turn off the flameout switch to check whether the plug
returns to its original position.
To check whether the stepper motor is abnormal, measure
whether the resistance at both ends of A and B is 53±5.3Ω.
e. Use 5# inner hexagon to remove 2 bolts⑹ and then Bolts for fixing the stepper motor: GB9074.4 M4×12.
remove the valve body assembly from the engine.

f. Remove the heat insulation pad and O-ring assembly, c. Use a short Phillips screwdriver to remove the 2
and remove the O-ring⑽. Use a 4# inner hexagon to loosen GB9074.4 M4×16 bolts③ that comes with the throttle valve
the clamp⑼ and separate the intake manifold from the body assembly, and then remove the the anti-off card④,
valve body assembly. Use 2 10# open-end wrenches to and then take off the stepper motor. It is forbidden to soak
the sensor with any liquid.
loosen the two nuts of the fuel line⑻ and then pull them out
to remove them from the bracket; take out the cylinder end
of the throttle line from the turntable. After the two nuts of
the oil return line⑺ are loosened, completely loosen the nut
at the bottom of the threaded sleeve, and then pull out the
bracket in the direction of the axis.

d. Wipe clean the sensor head or replace with a new three-

in-one sensor, align the three-in-one sensor with the shaft⑤
and install it back on the valve body. Reinstall the stepper
motor.

g. Use throttle valve body cleaning agent to clean the

carbon deposits on the intake manifold and throttle valve
body outlet respectively. It is forbidden to directly soak the
5. M350 Disassemble the three-in-one sensor
throttle valve body assembly and intake manifold assembly
If the idle speed is abnormal, it is easy to stall, and the
with any liquid.
spark plug and high voltage coil are excluded, the sensor
h. After cleaning the heat insulation pad, replace 2 new O-
needs to be removed for troubleshooting. It should not be
rings⑽ and assemble them in place. Wipe clean the contact disassembled under normal circumstances.
surface of the intake manifold and the heat insulation pad
and the end surface of the heat insulation pad and the
68 / 223
 a. Repeat the previous steps to remove the seat cushion e. Use a short Phillips screwdriver to remove the M5 x16
and bolts on the rear before proceeding to the next step. bolt ⑤ from the throttle valve assembly and remove the
Remove the 4 expansion nails on both sides of the front. position sensor. Please align the rotation axis ⑥ when
installing it back.

b. Use the 4# hex socket to remove the M6x16 bolts on

both sides. Simple test method: The vehicle is connected with the
diagnostic instrument, press the flameout switch (no need to
fire), turn the throttle handle from the initial position to the
full open, this process to check whether the throttle position
signal changes from 0 to 100.
Position Sensor output voltage idle position: 0.7±0.1V; Full
open position: 3.6-3.9V, input voltage DC5V±0.1V.
f. Check the external intake pressure sensor:
Loosen the connector and check whether the pin is skewed
or broken.
The vehicle is connected to a diagnostic instrument,
C.Unplug the stepper motor ① and throttle position without ignition, to detect engine parameters and check
sensor ②. whether the pressure parameters are consistent with the
local atmospheric pressure.
If it is necessary to remove the intake pressure sensor,
hold the bushing and use the 8# short sleeve to remove the
bolt⑶.If it is inconvenient to operate, remove the battery
and electrical parts box before proceeding.Clamp the bottom
clamp with the pliers, move up to the top, remove the intake
pressure sensor connection hose ⑸ and sensor. Then
remove the hose from the sensor.

d. Use a short Phillips screwdriver to remove the two

GB9074.4 M4x12 bolts (3) and the stripper card (4) from the
throttle body assembly, and then remove the stepper motor.

Simple test method: After power off, take out the stepper
motor, do not loosen the cable plug, press the flameout
switch at the start of the machine, no lighting, check whether
the motor plug can shrink back and forth, finally turn off the
flameout switch, check whether the plug is back to the
original position.
To check whether the stepper motor is abnormal, you can
measure whether the resistance at both ends of A and B is
53±5.3Ω.
69 / 223
6. Throttle valve body troubleshooting process throttle to increase the speed to more than 7000 and
Throttle valve body
continue riding for no less than 2 minutes. High-speed
troubleshooting process scavenging can effectively remove carbon deposits.
b. Use a regular and qualified fuel cleaner to add in the
Idle adjustment bolt amount indicated. Frequent use may cause damage to the oil
looseness,poition
spring stagnation and
Throttle body sensor
performance check
supply line.
other problems
2. Remove the stepper motor and clean up carbon
The diagnostic
instrument eads the data deposits
According to idle Fault lights are always stream and requires the
speed,determine idle speed on druing riding engineer to judge a. After opening the seat cushion, use 10# sleeve + ratchet
adjustment bolt position and whether the sensor is
fix; replace recoil spring or working properly wrench to remove 3 nuts⑴. Remove the seat cushion and
cleaning throttle valve body
disc Check the corresponding sensor put it away. Be careful not to put it directly on the ground
according to the fault code,if the
circit is normal,the sensor can be and avoid scratching the cushion skin.
judged to be faulty and need to be
replaced.

●The vehicle must be parked on a flat and stable ground or a

lifting platform.
●Once the engine and muffler have cooled down, the
operation can be performed.
●When removing the high-pressure fuel pipe, prevent the
fuel from dripping onto the surface of the part.
●Smoking, making calls, etc. are prohibited in the workplace.
b. Use 4# inner hexagon to press down 2 swell nails⑵
center cylindrical pins, and then remove it.
●Remove the throttle valve body to clean the carbon
deposits and operate in a dust-free and dust-free
environment to prevent dust from entering the inside of the
engine.
●Prevent foreign matter from falling into the engine or air
filter.
●If the stepper motor, three-in-one sensor and heat
insulation pad are disassembled, do not miss the sealing ring
and make sure that the sealing ring is assembled in place
without cutting edges.
●Do not use carburetor cleaner or compressed air to clean
Use 4# inner hexagon to removed 2 pcs M6×16 bolts⑶.
the throttle valve body.
●The EFI system needs to be reset after reinstalling the
battery. The specific method is as follows:
a. Unlock the vehicle and support the main bracket;
b. Pinch the brake and start the vehicle;
c. Pull the engine speed above 3000 rpm;
d. After releasing the throttle, turn off the flameout switch
and lock the car;
e. After waiting for 5 seconds, unlock the vehicle again to
complete the reset of the EFI system.

M125 Throttle valve body c. Remove the decorative buckle⑻ of the M6 hexagon
socket bolt; remove the M6×16 bolts⑶ on both sides with
Caution:
●The position sensor and stepper motor cannot be immersed 4# hex socket.
in any liquid.
●It is forbidden to adjust the idle speed adjustment screw on
the valve body.
●The 125(2024) steps are similar to the M125, taking the
M125 as an example.
1. Do not dismantle the throttle body to clean up
carbon deposits
a. In the process of riding, without affecting safety and
complying with traffic laws, appropriately increase the
70 / 223
 d. Grasp the tail skirt of the storage box and pull it upward
obliquely, paying attention to the cables iny the battery
compartment. Pull up to see the left side of the glove box
atmosphere lamp thread, unplug the thread and remove the
glove box assembly.

o. Install the stepper motor back to the valve body, paying

attention not to miss the sealing ring. Plug the plug back in.
3. Remove the throttle valve body assembly to
e. Use 4# inner hexagon to loosen 2 pcs bolts come with clean up carbon deposits
the pipe clamp. a. Refer to the previous steps to loosen the bolts that
come with the clamp, then rotate the throttle valve body
assembly so that the stepping motor plug faces upwards.
Unplug the stepping motor and throttle position sensor
plugs.

Rotate the throttle body so the stepper motor plug is

facing up.Unplug the plug of the stepping motor①.

b. After unplugging the desorption pipe at the bottom, pull

out the air filter outlet pipe and then remove the throttle
valve body assembly.

f. Use a short Phillips screwdriver to remove the 2

GB9074.4 M4×12bolts③ and the anti-off card④ that come
with the throttle valve body assembly, and then remove the
stepping motor.

c. After cleaning the carbon deposits, put it back.

4. Disassemble the sensor
a. If the idling speed is abnormal, it is easy to extinguish
and the spark plug and high voltage coil are eliminated, the
ensor needs to be removed for investigation. It should not be
disassembled under normal circumstances.
b. Refer to the steps for removing carbon deposits without
disassembling the throttle valve body, and unplug the plugs
of the stepping motor① and the sensor②.
g. Use throttle cleaner to clean the carbon deposits on the
head of the stepper motor. Spray a small amount of cleaning
agent into the valve body hole. It is forbidden to soak the
stepper motor with any liquid.

71 / 223
 Loosen the connector⑦ and check whether the pin is
c. Use a short Phillips screwdriver to remove the 2 bolts③
skewed or broken. The vehicle is connected to the diagnostic
that comes with the throttle valve body assembly, and then
instrument without ignition. Check the engine parameters to
remove the three-in-one sensor④.It is forbidden to soak the
see whether the pressure parameters are consistent with the
sensor with any liquid.
local atmospheric pressure.
If you need to remove the intake pressure sensor, use an
8# short sleeve to remove the bolt (1). Use pliers to clamp
the clamp at the bottom, move it up to the top, and then
remove the intake pressure sensor connecting hose (2) and
the sensor together. Then remove the hose from the sensor.
5. Throttle valve body troubleshooting process
Throttle valve body
troubleshooting process

Idle adjustment bolt

Simple test method: looseness,poition Throttle body sensor
After turning off the power, take out the stepping motor, spring stagnation and
other problems
performance check

do not loosen the cable plug, press the flameout switch at The diagnostic
startup without ignition, check whether the motor plug can instrument eads the data
According to idle Fault lights are always stream and requires the
shrink back and forth, and finally turn off the flameout switch speed,determine idle speed on druing riding engineer to judge
to check whether the plug returns to its original position. adjustment bolt position and whether the sensor is
working properly
fix; replace recoil spring or
To check whether the stepper motor is abnormal, measure cleaning throttle valve body
disc
whether the resistance at both ends of A and B is 53±5.3Ω. Check the corresponding sensor
according to the fault code,if the
d. Use a short Phillips screwdriver to remove the GB9074.4 circit is normal,the sensor can be
judged to be faulty and need to be
M5×16 bolts ⑤ that come with the throttle valve body replaced.
assembly, and remove the position sensor. Be careful to align
the hinges ⑥ when you put them back together.
●The vehicle must be parked on a flat and stable ground or a
lifting platform.
●Once the engine and muffler have cooled down, the
operation can be performed.
●When removing the high-pressure fuel pipe, prevent the
fuel from dripping onto the surface of the part.
●Smoking, making calls, etc. are prohibited in the workplace.

●Remove the throttle valve body to clean the carbon

Connect the diagnostic instrument to the whole vehicle, deposits and operate in a dust-free and dust-free
press the flameout switch (without ignition), turn the throttle environment to prevent dust from entering the inside of the
handle from the initial position to fully open, and check engine.
whether the throttle position signal changes from 0 to 100. ●Prevent foreign matter from falling into the engine or air
e. Check whether the external intake pressure sensor is filter.
damaged ●If the stepper motor, sensor and heat insulation pad are
disassembled, do not miss the sealing ring and make sure
that the sealing ring is assembled in place without cutting
edges.
●Do not use carburetor cleaner or compressed air to clean
the throttle valve body.
●The EFI system needs to be reset after reinstalling the
battery.The specific method is as follows:
72 / 223
 a. Unlock the vehicle and support the main bracket; valve body assembly to clean up carbon deposits" to remove
b. Pinch the brake and start the vehicle; the throttle valve body assembly. Use a 10# open-end
c. Pull the engine speed above 3000 rpm; wrench to loosen the 2 nuts on the bracket to adjust. Torque:
d. After releasing the throttle, turn off the flameout switch 3.0 N.m (0.3 kgf.m, 2.2 lbf.ft).
and lock the car;
e. After waiting for 5 seconds, unlock the vehicle again to
complete the reset of the EFI system.

Throttle cable
1. Inspection
a. Check whether the rubber sleeve of the right hand
handle and the throttle cable are damaged. c. If the above two adjustments are invalid, replace the
b. Check whether the rubber sleeve of the right hand throttle cable with a new one.
rotates smoothly and whether it can return automatically. 3. Lube door cable
c. Hold the steering wheel with both hands and turn the If the rotation resistance is large and the bending of the
right hand to the right while rotating the rubber sleeve of the throttle cable and the loose strands of the wire core can be
right handle. Every time you turn a certain steering angle, eliminated, add a proper amount of lubricating oil, such as
confirm whether the throttle can be reset normally. If you sewing machine oil.
can’t reset it, you need to lubricate the cable or the inside of
a. Remove 2 bolts⑴ with a 5# inner hexagon, and move
the right handle; or replace it with a new throttle cable or the
the upper part of the switch away.
rubber sleeve of the right handle.

b. Use a syringe to draw a small amount of sewing machine

d. After starting the engine, turn the steering handle left
oil several times and inject it from the gap between the
and right to ensure that the idling speed does not change
throttle cap and the thread core, and turn the throttle while
during the steering process, and then turn off the engine.
injecting.
e. Rotate the right hand to check whether the rubber
sleeve inspection cable gap is within 2～4mm (0.1～0.2 in).
2. Adjust the throttle cable clearance
a. Fix the adjusting screw② with a 8# open-end wrench,
and then use a 10# open-end wrench to loosen the nut①
counterclockwise. Rotate the adjustment solenoid②
clockwise to reduce the free stroke, counterclockwise to
expand; adjust the gap to the specified value. After adjusting
the gap, tighten the nut①. c. If the problem with high resistance cannot be solved
Torque: 3.8 N.m (0.4 kgf.m, 2.8 lbf.ft). after lubrication, the throttle cable needs to be replaced.

●After adjusting the gap of the throttle cable, make sure that
the throttle handle can be automatically turned back to the
closed position. Do not adjust the cable to increase the
engine idling speed.
●After the adjustment, the engine idling speed cannot
increase when turning the front of the car.
●Do not use high-viscosity oil to lubricate the cable to
prevent excessive viscosity from affecting the free movement
b. If the above adjustment fails to achieve the desired of the cable.
effect, please refer to the description in "Remove the throttle
Idle speed
Caution:
73 / 223
●Before checking the idle speed, you should check other engine maintenance items and the condition is normal before
proceeding.
●Check the following items before checking the idle speed:
The maintenance indicator light " " should not light up.
The status of the spark plug has been checked.
The air filter element and the air inlet element have been inspected or replaced.
Check the throttle clearance.
●The limit screw on the valve body is not allowed to be adjusted privately.

Check idle speed:

Check the idling speed of the engine when the engine is warm.
M310/350 the idle speed range of the engine should be 1500-1700 rpm.
M125 the idle speed range of the engine should be 1400-1600 rpm.
If the idling speed is not within the standard range or the idling speed is stalled, it should be checked and handled by
professional service personnel at the designated maintenance point of Shengshi or a qualified maintenance organization.
Abnormal idling or flameout should be checked or repaired according to the troubleshooting procedure in the chapter
"Electronic Injection System" of this manual.

Fuel evaporative pollutant control system

M310 fuel evaporation

74 / 223
1- Fuel level sensor 2- Fuel tank 3- Fuel pump 4- Oil-air separator (welded inside the fuel tank) 5- Fuel tank cap 6-
Adsorption/vent pipe 7-High pressure fuel pipe 8-Carbon tank 9-Carbon tank solenoid valve 10- Solenoid valve intake pipe 11-
solenoid valve outlet pipe 12-throttle valve body assembly
Remarks: The carbon canister assembly includes carbon canister 8, adsorption/vent pipe 6, solenoid valve inlet pipe 10, and
solenoid valve outlet pipe 11. The carbon canister components are sold as a complete set and are sold separately without being
disassembled. If the vent tube is damaged, you can purchase a reliable and weather-resistant hose with the same or similar
inner and outer diameters.

M125 fuel evaporation

1- Fuel level sensor 2- Fuel tank 3- Fuel pump 4- Oil-air separator (welded inside the fuel tank) 5- Fuel tank cap 6-
Adsorption/vent pipe 7-High pressure fuel pipe 8-Carbon tank 9-Carbon tank solenoid valve 10- Solenoid valve intake pipe 11-
solenoid valve outlet pipe 12-throttle valve body assembly

Fuel evaporation:
Oil and gas → oil and gas separator (inside the oil tank) → adsorption/vent pipe → solenoid valve intake pipe → solenoid valve
outlet pipe → throttle valve body assembly → intake manifold → cylinder

75 / 223
M350 fuel evaporation

1- Fuel level sensor 2- Fuel tank 3- Fuel pump 4- Oil-air separator (welded inside the fuel tank) 5- Fuel tank cap 6-
Adsorption/vent pipe 7-High pressure fuel pipe 8-Carbon tank 9-Carbon tank solenoid valve 10- Solenoid valve intake pipe 11-
solenoid valve outlet pipe 12-throttle valve body assembly

Fuel evaporation:
Oil and gas → oil and gas separator (inside the oil tank) → adsorption/vent pipe → solenoid valve intake pipe → solenoid valve
outlet pipe → throttle valve body assembly → intake manifold → cylinder

The fuel evaporative pollutant control system can only be checked after the cover is removed.
Check the carbon canister for cracks or damage.
Check the suction/vent pipe for cracks or damage.
Check whether the solenoid valve of the carbon canister is working properly.
Check whether the solenoid valve inlet and outlet pipes are cracked or damaged.
Check whether the hoses are bent, causing the airflow to be unsmooth.

76 / 223
Radiator

●The vehicle must be parked on a flat and stable ground or a lifting platform.
●Once the engine and muffler have cooled down, the operation can be performed.
●Swallowing or inhaling the coolant will cause harm to the human body.

●Regularly check the coolant level, and always keep the position not lower than the "L" line.
●M310 it is recommended to replace the coolant every 4 years or 40,000 kilometers (24855 mile). M350 it is recommended to
replace the coolant every 3 years or 30,000 kilometers 18641 mile).
●Swallowing or inhaling the coolant will cause certain harm to the human body. After each addition of coolant, wash hands, face
and any exposed skin thoroughly in time. If swallowed by mistake, immediately contact the poison control center or hospital; if
inhaled, immediately go to a ventilated environment. If it accidentally splashes into the eyes, immediately rinse the eyes with a
large amount of running water and seek medical advice or consultation in time. Keep away from children and pets.
●The engine coolant must be a model suitable for aluminum radiators, based on ethylene glycol. Use a coolant that is suitable
for aluminum radiators, which is a mixture of coolant concentrate and distilled water in a certain proportion. If you need to add
water, you can only add distilled water. Other water quality may corrode the engine cooling system or cause more serious
consequences.
●It is necessary to select the corresponding antifreeze liquid according to the lowest possible local temperature. The vehicle
added to the factory is Total -35°C (-31F) green antifreeze. M310 the total amount of coolant is 1.64L (1.73 US qt, 1.44 lmp qt,
0.43 US gal, 0.36 lmp gal). M125 the total amount of coolant is 0.9L (0.95 US qt,0.79 lmp qt, 0.24 US gal, 0.2 lmp gal).
●Coolant may damage the paint surface. Pay attention when adding it. A small amount of splash should be wiped off with a
clean soft cloth immediately.
1.Check the coolant d. Reinstall the rubber plug after checking. Close the right
storage box cover.
M125/310
a. Press the button on the right side of the front storage M350
box switch to open the right storage box cover. Check the coolant level from the right rear gap with the
help of a flashlight.

b. After opening, buckle the rubber plug as shown in the

figure by hand, and be careful not to use sharp tools or nails
to buckle.

2. Add coolant (antifreeze) to the Coolant

expansion tank
M125/310
If the water level of the Coolant expansion tank is lower
c. Right the vehicle and use a flashlight to observe whether than the "L" line, an appropriate amount of coolant must be
the liquid level of the Coolant expansion tank is between "H" added. If there is no coolant in the Coolant expansion tank,
and "L". Pay attention to the ground as flat and level as check the cooling system for leakage first, and it must be
possible, do not inspect on the slope. And the engine needs repaired before it can be replenished.
to be in a cold state. a. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove the upper 2 M6×14
bolts.

77 / 223
 Remove the swell nail. For instructions on disassembly and c. Open the rubber cover of the auxiliary water tank, and
assembly of swell nails, please refer to the pre-service add an appropriate amount of coolant with the aid of a
instructions in this chapter. funnel. Hold the vehicle upright and observe whether the
Grasp the upper part of the storage box with one hand, liquid level in the auxiliary water tank is between "H" and "L"
and remove the bottom M6×16 bolt with the 4# inner with the help of a flashlight.
hexagon with the other hand. Pay attention to the flatness and levelness of the ground
b. Remove the right storage box assembly from the car. as much as possible, and do not check it on the slope. And
c. Open the cover of the Coolant expansion tank, and add the engine must be cold.
coolant to the Coolant expansion tank with the help of a
funnel, paying attention to adding a small amount to
between "H" and "L" several times.

3. Add coolant to the Radiator

M310
a. Refer to the above steps to remove the right storage
box assembly.
M350 b. Unscrew the Radiator filler cap indicated by the arrow.
a. Put down the right rear foot and remove the M6x14 bolt
using the 4# hex socket.

c. Use a 10# sleeve to loosen the thermostat bleed bolt (5)

counterclockwise by 4 to 5 turns, do not completely remove
it. Note that a small container is required to receive the
b. Pull it out in the arrow direction (from the rear wheel to coolant overflowing from the exhaust bolt. Do not allow the
the front wheel). Notice that there are 5 pins in the red circle coolant to drip directly onto the surface of the part.
with a buckle around them. It takes a lot of force to pull it
out.

d. Put on waterproof gloves and add coolant to the water

inlet of the Radiator with the help of an extended funnel.
Until the position of the vent bolt of the thermostat is stably
78 / 223
overflowed with coolant, the coolant level can be seen at the M125
water filling port. a. After holding the tank cover firmly, remove the three
e. Tighten the filler cap of the Radiator. Tighten the M6x14 bolts with the 4# hex socket and then remove them.
exhaust bolt⑸; torque: 8～10N.m (0.8～1 kgf.m, 6～7
lbf.ft).

b.Lift the vehicle with the lifting platform, and then

remove the M6x10 bolts (1) with the 8# sleeve, remove the
M350 6.3×12×1.6 copper pad, and release the coolant.Unscrew the
Turn the front fork to the right to the end, unscrew the cap screws (3) at the bottom of the radiator of the main water
of main water tank counterclockwise, and then add the tank. Discharge the coolant and pay attention not to miss the
coolant. Follow the steps in the M310 to loosen the O ring (4).
thermostat bolt and add coolant.

4. Put coolant 5. Check whether the fins of the radiator water

M310 tank are deformed or the air duct is blocked
a. Place an oil pan underneath, wear waterproof gloves M310
and use a 10# sleeve to remove the drain bolt⑹ and O ring a. Remove the 4 bolts that fix the radiator guard and then
use compressed air or low-pressure water guns, brushes, etc.
⑺.
to remove dirt, sand, insects and other dirt on the surface of
the radiator. When using compressed air, be careful not to
get too close to the fins. It is forbidden to flush the radiator
directly with a high-pressure water gun to prevent the fins
from deforming and blocking the air duct.

b. Remove the filler cap of the Radiator to accelerate the

flow of coolant. b. Pull the deformed fins straight with a flat engraving
c. Wipe all the joint surfaces clean with a non-woven cloth. knife or a small flat-blade screwdriver. If the deformed fins
exceed 20%, a new heat sink needs to be replaced.
Check whether the bolt⑹ joint surfaces are scratched, if
M125
any, replace them with new ones. The O ring⑺ needs to be
After removing the water tank cover according to the
replaced every time it is disassembled. previous steps, refer to M310 for maintenance.
d. Put the new O-ring⑺ into the bolt⑹ first, taking care
not to scratch the O-ring. Torque of bolt⑹: 8～10N.m (0.8～
1 kgf.m, 6～7 lbf.ft).
79 / 223
 M350
Use compressed air or low pressure water gun, brush, etc.
to remove sediment, insects and other dirt on the radiator
surface. When using compressed air, be careful not to be too
close to the fins. It is prohibited to directly flush the radiator
with a high-pressure water gun to prevent the fins from
deforming and blocking the air duct.

Be careful not to open the water tank cap, once opened,

the coolant will flow out from here.

80 / 223
6. Check all water pipes for leaks; aging.
M310

1-Radiator 2-Coolant expansion tank 3-Aluminum water inlet pipe 4-Aluminum water outlet pipe 5-Small radiator 6-Water and
oil shared sensor 7-thermostat 8-water pump assembly
M125

81 / 223
1-Secondary water tank 2-Secondary water tank link pipe 3-Engine inlet pipe 4- Thermostat outlet pipe 5- Thermostat 6- Water
tank inlet pipe 7- Water and oil shared sensor 8- Water tank outlet pipe 9- Water tank cover 10- Radiator assembly 11- Water
pump cover assembly
M350

1- Main water tank 2- Water tank filling port 3- Secondary water tank 4- Auxiliary water tank is connected with water pipe 5-
Main water tank inlet pipe 6- Main water tank outlet pipe 7- Water and oil shared sensor 8- Thermostat 9- Water pump cover
assembly

82 / 223
Fuel pipe
Caution:
●A small amount of fuel will flow out when the high-pressure
fuel pipe is removed.
●Work in an open and ventilated place. Smoking, mobile
phone calls, etc. that may cause sparks are prohibited on the
job site.
●The M125/350 steps are similar to the M310, taking the
M310 as an example.
1. Check the fuel pipe for leaks with the help of an
endoscope with LED light

The above picture shows the equipment with LED endoscope.

The picture comes from the Internet and the copyright
belongs to the author of the original picture. Do not use it for
other purposes.
2. Replace high pressure oil pipe
M310 a. Refer to steps a to j of "Remove stepping motor and
clean up carbon deposits" in the throttle valve body, first
remove the cushion and storage box components, and
remove them as shown in the figure below.

M125 b. Remove a total of 4 pcs swell nails indicated by the

arrow. For instructions on disassembly and assembly of swell
nails, please refer to the pre-service instructions in this
chapter. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove the M6×14 bolts.

M350
c. Press the blue part inward at the junction of green and
blue as shown in the figure; pull the red and green parts
outward. Then apply force from the rear wheel to the front
wheel along the junction of the red and blue parts, push the
red part outwards, and force the blue parts inward to break
apart.

83 / 223
 d. Pull down the surrounding bottom plate in the center of
the front part (near the front wheel) with one hand, and pull
down the surrounding bottom plate after pulling about h. After replacing the new high-pressure oil pipe, refer to
20mm (0.8 in) toward the rear wheel with the other hand. the disassembly steps to restore it.
There is a bracket at the place shown in the small picture, so 3. Fuel pump
it cannot be pulled down directly. 3.1 Use oil pressure gauge to measure fuel
pressure
a. Refer to steps a to k of "Remove stepper motor and
clean up carbon deposits" in the throttle valve body, first
remove the seat cushion and storage box components, and
remove them as shown in the figure below.

e. Unplug the fuel pump and start the engine at idle speed
until the engine stops. Turn the engine stop switch to " ",
power off the vehicle and lock the vehicle. Early production
vehicles did not contain high-pressure fuel pipe brackets①.
b. Unplug the fuel pump and start the engine to idle until
the engine stops. Turn the engine stop switch to " ",
power off the vehicle and lock the vehicle. After putting on
waterproof and oil-proof gloves, press the anti-trip lock and
pull out the high-pressure oil pipe in the direction of the
arrow.

f. Pull out the high-pressure oil pipe from the bracket at

the cylinder head.

c. Connect the high-pressure oil pipe of the original car to

the pressure gauge, and find another high-pressure oil pipe
to connect the pressure gauge and the fuel injector.
g. Pull out the high-pressure oil pipe in the direction of the
Start the vehicle, let the engine run at idle speed, and
arrow after pressing down the anti-dropping lock. Note that
measure the fuel pressure. M125/310 the standard pressure
there are high-pressure fuel pipe brackets and cable ties at
is: 300±10kPa (3.06±0.1Kgf/cm2, 43.5±1.45 psi). Check valve
the intake manifold of vehicles produced after March 2021.
performance: hold the pressure for 1 minute, the pressure
The vehicles produced before are only lashed with cable ties.
should be ≥240kPa (2.45Kgf/cm2, 34.8 psi).
3.2 Simple test of fuel pump
If you do not have the special equipment conditions, you
can do a simple test.
After the vehicle is in the stalled state, unlock the vehicle
and turn on the stall switch. If you do not start the engine,
you should be able to hear the sound of the fuel pump; or
pinch the high-pressure fuel pipe from the bottom with your
hands, and you should feel obvious pressure. Take care to
84 / 223
avoid the muffler to prevent burns. If it is in the engine a. Whether the fuel pipe is leaking;
starting state, the whole vehicle shall be powered off for b. Whether the fuel tank vent pipe is blocked or bent
more than 10 seconds and then check according to the above excessively;
operation. c. Whether the fuel pump filter is blocked;
4. Treatment of abnormal fuel pressure d. Whether the fuel pump is faulty;
If the fuel pressure is higher than the standard value, e. Whether the fuel is insufficient.
replace the fuel pump. If it is lower than the standard value,
you need to inspect the following items:

●When pulling out the high-level oil pipe, be sure to pull it toward the axis, and do not press or push or pull
The protruding part of the fuel pump and nozzle holder.

●It is forbidden to smoke, dial mobile phones and other actions that may cause a fire at the demolition site.
●The fuel pump is a precision component that needs to be assembled in a dust-free workshop and requires strict testing, so it is
forbidden to disassemble it by yourself.

●The EFI system needs to be reset after reinstalling the battery. For specific operations, see the precautions in the driver's
manual or the throttle valve body chapter of this manual.

85 / 223
M310 V belt
1. System Components

Parts information
Serial number part name quantity serial
M12×1.25×35 hexagon flange bolts (grade
1 1 10 φ23.2×φ40×3.25 washer 1
10.9/environmental protection color)
M14×1 Hexagon Flange Nut (Grade
2 φ12.3×φ40×4 washer 1 11 1
10/Environmental Protection Color Zinc)
3 Driving wheel drive disc 1 12 φ21.8×φ1.8 Acrylic O-ring 2
4 Distance tube 1 13 φ14.5×φ25×16 driven wheel bushing 1
5 V-shaped transmission belt 1 14 Driven wheel clutch cover 1
6 Driving wheel sliding plate 1 15 Driven wheel clutch shoe 1
7 Pulizhu 8 16 Sliding plate of driven wheel 1
8 Boot block 1 17 Driven wheel fixed disk 1
9 Ramp board 4

2. Maintenance ●Belts should be checked every 10,000 kilometers (6213

Caution: mile) or 30 months. Replace every 20,000 kilometers (12427
●Special tools are required to disassemble the driving wheel mile).
and driven wheel components. 2.1 Remove the belt
●It is recommended to regularly check and replace it by a a. Refer to the previous steps to replace the air inlet filter
designated dealer or repair shop. element and remove the left cover. Disassemble it as shown
in the figure below.

86 / 223
 f. Remove the left crankcase cover⑵ and the left
crankcase cover gasket⑷. The left crankcase cover gasket (4)
must be replaced when reinstalling, and the hollow
positioning pin (3) must not be omitted.

b. Use an 8# sleeve to remove the two bolts (1) shown in

the figure.

2.2 Disassemble the continuously variable

c. Use needle-nose pliers to clamp the exhaust pipe clamp transmission components
on the inner side of the air filter and move it upward about a. Align the cylindrical bayonet pins of the dedicated
20mm (0.8 in). Pull the exhaust pipe out of the crankcase by master and driven wheel positioning fixtures respectively
hand. with the two positioning holes inserted into the outer blades
of the driving wheel drive disc and the two symmetrical heat
dissipation holes on the driven wheel housing. The driving
disc of the driving wheel and the clutch cover of the driven
wheel cannot rotate freely.

d. Pull the tail of the air filter outward with one hand, and
press the rear inner mud plate inward with the other hand.
Separate the air filter from the rear inner mud plate.

b. Use a torque wrench (or wind screw) and a 17# sleeve

to remove the M12×1.25×35 hexagon flange bolts
counterclockwise.
e. Use an 8# sleeve to remove the 12 M6×30 hexagonal
flange bolts as shown in the figure. The two box bolts at the
bottom of the air filter need to be removed to expose the air
filter.

c. Loosen the M14×1 hexagonal flange nut

counterclockwise with a torque wrench (or wind screw) and
a 19# sleeve.

87 / 223
 d. Remove M12×1.25×35 hexagon flange bolts and h. Pinch the sliding plate of the driving wheel and the ramp
φ12.3×φ40×4 washer. Then remove the M14×1 hexagon plate inside, and remove it together with the distance tube.
flange nut and φ14.5×φ25×16 driven wheel bushing.

i. Finally, take out the φ23.2×φ40×3.25 washer, then have

completed the disassembly of the continuously variable
clutch sub-assembly.

e. Remove the positioning fixture for the main and driven

wheels, and remove the driving wheel drive plate from the
crankshaft.
2.3 Inspection
Caution: Every 3 years or driving 20000 kilometers (12427
mile), the continuously variable clutch sub-assembly needs to
be inspected, maintained or repaired! ! !
a. Inspection items and use limits of the driving wheel
① Use a knife-edge ruler to align the tapered working
surface of the driving wheel (drive disk and sliding disk) in
parallel, and then use a feeler gauge to check the amount of
wear It needs to be replaced when the gap is greater than or
equal to 0.5mm (0.02 in). Use a vernier caliper or inner
f. Remove the driven wheel clutch cover from the drive diameter micrometer to measure the inner lining aperture of
shaft. the driving wheel sliding disc. The aperture ≥35.15mm (1.384
in) needs to be replaced.

b. Measure the outer diameter of the distance cylinder

with a vernier caliper or an outer micrometer. It needs to be
replaced when the diameter is less than or equal to
g. Pinch the middle part of the V-shaped drive belt, and φ34.9mm (1.374 in).
remove the belt and the driven pulley pulley together.

88 / 223
 c. Check whether the Puli beads are worn out or round,
and need to be replaced if they are out of round and
deformed. Use a vernier caliper or an outside micrometer to
measure the diameter of the outer cylindrical surface of the
Puli beads. It needs to be replaced when the diameter is less
than or equal to φ24.5mm (1 in).

d. Check whether the V-shaped transmission belt is 2.4 Assembly

damaged such as cracks, broken wires, or missing teeth. If it
Caution:
does, it needs to be replaced. Use a vernier caliper to detect
●Before assembling, it is necessary to conduct a
the widest part of the V-shaped drive belt. It needs to be
comprehensive inspection of all the parts of the
replaced when the width is ≤25.4mm (1 in).
disassembled continuously variable clutch sub-assembly, and
replace the parts that reach the limit of use.
●Use compressed air to completely clean the dust
accumulated in the left crankcase belt chamber before
assembling.
●Before assembling, it must be ensured that there is no oil
stain on the driving wheel, V-belt, and driven wheel to avoid
slipping failure after assembling.
a. First install the φ23.2×φ40×3.25 washer on the
crankshaft and assemble it in place.

e. Check whether the inner circular surface of the clutch

cover of the driven wheel is worn or damaged. Use a vernier
caliper to measure the inner diameter of the inner circle. It
needs to be replaced when the hole diameter is ≥φ151mm
(5.945 in).

b. Then check whether the 8 Puli beads are completely

placed in the Puli groove of the driving wheel sliding disk
(Figure 1 below), and then assemble the slope plate with the
four guide blocks corresponding to the position of the driving
wheel sliding disk guide post on the driving wheel. The wheel
f. Check whether the driven wheel clutch shoe is worn or slides on the disc (picture 3 below).
damaged. Use a vernier caliper to measure the hole diameter Caution: The covered end of the inner hole of the Puli
of the hoof block. If the diameter is less than or equal to bead points to the counterclockwise rotation direction.
φ146mm (5.748 in), it needs to be replaced. Otherwise, it is easy to cause the failure of the embedded
steel sleeve of Pulizhu to fall off when the engine is
running! ! !

g. Check whether the 61903 ball bearings and 28×18

needle roller bearings press-fitted in the fixed shaft of the
driven wheel are worn or damaged. If they are worn, loose
and loose frames, they need to be replaced.
Note that the bearings don’t need to be geased to prevent
the grease from slipping on the belt.

89 / 223
 Finally, clamp the middle of the belt with an elastic clip to
prevent the belt from loosening by itself.
Caution: This step requires greater hand strength and
certain operating experience to complete. Insufficient hand
strength or no operating experience may cause injury to
fingers caught by the driven pulley pulley! ! !

e. Pick up the assembled driven wheel and the V-shaped

drive belt as a whole, make the clutch cover of the driven
wheel face outwards, and after the center inner hole of the
driven wheel is aligned with the drive shaft, push the driven
wheel inward into place (on the drive shaft, use When
c. Turn over the driving wheel slide plate with Puli beads installing φ14.5×φ25×16, a section of the optical shaft of the
and ramp plate as a whole, and then install the distance tube driven wheel bushing is exposed), and the other part of the
into the inner hole of the driving wheel slide plate. Then V-shaped transmission belt is sleeved on the outer ring of the
squeeze the sliding plate and the ramp plate with one hand exposed crankshaft spline.
(to prevent the spread of the Puli beads from falling), and
hold the exposed distance tube with the other hand to align
the inner hole of the distance tube with the crankshaft, and
then slide the ramp plate, pull beads, and slide The
combination of the disc and the fixed distance cylinder is
assembled as a whole to withstand the φ23.2×φ40×3.25
washer.

f. Put the side of the driving wheel drive disc with the wind
blades facing outwards, align the spline holes in the middle
with the splines on the crankshaft, and then assemble it on
the crankshaft and assemble it in place.

d. Place the driven wheel flat on a workbench or a clean

ground, then make the indicating arrow on the V-shaped
drive belt point to the counterclockwise rotation direction,
place the V-shaped drive belt on the outer ring of the driven
wheel, and make a certain distance The driven wheel is 4～
5cm away. The palms of both hands partially press the clutch g. Put the φ12.3×φ40×4 washer on the M12×1.25×35
cover of the driven wheel, and the fingers of both hands hexagon flange bolt, and then screw the M12×1.25×35
buckle the moving plate of the driven wheel while pulling it hexagon flange bolt into the crankshaft threaded hole.
upwards while rotating it clockwise. After lifting the moving
plate of the driven wheel by about 10mm (0.4 in), quickly
extend your finger near the side of the V-shaped drive belt to
slide the V-shaped drive belt into the belt groove between
the moving plate of the driven wheel and the fixed plate.

90 / 223
 h. Point the stepped end of the φ14.5×φ25×16 driven
wheel bushing toward the driven wheel, and install it on the k. At this point, the assembly of the stepless variable
exposed optical axis of the drive shaft. Then screw on the speed sub-assembly is completed.
M14×1 hexagon flange nut on the drive shaft thread. 3. Common fault phenomena/troubleshooting
3.1 The engine can be started, but the rear wheel
does not rotate
a. The V-shaped transmission belt is severely worn or
broken.
b. The clutch shoe is worn or damaged.
c. The large spring of the driven wheel is damaged.
d. The spline of the clutch cover and the drive shaft is
damaged.
3.2 Engine stall or lack of power
a. The V-belt is slipping.
b. The large spring of the driven wheel is damaged.
3.3 Insufficient high-speed power
a. V-shaped transmission belt is worn or slipped.
b. The clutch cover and the clutch shoe slip.
c. The large spring of the driven wheel fails.
d. Ply ball wear.
i.Same as the first step during disassembly, use a special 3.4 When the engine is at normal idling speed,
clamp to clamp the driving wheel drive disc and the driven the rear wheel rotates rapidly
wheel clutch cover to prevent them from rotating freely. a. Pulizhu is stuck in return.
b. The small spring of the driven wheel shoe is damaged.

●The vehicle must be parked on a flat and stable ground or a

lifting platform.
●Pay attention to safety when assembling the driven pulley
pulley to prevent pinching your hands.

j. Tighten the M12×1.25×35 hexagon flange bolts

clockwise with a torque wrench (or wind batch) and a 17#
sleeve. The tightening torque must reach 103±10N.m (10.5±1 ●After disassembly, make sure that all parts are installed
kgf.m, 76±7). lbf.ft) range. Then tighten the M14×1 correctly.
hexagonal flange nut clockwise with a torque wrench (or ●The disassembly operation should be carried out only after
wind batch) and a 19# sleeve. The tightening torque must the engine has cooled down.
reach 75±7N.m (7.65±0.7 kgf.m, 55±5 lbf.ft) )scope.

91 / 223
Braking System
Caution:
●For the layout of the brake hose on the vehicle, please refer to the brake system accessories distribution diagram in the
"Vehicle Information" chapter of this manual.
Caution:
In order to facilitate after-sales tracking, those who need to purchase brake hoses, disc brake calipers, disc brake main pumps,
and hydraulic control units must be reviewed by our company before they can be purchased. Domestic customers can fill in the
frame code and engine on the official website before purchasing. Foreign customers need to contact the corresponding
salesperson and fill in the corresponding form before purchasing. The specific process can be found by the salesperson.
M310 Braking system component diagram:

M125 Braking system component diagram:

92 / 223
M350 Braking system component diagram:

M125 (2024) Braking system component diagram:

93 / 223
Caution:
●This inspection should be completed by a qualified
maintenance organization.
●Regularly check whether the brake fluid level is at 3/4 of the
observation window.
●If you accidentally swallow the brake fluid, you should
contact the poison control center or hospital immediately; if
you accidentally get the brake fluid into your eyes, rinse with
water and seek medical attention immediately.
●Brake fluid must be kept away from children and pets.
●It is strictly forbidden to directly flush the main pump with
high-pressure water.
1. Check the brake components
a. Check whether the liquid level of the front disc brake M350
main pump and the rear disc brake main pump are above the c. Measure the thickness of the front and rear brake discs.
"LOWER" line. Check whether there is brake fluid leakage at If it is less than 4.0mm (0.16 in), replace it. Hang the front
the oil pipe joints. Observe the color of the brake fluid. wheel in the air and turn the front wheel by hand to observe
Normally, it should be light yellow. If the color becomes dark, whether there are obvious damages on the surface, such as
it is recommended to replace the brake fluid. pits, deep scratches, grooves, etc. Replace it if necessary. Feel
with your hands whether there is a noticeable sound of
grinding the brake disc when turning the front wheel.
Observe from the front whether the brake disc swings when
turning the front wheel; if there is any swing, please remove
it according to the steps of dismantling the brake disc, and
place it on a standard platform, use a dial indicator to
measure the run out or use a feeler gauge to check the brake
disc and The gap of the standard platform; such as> 0.08mm
b. Park the vehicle on a flat ground or a lifting platform,
(0.003 in), you need to replace the new brake disc. Check the
and lower the main support. Check whether there is brake
rear brake disc in the same way.
fluid leakage at the oil pipe joints of the main pump, ABS
hydraulic control unit and caliper. The endoscope with LED
can be used to check the oil pipe joints of the ABS hydraulic
control unit and the main pump, or to remove the ●Before checking the brake disc operation, be sure to wait
corresponding cover for inspection. for the brake disc to cool down before proceeding.
●It is forbidden to reduce the temperature of the brake disc
by spraying water, which may cause deformation of the
brake disc and abnormal noise.
●If the brake disc anti-theft lock is used, please confirm
whether it has been removed before driving the vehicle.
●Clean up the silt attached to the brake discs diligently.
d.Check the bolts fixing the caliper.
M125/310/M125 2024 version
Use 5# inner hexagon to remove bolt⑴. Remove bolt⑵
with a 14# sleeve. Standard torque of bolt⑵: 24N.m (2.4
kgf.m, 18 lbf.ft). Do not operate the brake handle after
removing the caliper.

M310

M350:
Remove two M10×1.5×60 bolts with 8# hex. The standard
torque of the bolts is 45 ~ 50N.m(4.6 ~ 5. 1kgf.m, 33 ~ 37 lbf.
ft). Do not operate the brake handle after removing the
M125/M125 2024 version caliper.

94 / 223
 2. Check the front and rear brake switches
2.1 Check the brake switch
Hold the brake handles of the main pumps of the front and
rear disc brakes respectively, and observe whether the rear
brake lights are on. If it does not light, you need to
investigate: whether the brake switch is faulty; whether the
rear brake light is faulty; whether the fuse has blown;
whether the circuit is open.

Front brake switch Rear brake switch

e. Pull out the front brake caliper assembly and check the
wear of the brake pads. If worn or nearly worn to the limit
position, new brake pads must be replaced in pairs.

f. Take out the wheel speed sensor① from the wire 2.2 Replace the brake switch
clamp②. Remove bolt⑵ with a 14# sleeve. Standard Take the replacement of the rear brake switch as an
torque of bolt⑵: 24N.m (2.4 kgf.m, 18 lbf.ft). Do not operate example to explain.
the brake handle after removing the caliper. a. Pull out the two plugs of the brake switch in the
direction of the arrow without distinguishing the positive and
negative poles.
b. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the bolt① to
remove the rear brake switch⑴.
c. Replace with a new switch, pay attention to align the
switch boss and the limit hole of the brake main pump.

g. Pull out the rear caliper assembly and check the wear of
the brake pads. If it is nearly worn or worn to the limit
position, new brake pads must be replaced in pairs.

The replacement procedure of the front brake switch is the

same as that of the rear brake switch. The throttle cable
●A qualified maintenance organization should check and needs to be removed to facilitate the removal of the bolt①.
maintain the brake pads on a regular basis.
●Do not drive immediately after replacing a new brake disc
or brake pad. Be sure to hold and release the brake handle
several times to allow the brake disc and brake pads to fully
fit together to restore normal grip and to make the brake
fluid circulate stably.
●The braking distance may be longer than the original
braking distance after replacing the new brake disc or brake
pad. It needs to be used for about 300 kilometers (186 mile). 3. Lubricate the movable parts of the brake
Good braking effect. Allow enough braking distance before handle
running in sufficiently to ensure driving safety.
3.1 Lubricate the front brake handle.

●The brake pads must be replaced in pairs, only replacing

one side will cause uneven braking.
●If the position of the brake pads is incorrect, it is forbidden
to operate the brake handle. Otherwise, it will be difficult to
reset the piston and may cause brake fluid leakage.

a. Use a 10# torx wrench to rotate counterclockwise to

remove the nut③.

95 / 223
 b. After grasping the handle, use a 5# inner hexagon ●A qualified maintenance organization should check and
counterclockwise rotation to remove the bolt①; remove the maintain the brake pads on a regular basis.
brake handle. ●Do not drive immediately after replacing the new brake
c. Wipe the handle pusher and the outer end of the piston pads. Be sure to hold and release the brake handle several
with a clean non-woven cloth (the position shown in times to allow the brake disc and brake pads to fully fit
Figure②), and apply high vacuum silicone grease evenly. together to restore normal grip and to make the brake fluid
d. Wipe clean the bolt①, and apply high vacuum silicone circulate stably.
grease evenly. ●The braking distance may be longer than the original
e. Reinstall. braking distance after replacing the new brake pads. It needs
3.2 Lubricating the rear brake handle to be used for about 300 kilometers (186 mile), and the best
Refer to the above method to lubricate the rear brake braking effect can be achieved after the brake disc and the
handle. brake pads are fully run-in. . Allow enough braking distance
before running in sufficiently to ensure driving safety.

●The brake pads must be replaced in pairs, only replacing

one side will cause uneven braking.
●The brake pads must be assembled correctly.
●Do not operate the brake handle after removing the brake
pads.
5.1 Replace the front brake pads
M125/310
M125/310 a. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to remove the nut①.
Remove the pin shaft② with a 5# inner hexagon.

M350
3.3 Replacing the brake handle b. Remove the brake pads.
Refer to the previous steps to remove the nut③ and c. Push the piston to the end in the direction of the arrow
bolt① to replace the new brake handle. with the help of a tool. If the resistance is high, you can refer
4. Adjust the brake handle to the method of adding brake fluid to the front brake main
In order to adapt to more drivers driving this model, it is pump to remove the upper cover and then push. If the spring
equipped with an adjustable brake handle. Take the right on the caliper falls off, it needs to be reinstalled in the
front brake handle as an example. Push the end of the handle direction shown in the figure.
to the end in the direction of the arrow, and adjust the wheel
clockwise by hand. The extension of the push head will
increase the distance between the handle and the rubber
sleeve, and vice versa. The adjustment method of the rear
brake handle on the left is opposite to that on the right.

d. Take out the new brake pad and install it back. You need
to hold the bottom of the brake pad (through hole end) with
your hand. Be careful not to install it backwards, the side
with 3 grooves faces the brake disc; the black metal back
plate faces the caliper.

5. Replace the brake pads

96 / 223
 outside

inside
e. Observe from both sides whether the upper part of the
brake pad has hit the shrapnel, otherwise the position needs
to be readjusted.
f.Push the piston to the bottom in the direction of the
arrow.

f. After confirming that the upper part of the brake pad is

assembled in place, insert the pin②, and lock it with a 5#
inner hexagon.
g. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to put the nut① back and
tighten it.
h. Repeatedly pinch and hold the brake handle to check
whether the brake returns to normal hydraulic resistance.
g. Restore the front disc brake main pump assembly and
M350 make sure it is correctly assembled.
a.Use needle-nose pliers to clamp and pull out the spring, h. Install the two brake pads (1) back into the caliper, and
and remove the two springs. install the spring plate③between the two brake pads.
During assembly, the arrow in the spring piece shall be
pointing upwards.

b. Use a T25 hexagonal box wrench to remove the upper

pin ② and then the lower pin.

Press the disc body at the position indicated by arrow ⑨

inwards in the direction of the arrow, and fix the brake disc
(1) with the pin ② inserted into the hole. Tighten the pin
shaft ② with a T25 hexagonal box wrench.

c. Remove the spring plate ③ and the brake plate ⑴.

d. Clean the dust and other foreign matters on the outer
edge of the piston and the pin shaft.
e. Use a cross screwdriver to remove the bolt ④ on the
front disc brake main pump assembly, and remove the upper
cover ⑤, cover plate ⑥, and sealing gasket ⑦.
j. Press the disc body at the point indicated by arrow ⑧
inwards in the direction of the arrow, and fix the brake disc

97 / 223
(1) with the pin ② inserted into the hole. Tighten the pin d. Grasp the outer brake pad with your left hand and insert
shaft ② with a T25 hexagonal box wrench. the pin② with your right hand, being careful not to insert it
k. Install the two circlips ① back onto the pin shaft. The to the end. Install the inner brake pad in place, then insert
buckle is assembled in place after it makes a noise. When the pin to the end and use the 5# inner hexagonal lock
assembling the circlip, the flanging shall be outward. If the pin②. Be careful not to install it backwards, the grooved
circlip is deformed, it can be corrected with a hammer with side faces the brake disc; the black metal back plate faces the
appropriate force. caliper.
l. Hold the brake handle repeatedly until the braking force
is recovered.
5.2 Replace the rear brake pads
Inside
a. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to remove the nut①.
Remove the pin shaft② with a 5# inner hexagon.

Outside
e. After adjusting the position of the brake pad, reinstall
the bolt③ and lock it with a 12# sleeve. Standard torque:
24N.m (2.4 kgf.m, 18 lbf.ft).
f. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to put back the nut① and
b. Use a 12# sleeve to remove the bolt③, turn the caliper tighten it.
assembly clockwise around the bolt④, and remove the g. Repeatedly pinch and hold the brake handle to check
brake pad. Note that the bolt④ does not need to be whether the brake returns to normal hydraulic resistance.
disassembled. 5.3 Abnormal sound of brake pads
The main reasons for the abnormal noise of the brake pads
are as follows:
a. The brake pad is worn to the limit. If it is a new brake
pad, check whether there is any foreign matter caught
between the brake disc and the brake pad. It can return to
normal after replacing new brake pads or cleaning foreign
objects.
b. Use non-original brake pads with too high hardness and
c. Push the piston to the end in the direction of the arrow replace them with original ones.
with the help of a tool. If the resistance is high, you can refer c. The brake disc bolts are loose, and the tightening bolts
to the method of adding brake fluid to the front brake main can be restored to normal.
pump to remove the upper cover and then push. If the spring d. Braking system failure, such as the caliper sliding shaft is
on the caliper falls off, it needs to be reinstalled in the not reset due to rust; the brake pads and spring pads are not
direction shown in the figure. installed correctly. Derust or re-assemble correctly.
e. The brake disc is out of tolerance, and it can be restored
to normal by replacing the new brake disc.

6. Replace the brake disc

●The vehicle must be parked on a flat and stable ground or a lifting platform.
●After replacing the brake discs, brake pads, or reassembling the front and rear wheels, the brake handle must be operated
repeatedly until the brakes restore the braking effect.
●Contaminated disc brake discs and disc brake pads will reduce the braking effect. Please replace with new disc brake discs and
clean the contaminated brake discs.

98 / 223
●After disassembling the brake disc or rim assembly, please do not operate the brake handle.
●Check the new brake disc for run out ≤0.08mm (0.003 in) before assembling.

6.1 Replacing the front brake disc wrench to remove the rear wheel M16×1.5 nut. Standard
The front brake disc can be removed by referring to the torque of nut: 125N.m (12.8 kgf.m, 92 lbf.ft).
description of the steps for disassembling the front wheel
assembly in the "Front Fork Assembly" of this manual.
6.2 Replacing the rear brake disc
●The M125/350 steps are similar to the M310, taking the
M310 as an example.
a. Use 6# inner hexagon to tighten the exhaust port nut.
The modelsⅠ: c. Use 4# hex socket to remove the M6×14 bolt⑵ on the
right middle of the rear inner mudguard, use 4# hex socket to
remove the front M6×12 bolt⑴ and the rear M6×16 bolt.
Remove the two M6×12 bolts⑴ and M6×16 bolt at the
bottom of the rear rocker arm, and remove the wheel speed
sensor. Pull out the staples on the position indicated by the
arrow and remove the decorative cover of the engine right
After holding the muffler assembly, then use a 14# sleeve cover.
to remove the bolts on the position of 3 of connecting the
muffler and the rear rocker arm. Note that the muffler must
be completely cooled before it can be operated.
The modelsⅡ:

d. In the gap between the left air filter and the rear inner
mud board, hold the air filter housing with one hand, and
press the rear inner mud board at the position 2 indicated by
the arrows with the other hand. Separate the rear inner mud
plate from the staples on the air filter and lift it up to
After holding the muffler assembly, then use 8# inner
facilitate subsequent removal of the rear rocker arm.
hexagon soket to remove the bolts on the position of 2 of
connecting the muffler and the rear rocker arm.
The models Ⅲ:

e. Use a 14# sleeve to remove the 2 bolts that fix the rear
brake caliper, and tie the caliper and the wheel speed sensor
cable. Pay attention to let the calipers sag naturally without
affecting the rocker arm after disassembly. Use a 14# sleeve
to loosen the 2 bolts. Then use a 12# sleeve to remove the
bolt that fixes the rear shock absorber, and then remove the
After holding the muffler assembly, then use a 8# inner rear shock absorber and tie it. Grasp the rear rocker arm
hexagon soket to remove the bolts on the position of 2 of firmly with one hand, and remove the 2 bolts with the other
connecting the muffler and the rear rocker arm, then remove hand. Pull the rear rocker arm outwards and remove the rear
2pcs φ10.5×φ24×2 gasketes. Some of the vehicles earlier did
rocker arm, paying attention not to omit the shaft sleeve
not have gasketes.
when reinstalling. Standard torque of bolt: 45N.m (4.6 kgf.m,
b. Remove the rubber cover then one person pinches the
33 lbf.ft); bolt and are 24N.m (2.4 kgf.m, 18 lbf.ft).
rear brake handle, and one person uses 21# sleeve + impact

99 / 223
 Brake fluid
Caution:
●This inspection should be completed by a qualified
maintenance organization.
●It is strictly forbidden to directly flush the main pump with
high-pressure water.
●After disassembly, make sure that all parts are installed
correctly.
●It is strictly forbidden to mix in water, dust, impurities and
f. Remove the shaft sleeve and take off the rear wheel silicic acid or petroleum-based liquids, otherwise it will cause
assembly. serious damage to the brake system.
●This vehicle uses DOT 4 brake fluid, and it is forbidden to
mix it with other brake fluids.
●Wear protective gloves/protective clothing/protective
goggles/protective masks.
●Brake fluid must be used in time after opening, seal and
moisture-proof measures must be taken when storing; it is
recommended not to exceed 1 month. Inferior or damp
brake fluid will cause adverse effects on the brake system,
and may cause brake failure when the impact is severe.
g. Replacing the rear brake disc ●The brake fluid should be prevented from dripping on the
M310:Remove bolts with 6# inner hexagon soket, and then paint surface of the cover or the surface of the parts. If it is
take off the brake disc. If you need to replace the ABS gear accidentally splashed, it should be rinsed with water
ring, remove the bolt and then replace it. Bolt standard immediately.
torque: 25N.m (2.6 kgf.m, 18 lbf.ft).

●If you accidentally swallow the brake fluid, you should

contact the poison control center or hospital immediately; if
you accidentally get the brake fluid into your eyes, rinse with
water and seek medical attention immediately.
●Brake fluid must be kept away from children and pets.
●The vehicle must be parked on a flat and stable ground or a
lifting platform.
M125:
1. Add brake fluid to the main pumps of the front
and rear disc brakes
The M125/350 steps are similar to the M310, taking the
M310 as an example.
a. Adding brake fluid to the main pump of a disc brake is
taken as an example for description. The steps for refilling
the rear brake main pump are the same.
b. Place the vehicle horizontally.
c. Wrap around the main pump with oil-resistant plastic
h. Refer to the order of disassembly to restore. Note that film to prevent the brake fluid from dripping onto the surface
bolts with torque requirements need to be calibrated of the parts and damaging the paint layer.
according to standard values.

Brake hose
Caution:
●This inspection should be completed by a qualified
maintenance organization.
●Check the hhose according to the maintenance schedule.
●It is recommended to replace the brake hose every 4 years.
Refer to steps 1 and 2 of checking brake fittings in the
brake system, you can use the endoscope with LED to easily
check the oil pipe joints of the ABS hydraulic control unit and d. After wearing waterproof gloves, use a Phillips
the main pump, or remove the corresponding cover for screwdriver to remove the bolt①, and remove the upper
inspection. cover②, the cover③, and the sealing rubber gasket④.

100 / 223
 c. Put the other end of the hose into the oil pot.
d. Remove the upper cover of the front brake main pump
e. Use the brake fluid water content tester to measure the referring to the previous step of adding brake fluid.
water content, if it is more than 2%, all brake fluid needs to e. Rotate the 8# torx wrench with the right hand
be replaced; if it is less than or equal to 2%, add newly counterclockwise to loosen the air nozzle, and with the left
opened DOT 4 brake fluid to the transparent observation hand, slowly and uniformly squeeze the front brake handle to
window of the front disc brake main pump 3/4 places. It is the end and keep it still. Lock the vent nozzle clockwise and
recommended that the water content should be less than slowly loosen the handle. Pay close attention to the liquid
1.5%. Total 0.23L（0.24 US qt,0.2 lmp qt,0.06 US gal ,0.05 level of the front brake main pump. When it is too low, add it
lmp gal）TOTAL HBF 4 (DOT 4) brake fluid is added to this in time to prevent air bubbles from entering the brake hose.
vehicle from the factory. Repeat the previous steps until the transparent and clean
light yellow brake fluid comes out.

The above picture shows the brake fluid water content

tester. The picture comes from the Internet and the
copyright belongs to the author of the original picture. Do f. Observe whether the liquid level of the main pump is at
not use it for other purposes. 3/4 of the transparent inspection, if it is not necessary to add
f. Reassembly can only be done after the foreign objects or withdraw or discharge with a syringe.
have been cleaned up. g. After the brake fluid is replaced, unplug the 6mm (0.23
in) hose; use a torque wrench to tighten the bleed nozzle to
2. Replace the brake fluid the standard torque: 10N.m (1 kgf.m, 7 lbf.ft). Then put the
Refer to the steps of adding brake fluid. If the measured rubber cap on the air nozzle.
water content is greater than 2%, the brake fluid needs to be h. Reinstall the upper cover of the main pump.
replaced. M310 this inspection should be done every 5000 i. Repeatedly pinch and hold the brake handle to check
kilometers (3107 mile) or every 15 months. M125/350 this whether the brake returns to normal hydraulic resistance.
inspection should be done every 4000 kilometers (3107 mile)
or M350 every 15 months , and M125 is 6 months. It is
recommended to replace the brake fluid every 2 years. If the
brake fluid is not replaced for a long time, flocs will form to ●The discharged brake fluid needs to be properly disposed
of, and it is forbidden to continue to use it. It is forbidden to
block the oil pipe, the oil hole of the main pump of the disc
brake or the piston will become stuck, which will cause the dump at will to pollute the environment; or put it at will, etc.
It should be handed over to a qualified recycling unit for
braking effect to deteriorate or fail, which will affect driving
safety. proper disposal.
●The steps of discharging brake fluid must be strictly
2.1 Replace the front brake brake fluid performed without confusion; avoid air bubbles from
a. Wrap around the front brake main pump with oil- entering the brake pipeline.
resistant plastic film, as shown in the previous section. ●When pinching the brake handle, it must be slow and
b. Pull out the rubber cap of the vent nozzle①, and put on uniform to avoid air bubbles from entering the brake
8# torx wrench. Use a 6mm (0.23 in) hose to fit the vent②, pipeline.
being careful not to remove the torx wrench. ●The vent nozzle must be locked in place before the brake
handle can be released. Half-locking is forbidden; and do not
use excessive force.
2.2 Replace the rear brake fluid
Refer to the steps for replacing the front brake brake fluid to
replace the rear one.

101 / 223
3. Brake system exhaust conditions. The maximum tire pressure in the cold state shall
If the hand feel soft when the brake handle is squeezed not exceed 300 kPa (3.1 kgf/cm2, 44 PSI).
and the braking performance is significantly reduced, first ●When the tire pressure is found to drop, check whether the
check whether the brake fluid level of the main pump is tire has nails or small holes; whether there is a collision on
lower than the "LOW" line and whether the brake system is the side of the rim that causes deformation or cracks.
leaking. If the problem still exists after excluding the above ●Be careful to avoid the position of the valve when removing
two items, you can try the exhaust operation. The exhaust the tire with the tyre raking machine. Pay attention to
operation is similar to the previous operation of replacing the protect the contact part of the rim and the bead, if it is
brake fluid. When replacing the brake fluid, a clean and scratched, it may cause air leakage.
transparent light yellow brake fluid must flow steadily, while ●The tire pressure is too high, which reduces the contact
the exhaust operation will flow out foamy brake fluid. area with the ground. It is also more likely to cause a
After exhausting, check whether the brake fluid level of the puncture in the summer. Too low will cause difficult steering,
main pump meets the standard. accelerate wear and increase engine load and increase fuel
consumption.
●Frequent exposure to the sun can cause tire cracks and
aging. It is recommended to park the vehicle in a dust-proof,
●The discharged brake fluid needs to be properly disposed sun-proof, and ventilated place; or cover it with a car jacket
of, and it is forbidden to continue to use it. It is forbidden to to protect the body parts and the tires better. If you do not
dump at will to pollute the environment; or put it at will, etc. drive for a long time, you should support the vehicle firmly
It should be handed over to a qualified recycling unit for and let the tires hang in the air to avoid deformation caused
proper disposal. by long-term load on the ground contact.
● Pay close attention to the liquid level in the main pump ●Because the tire self-refilling may block the air hole of the
during operation, and replenish it in time to prevent air from tire pressure monitoring sensor, causing difficulty in inflation
entering the brake hose. or failure of the tire pressure monitoring, it should not be
Tire used.
1. Check the tires
a. Park the vehicle on a flat and stable ground or a lifting
●Check the tire condition and tire pressure before driving. platform, and put down the main support.
●When the tire is worn to the limit or there are cracks or
wounds on the surface, it should be replaced in time.
●Pay special attention to driving safety when using new tires.
New tires that have not run in well may slip and cause the
vehicle to lose control.
●Avoid sudden acceleration, sharp turns, emergency braking,
etc. within 150 kilometers (93mile) after replacing the new
tire.
●M310 the standard front wheel of this vehicle is 110/80-14,
and the rear tire is 140/70-14. M125 the standard front
wheel of this vehicle is 100/80-14, and the rear tire is 120/70-
14. M350 the standard front wheel of this vehicle is 120/70- b. Support the front wheel with suitable tools, let the front
15, and the rear tire is 140/70-14. When replacing tires, you tire hang in the air, and then rotate the tire to carefully check
should replace standard tires. Use of non-standard tires may for abnormalities, such as partial wear, studs, cracks, etc.
cause problems. Clean up the pebbles or other foreign objects embedded in
●It is not recommended to use external repair to repair the the tread pattern. Check whether the tread and sidewall have
tire, the tire needs to be removed for internal repair. worn to the mark. If they are close to or have worn to the
Temporary emergency can use external compensation, but mark, replace with a new tire of the same specification in
the vehicle should be driven at a lower speed, and internal time. Use a tire pressure gauge to measure the tire pressure
compensation should be made to the maintenance when the tire is cold, and add or deflate to the standard
organization as soon as possible. If the sidewall is bumped, pressure.
punctured, scratched, or if the tread is damaged and the hole
is large, it should be replaced directly. Rebalance should be
done after Tyre repair.

●Check the tire pressure regularly. M310 the standard is

260kPa (2.7 kgf/cm2, 37.7 PSI) under normal temperature
conditions;M125 front tire is 220kPa(2.2 kgf/cm2，32
PSI),rear tire is 270kPa (2.75 kgf/cm2, 39 PSI); M350 the front
tire standard is 240kPa (2.5 kgf/cm2, 35 PSI) and the rear tire
is 260kPa(2.7 kgf/cm2，37.7 PSI) under normal temperature
102 / 223
 b. Keep the front wheel suspended, shake the front wheel
assembly in multiple directions, to confirm whether the front
fork assembly is axially strung or loosened in the radial
direction.

b. The height of the wear mark on the tread protrusion is

1.6mm (0.06 in). The triangle (△T.W.I.) mark on the sidewall
indicates the location of the wear bar. If the wear reaches the
mark point, it means that it has been worn to the limit. If you
continue to drive, there will be a safety hazard. You must
replace with new tires of the same specification. 2. Adjust the steering mechanism
c. The inspection of the rear tires is the same as that of the M125/310
front tires and will not be repeated here.
If the steering is not flexible or loose, the axial bearing
2. Replace tires clearance should be adjusted.
a. Replace the front tire Refer to the steps to remove the faucet lock in the section
The front wheel assembly can be removed by referring to "Replace the lower link plate" in the "Front Fork Assembly" of
the description of the steps for disassembling the front wheel this manual, and remove the storage box. Remove the faucet
assembly in the "Front Fork Assembly" of this manual. Use a lock.
tyre picker to remove the tire. When disassembling, pay
attention to avoiding the valve position. Do not use a
crowbar to pry the tire at the valve position to avoid damage
to the tire pressure sensor. Before pressing the tire, install it
according to the direction of rotation indicated by the
sidewall, and aim the light point with the yellow mark at the
position of the valve. After replacing a new tire or repairing a
tire, the dynamic balance needs to be re-balanced to prevent
the front wheel from shaking due to unbalance and affecting
the driving experience

b. For the convenience of explanation, other parts are

hidden here. First use a 38-42 hook wrench with a thickness
of 6mm (0.24 in) to loosen the adjusting nut (1a); move the
lock washer⑵ up and then loosen the adjusting nut (1b).
b. Replace the rear tire
Refer to the previous operation of replacing the rear brake
disc to remove the rear wheel assembly. Other operations
are similar to the replacement of the front tires, and will not
be repeated here.
Steering mechanism
Caution:
●Regularly inspect the steering mechanism according to the
requirements of the regular maintenance table.
●Park the vehicle on a flat and stable ground or a lifting
platform, and put down the main support.
●Too small steering mechanism clearance will cause
inflexible steering and accelerate bearing wear. When it is
too large, it will cause driving jitter and abnormal noise when
braking.
1. Check the steering mechanism c. If the steering is heavy, loosen the adjusting nut (1c)
counterclockwise. First screw it clockwise to 35N.m (3.6
a. Support the front wheel with a suitable tool so that the
kgf.m, 26 lbf.ft), then loosen 1/4 turn counterclockwise, and
front tire is hung in the air and then rotate the direction
then screw it to M125/310/350 is: 15N.m (1.2 kgf.m, 11 lbf.
handle left and right to confirm whether the rotation is
ft),M125 2024 version is 13N.m(1.3 kgf.m,10 lbf.ft).
flexible and smooth; whether the cable and cable show signs
d. If thre is any looseness, screw it clockwise to 35N.m (3.6
of being pulled.
kgf.m, 26 lbf.ft), then loosen it counterclockwise by 1/4 turn,

103 / 223
and then screw it to M125/310/350 is: 15N.m (1.2 kgf.m, 11 a. Whether the steering mechanism is too tight, refer to
lbf. ft),M125 2024 version is 13N.m(1.3 kgf.m,10 lbf.ft). the previous steps to adjust the steering mechanism to solve;
e. After adjustment, confirm whether the steering is b. The steering mechanism bearing is rusty, the steel bowl
restored. If it returns to normal, turn the nut (1b) clockwise or steel ball is damaged, and it needs to be disassembled and
to touch the rubber pad (3) and align the lock washer (2) with replaced;
the groove of the nut (1b) and (1c). M125/310/350 tighten c. The front tire pressure is insufficient and needs to be
the nut (1a) to 100N.m (10.2 kgf.m, 74 lbf.ft),M125 2024 charged to the standard tire pressure, M310 is 260kPa (2.7
version is 80N.m (8.2 kgf.m, 59 lbf.ft). kgf/cm2, 37.7 PSI), M125 front tire is 220kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2,32
PSI), M350 is 240kPa (2.5 kgf/cm2, 35PSI) under normal
temperature conditions;
d. The column of the lower link plate is deformed and
needs to be removed and replaced.
Front fork
Caution:
●M310 models every 10000km (6214 mile), M125 models
every 8000km (4971 mile), check whether the front fork is
leaking or deformed, and whether the shock absorption and
rebound are normal.
●Before riding each time, check whether there is leakage in
f. The front wheel is hung in the air to straighten the the front shock absorber and whether the fasteners are loose
direction handle, and gently push and pull the direction to ensure driving safety.
handle by hand to feel whether the steering mechanism is ● Bolt torque at the hollow shaft of the front wheel of the
smooth and free of jams. When the front fork assembly is shock-absorbing bottom cylinder: 20N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 15 lbf.
slightly tilted to one side, it should be able to slowly deflect ft).
to the end under its own weight. If it is quickly to the end, it ●When replacing hydraulic oil, use kerosene or diesel to
needs to be readjusted. thoroughly clean all parts. Use a graduated cylinder to
M350 measure 10W hydraulic oil is poured in one time, avoid
a. Remove the direction handle cover and front panel mixing different hydraulic oils.M310 measure 220±2ml
before performing this operation. Remove to the extent (7.4±0.07 US oz, 7.7±0.07 lmp oz, 13.4±0.1 cu-in). M350
shown. measure 497±5ml(16.8±0.17 US oz，17.5±0.18 lmp oz,
After turning the direction left to the end, remove the nut 30.3±0.3 cu-in ).
counterclockwise with the 30# sleeve and remove the gasket. ●After traveling on dusty or muddy roads, you should clean
Remove the side bolts with the 6# hex socket. Pull the up the foreign matter on the front fork tube (exposed
direction handle and upper panel assembly up.If it is difficult chrome-plated cylinder) in time to avoid scratching the dust
to pull out the expansion plate, use a flat-head screwdriver to seal or oil seal and causing leakage; wipe it clean with a soft
pry open the slot of the upper connection board and pull it cloth.
out at the same time.Move the direction handle and upper ●Do not use a high-pressure water gun to directly flush
connection board assembly open and set them in place. against the dust seal at close range.
●The vehicle should be parked in a ventilated and dry
environment without driving for a long time. A dark and
humid environment can easily cause the front fork tube to
rust and make other parts of the vehicle rust. Coastal areas
should have more frequent pre-maintenance damping than
inland areas. After wiping clean, spray a small amount of anti-
rust oil to prevent rust.
1. Check the appearance
a. After parking the vehicle firmly, let the front wheel hang
in the air, and turn the direction knob to observe whether
B. Adjust according to 310 adjustment steps. The nut the front shock absorber is leaking; whether there are
torque is 100N. m (10.2 kgf. m, 74 lbf. ft). scratches, pits, rust, etc. on the surface of the front fork tube.
Shallow scratches, small pits, and slight rust can be smoothed
3. Maintain steering bearings with fine sandpaper of about 2000 mesh. Wipe clean the dust
If adjusting the steering bearing clearance cannot be or foreign objects in the dust-proof seal. If there has a dust
restored, you need to remove the steering bearing to check cover, it should be moved away before inspection.
whether the bearing, steel bowl is worn or rusted, lacks
grease, etc.
4. Malfunction
Normally rotate the handle, if it feels more laborious, you
need to investigate the following reasons:
104 / 223
 wheel or a high-speed bump, check whether the shock
absorber is deformed. Check the shock absorption
performance according to the maintenance schedule. It is
necessary to prevent the vehicle from turning over during
operation.
3. Remove the front shock absorption
Remove the front shock absorber according to the steps of
removing the front shock absorber in the "Front Fork
Assembly" of this manual.
4. Correct the front fork tube
b. Check whether the bottom tube is painted off; whether If the front wheel of the vehicle passes a hurdle at a high
the installation points of the front fender, the front wheel speed or after a collision, check whether the front fork tube
hollow shaft and the front brake caliper are broken or is deformed. Take the left shock absorption as an example.
cracked. Check if there is any leakage at the bottom of the Use the end face of the front axle of the shock absorber
bottom cylinder. bottom tube and the end face of the front fender mounting
point to fix the shock absorber; or remove the front fork
tube. Use a dial indicator to detect the amount of
deformation in the axial direction of the front fork tube, and
rotate the front fork tube to measure different positions.

c. If there is a large amount of hydraulic oil attached to the

front fork tube, wipe it clean and observe after riding. If there
is no oil stain or slight oil stain, it is the hydraulic oil
accumulated during the assembly of the dust seal, and it can
be judged that the oil seal is not leaking. If there is a small
amount of oil stains or sludge mixture, remove the dust seal
For slight deformation of less than 0.2mm (0.008 in), the
and wipe clean the front fork tube and oil seal surface, first
front fork tube can be supported by a V-shaped iron block,
compress the front shock absorber and then wipe clean and
and soft rubber, rubber, copper, etc. should be placed on the
then press; repeat the above operation 10 times. Observe
contact surface to prevent the front fork tube from being
whether there is still on the front fork tube. If there is, the
scratched. Use the press slowly and slightly, straighten the
front shock absorber leaking oil needs to be replaced with
pressure and small stroke several times, and measure while
the dust seal and oil seal. If not, it is a normal phenomenon
straightening. The radial run out after correction should be
that a small amount of hydraulic oil has accumulated during
less than 0.05mm (0.002 in). If the original bending
assembly.
deformation part is out of round after correction, it should be
d. Check whether there is any leakage at the bottom of the
replaced. If the deformation is too large, the shock
bottom cylinder with the help of a mirror or mobile phone
absorption should be replaced.
lens. If there is a slight leakage, first check whether the bolts
are loose. The bolt torque here is 20～26N.m (2～2.7 kgf.m,
15～19 lbf). ft). If there is still leakage after tightening, the
gasket should be replaced.

5. Troubleshooting
a. There is obvious impact noise when driving on uneven
roads or emergency braking. The following items need to be
2. Check the shock absorption performance checked:
Whether the spring of the shock absorber is broken or the
Pinch the front brake handle and press down forcefully.
elasticity drops;
After releasing it, it should be able to compress smoothly and
Whether the hydraulic oil is insufficient or enters the air;
then return to normal. Repeat the operation several times to
Whether there is too much hydraulic oil;
check. If there is a block, the shock absorber needs to be
removed for investigation. If there is a collision with the front
105 / 223
 Whether the spring is axially bent and rubs against the
front fork tube.
b. The following items should be checked for excellent
shock absorption:
Whether there is too much hydraulic oil;
Whether the front fork tube is bent or deformed;
Has the spring been modified?
c. If the shock absorption is too soft, check the following
items:
Whether the hydraulic oil with low viscosity is changed;
Whether the spring force drops;
Is there too little hydraulic oil? 2.1 Adjust the right rear shock absorption
Rear shock absorption M125/310
Caution: Use the 5# inner hexagon to insert into the hole of the
●If the rear shock absorber has a lot of mud and sand, it right rear shock absorber adjuster, and rotate to the required
should be cleaned in time to prevent soft and big stones from gear in the direction of the arrow.
scratching the chromed parts and causing rust.
●Non-professionals should not disassemble the rear shock
absorber by themselves.
●It should be maintained according to the regular
maintenance table.
1. Check
a. One person straightens the vehicle and stabilizes the
vehicle, and one person presses the rear armrest behind to
observe whether the rear shock absorber can recover
smoothly.
b. Check whether the shock-absorbing bolts are loose. M350
c. Grasp the upper part of the damping spring and rotate it Use the adjustment wrench provided with the vehicle.
in the radial direction. It should be able to rotate in a small
amount. Check the bottom in the same way. If the upper part
cannot be rotated, the shock-absorbing rubber buffer sleeve
has aged and failed; if the bottom cannot be moved, the
buffer sleeve on the rear rocker arm and the engine box has 2.2 Adjust the left rear shock absorption
failed and needs to be replaced.
2.2.1 M310
a. Refer to the previous steps to replace the air inlet filter
element and remove the left cover. Disassemble it as shown
in the figure below.

d. Check whether the weld at the bottom of the shock

absorber is leaking.
2. Adjust the preload b. Use an 8# sleeve to remove the bolts (1) at the position
The rear shock absorption of this vehicle can be adjusted shown in the figure.
according to the needs of the owner. Sort 1-5 levels, level 1 is
the softest, level 5 is the hardest, and the factory defaults to
level 2. Turning the compression spring preload length to the
H direction makes the shock absorption harder; otherwise,
the shock absorber becomes softer. The two rear shock
absorbers need to be adjusted to the same gear.

c. Use needle-nose pliers to clamp the exhaust pipe clamp

on the inner side of the air filter and move it upward about
20mm (0.8 in). Pull the exhaust pipe out of the crankcase by
hand.
106 / 223
 to remove the stepper motor and clean up carbon deposits
to remove the rear storage box. After disassembly, it is as
shown in the figure below.

d. Pull the tail of the air filter outward with one hand, and
press the rear inner mud plate inward with the other hand. b. Remove 2 pieces of M6 decorative buckles⑴ and 5
Separate the air filter from the rear inner mud plate.
pieces of M8 decorative buckles⑵. Remove the 2 swell nails
(3).

e. Open the air filter slightly, and adjust the left rear shock
to the same gear with reference to the adjustment of the
c. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove 2 bolts⑷; after
right rear shock absorption method.
grasping the rear armrest, use 12# sleeve to remove 5 bolts
⑸, and then take off the rear armrest assembly.

d. Remove the boltM6×14 at the front of the left tail skirt

2.2.2 M125
with a 4# inner hexagon. Remove the 2 expansion(3) nails at
Use the 5# inner hexagon to insert into the hole of the left
the bottom.
rear shock absorber adjuster, and rotate to the required gear
in the direction of the arrow.

Grasp the left tail skirt and remove the swell nail (3), and
take off the left tail skirt.
2.2.3 M350
Use the adjustment wrench provided with the vehicle.

3. Replace the shock absorption

Remove the right tail skirt in the same way.
The M125/350 steps are similar to the M310, taking the
e. Pull down the front part of the rear mud plate, fix the
M310 as an example.
a. After removing the muffler assembly, follow the steps nut with a 14# sleeve or a torx wrench, loosen the bolt
“a” to “d” in the previous "Remove spark plug" to remove the completely with a 14# sleeve on the outside, and remove the
side covers; follow the steps a to j in the throttle valve body nut. Be careful not to remove the bolt first. Remove the nut
107 / 223
by the same operation on the other side. One person
supports the rear wheel assembly, and one person removes
the bolts on both sides; lower the rear wheel assembly to the
ground. Nut torque standard: 30N.m (3.1 kgf.m, 22 lbf.ft).

f. Grasp the rear right shock absorber and use a 12# sleeve
to remove the bolt, and remove the rear right shock
absorber. On the left side, pull the air filter out to expose the
bolt head and then remove the bolt. Standard torque: 24N.m
(2.4 kgf.m, 18 lbf.ft).

b. Check if the four nuts on the rear cradle of the fixed

engine as shown in the figure are loose. The nut on the right
front part (a in the figure) needs to be pulled out or pulled
out of the high-pressure oil pipe and cable connector to
Bolts and nuts for body and engine facilitate tightening with tools.
installation
Caution:
●Regularly check the body fasteners according to the
maintenance schedule.
●Loose engine fasteners will increase the vibration and affect
the driving experience.
●The M125/350 steps are similar to the M310, taking the
M310 as an example.
1. Check the fasteners for the critical parts c. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove M6×14 bolt. Grasp the
Check whether the front disc brake caliper bolts, front rear left pedal assembly and use a 12# sleeve to remove the
shock absorber bottom cylinder bolts, lower link plate bolts, 2 M8×35 bolts, and then remove the pedal assembly.
rear rocker arm and engine connecting bolts, rear wheel Remove the rear right pedal assembly in the same way.
spline shaft nuts, rear disc brake caliper bolts, and side
bracket nuts are loose. Check whether the Split pin of the
main bracket shaft is abnormal.

2. Check engine fasteners

Standard torque of 5 M12 nuts of engine cradle: 65N.m
(6.6 kgf.m, 48 lbf.ft).
a. Refer to the steps for removing the rear storage box and
tail skirt to remove it to the extent shown in the figure.
108 / 223
d. Check whether the engine nut is loose.

109 / 223
Valve clearance adjustment (M310) b. Use 5# and 10# Allen wrenches to remove M14×1.5
screw plugs and M30×1.5 aluminum screw plugs, and remove
●The M125/350 steps are similar to the M310, taking the
the O-ring.
M310 as an example.
1. Maintenance information
1.1 General information
a. This chapter introduces the operation method of valve
clearance adjustment.
b. The adjustment of the valve clearance can only be
carried out after the engine is removed from the vehicle.
c. Adjust the valve clearance when the engine is at room
temperature (≤35℃).
1.2 Assemble torque value
No. Name Torque
（N·m）
M6×30Hexagon flange bolts
1 (environmentally friendly color 10±2N.m
zinc)
M5×15-5#Hexagon socket head
2 5±1N.m
bolt (oxidized black)
M30×1.5Aluminum screw plug
3 16±2N.m
(dark gray)
M14×1.5Screw plug
4 10±2N.m
(environmental color zinc)
1.3 Tools, measuring tools, accessories
a. 8# and 14# T-shaped socket wrenches, 5# and 10#
hexagon wrenches, magnet sticks, tweezers, rags;
b. Feeler gauge;
c. Thread fastening glue and sealing silica gel.
2. Operation steps
a. Use an 8# T-shaped socket wrench (or a wind batch) to
remove the 6 M6×30 hexagonal flange bolts of the cylinder
head cover, and then remove the cylinder head cover
assembly.

c. Insert the 14#T-shaped socket wrench from the M30×1.5

aluminum screw plug hole and set it on the hexagonal head
of the flywheel bolt, and then turn the crankshaft clockwise
to align the T-point engraved line on the flywheel with the
mark of the M14×1.5 screw plug hole gap. At the same time,
the top dead center engraved line on the timing driven
sprocket should also be aligned with the raised mark line on
the cylinder head.
Caution: Once the T-point engraved line turns over the
marked line when rotating the flywheel, it cannot be
reversely rotated back to the right point. The crankshaft
must be turned clockwise twice again to realign the
points! ! !

110 / 223
 f. Push the intake valve rocker arm and exhaust valve
rocker arm to the side of the timing driven sprocket to
expose the valve adjusting gasket. Then, according to the
standard value of valve clearance (intake valve: 0.08～
0.12mm (0.003～0.005 in), exhaust valve: 0.18～0.22mm
(0.007～0.009 in), determine the specifications of the
d. Use a 5# hexagon wrench to remove the M5×15-5# adjusting gasket that needs to be replaced. For example: test
hexagon socket head bolts and the rocker arm limit block on The left side intake valve clearance value is 0.04mm (0.002
the rocker arm shaft of the intake valve and the rocker arm in), which is less than the standard value. You need to
shaft of the exhaust valve respectively. increase the clearance of 0.04～0.08mm (0.002～0.003 in).
The thickness specification of the original adjusting gasket on
the engine is 2.36mm( 0.093in), you need to replace the
adjusting shim with 2.28～2.32mm (0.09～0.091 in).
According to this method, determine the specifications of the
adjusting shim for the four valves to be replaced, and place
them according to the records made before to prevent
mixing .
Caution: The thickness specification of laser marking on the
adjustment pad will be invisible or disappear due to
abrasion. At this time, you need to take it off and measure
the thickness with a micrometer! ! !

g. The adjusting shim is small and easy to fall into the

e. Measure the gap between the two intake valves and the
engine when it is taken out. The original adjusting shim can
two exhaust valves with a feeler gauge. The measured values
be sucked out with a magnet rod. Then use tweezers to put
are subject to a slight drag. Make a record of the four valve
in the adjustment shim to be replaced. After replacing the
clearance values measured.
two adjusting shims on the same side, push the valve rocker
back to the side of the spark plug to press the valve adjusting
shims to prevent them from sliding out. Then replace the
valve clearance adjustment gasket on the other side in the
same way.

111 / 223
 h. After replacing the four valve adjusting gaskets, check
and confirm the four valve gaps again. If there is a deviation
from the standard, repeat step⑥ and⑦ to adjust again
until it meets the standard range. j. Wipe off the oil and residual sealant on the joint surface
of the cylinder head and the seal ring of the cylinder head
with a clean rag, and reapply a proper amount of sealing
silicone on the corners of the joint surface of the cylinder
head. Then install the cylinder head cover assembly
corresponding to the shape of the joint surface. Use 8#T-
shaped socket wrench (or wind batch) to lock the cylinder
head cover 6 M6×30 hexagon flange bolts, the torque value is
10±2N.m(1±0.2 kgf.m,7.4±1.5 lbf.ft) ).

i.Set the two valve rocker arm limit blocks on the M5×15- k. Put the 13×2.8 O-ring on the M14×1.5 screw plug, screw
5# hexagon socket head bolts, and then apply a proper it into the corresponding screw hole of the right crankcase
amount of thread locker on the threads of the M5×15-5# cover, and tighten it with a 5# Allen key. The torque value is
hexagon socket head bolts. Install the two valve rocker arm 10±2N.m(1±0.2 kgf.m, 7.4±1.5 lbf.ft); After putting the
limit blocks together with M5×15-5# hexagon socket head 27.4×2.65 O-ring on the M30×1.5 aluminum screw plug,
bolts on the intake valve rocker arm shaft and the exhaust screw it into the corresponding screw hole of the right
valve rocker arm shaft, and the tightening torque value is crankcase cover, tighten it with a 10# Allen key, the torque
5±1N.m (0.5 ±0.1 kgf.m, 4±0.7 lbf.ft). value is 16±2N.m (1.6±0.2 kgf.m, 12±1.5 lbf.ft).

112 / 223
 l. So far, the adjustment operation of the valve clearance is
completed.

113 / 223
Side bracket 2. Lubrication
Caution: a. Put away the side bracket so that the spring is in the
●Park the vehicle on a flat and stable ground or a lifting shortest position for easy disassembly.
platform, and put down the main support. b. The thick steel wire can be rolled into a circle and put
●When disassembling and installing the spring, it is necessary into the spring⑴ pull hook. Pay attention to ensure that the
to prevent the spring from flying off suddenly and causing steel wire cannot loose or fall apart during the pulling
personal injury. process.
●The M125/350 steps are similar to the M310, taking the
M310 as an example.
1. Check

C. Grasp the side bracket with one hand, and pull it in the
direction of the arrow with the other hand to remove the
spring.
d. Put down the side bracket, and use a 14# sleeve or torx
wrench to remove the nut⑵ counterclockwise. After holding
1. Side bracket 2. Side bracket spring 3. Side bracket flameout
the side bracket firmly, use a 14# sleeve to remove the bolt⑶
switch
①Parking position②Driving position counterclockwise, and take off the side bracket.
a. Check whether the side bracket spring is damaged and
whether the elastic force is normal.
b. Check whether the side bracket rotates normally.
Turning to the angle shown in Figure 1 should be able to
automatically turn to the parking space under the spring
force; when the angle in Figure 2 is turned to the parking
space automatically. If necessary, remove the side bracket for
lubrication.
e. Remove the side bracket bushing⑷ from the frame.

f. Use diesel or kerosene, or a clean cloth to wipe off the

remaining grease. Apply a proper amount of grease to the
two installation planes inside the side bracket and the surface
that matches the flameout switch, and try not to apply it to
the threaded holes.
c. Check whether the flameout switch function is normal.
The vehicle should not be started when the side bracket is
lowered (parking position); the vehicle cannot be started
when the side bracket is retracted (driving position) without
pinching the front or rear brake handle; After starting the
vehicle, put down the side brackets, and the flame should be
automatically turned off, otherwise it is necessary to
troubleshoot the flameout switch or brake switch failure.
d. Check whether the side bracket mounting plate is
deformed or cracked.

114 / 223
 b. Remove the spring from the main support.
c. Apply a proper amount of grease to the end face, inner
hole of the engine box bushing and the surface of the main
Main bracket support shaft.
Caution:
●Park the vehicle on a flat and stable ground or a lifting
platform, and put down the side brackets.
●When disassembling and installing the spring, it is necessary
to prevent the spring from flying off suddenly and causing
personal injury.
●The M125/350 steps are similar to the M310, taking the
M310 as an example.
1. Check
3. Install the main bracket
After aligning the main bracket with the mounting holes,
insert the main bracket shaft from the left. After inserting the
gasket, Insert the split pin, then bend the split pin on both
feet to prevent them from falling off.
Hang the main support spring on the main support first,
and then use a Phillips screwdriver to hang the spring on the
1. Main support 2. Main support spring 3. Main support return spring post of the main support.
return spring post 4. Cushioning glue
a. Right the vehicle, step on the effort-saving lever of the
main support with your foot, and check whether the spring
force is normal. The main support should be able to quickly
return to the driving position under the elastic force of the
spring itself.
b. Check whether the buffer glue is aging or not.
c. Check whether the return spring post of the main
support is deformed.
d. Check whether the main bracket has obvious
deformation and whether the welding part is cracked.
2. Lubrication 4. Replace the return spring post of the main
a. Keep the main bracket in the retracted position, on right support
side, use pliers to remove the split pin⑴ in the direction of After removing the main bracket referring to the previous
the arrow, and remove the gasket⑵. Knock out the main steps, use an 8# sleeve to remove the main bracket return
support shaft (3) from right to left. Pay attention to the spring column counterclockwise. It is recommended to apply
protection measures at the spring of the main support to a proper amount of thread fastening glue before assembly.
prevent the spring of the main support from suddenly Torque: 12 N.m (1.2 kgf.m, 9 lbf. ft).
loosening and flying out and causing personal injury. It can be
covered by a hard object, or the spring can be tied up with a
rope or thin iron wire.

115 / 223
Sound, light, and electrical device ①SET key: Short press SET to enter the main menu/confirm
selection. Long press to return to the main interface. Operate
Inspection this button when driving a vehicle is prohibited.
Caution: ②MOD key: Select the next item. Operate this button when
●Before driving, check whether the lights of the whole car driving a vehicle is prohibited.
are normal, including turn signals, tail lights, brake lights, ③Windshield switch: Press the windshield glass to complete
headlights, etc. Whether the horn is normal. Whether the from retracting to opening or from opening to retracting.
windshield rises and falls normally. ④Steering switch: Push it to the right to check whether the
●The M125/350 steps are similar to the M310, taking the front right and rear right turn signals are flashing normally;
M310 as an example. press the turn signal to turn off; push it to the left to check
1. Check whether the left front and left rear turn signals are normal.
For details of the lamps and lanterns of the whole vehicle, ⑤Hazard warning lights: Press it down and the 4 turn signals
please refer to the lamps and lanterns distribution diagram in will flash, press it again to turn off. It should comply with the
the vehicle information of this manual. requirements of traffic laws and should not be used in non-
emergency situations.
⑥Horn: Press the horn to sound once to confirm whether
the sound is clear and loud.
⑦Dimmer switch: Pull it to " " to check whether the high
beam light is on, and the high beam indicator symbol on the
meter lights up at the same time. Pull to " " to check
whether the low beam light is on. The far and low beams
should be used reasonably in accordance with traffic laws
1. Front brake handle 2. Right handle switch 3. Right auxiliary and regulations.
switch 4. Meter 5. Left auxiliary switch 6. Left handle switch ⑧Overtaking warning light switch: When pressed in the low
7. Rear brake handle beam, it will turn on the high beam.
a. Park the vehicle on a flat ground or a lifting platform,
lower the main support, and retract the side support.
b. Press the unlock button of the right auxiliary
switch①After the vehicle is unlocked and energized, confirm
that the flameout switch④ is pulled to " ", pinch the
front or rear brake handle, and press the start button② to
start the engine.
③Light switch: keep it at the "●" position, check whether
the front position light, rear position light and license plate
light are normally on; pull it to " " to check the handle
backlight, front light, front position light, rear position light,
and license plate The lights should all be on. d. Check the battery voltage
⑤ECO button: Press the meter and it should light up "E", Open the cushion, take off the battery cover and use a
and press it again to light up "S", and the two modes can be multimeter to measure the battery voltage. If it is lower than
switched freely.M125 do not have this button. 12V, you should use the charger provided with the car to
⑥SEAT: Press to check whether the cushion lock is normally charge it in time. Be careful not to overcharge and over
opened. discharge, and the charging voltage of the charger must not
⑦FUEL: Press to check whether the fuel tank cover is be higher than 15V. When the car is not used for a long time,
normally opened. it should be charged regularly in accordance with the
requirements of the driver's manual. If the battery fails, it
should be properly handled by a professional recycling
agency, and do not discard it at will to avoid environmental
pollution.

c. The left switch button test. If you need a more detailed

understanding of each button function, you can check the
driver's manual. Here is only a brief description of how to test or
whether it is normal.

116 / 223
 Press down the central cylinder of the expansion nail with
4 # hexagonal socket, and then take down the expansion nail.
Pull out the cover plate. Note that the back of the cover plate
is pasted with a non inductive antenna and cannot be pulled
by force.

If the battery power supply fails to start, it can be charged

through the PKE charging port.
M125/310 charging
Open the right storage box cover, insert the buckle with
your fingernail or a thin flat-blade screwdriver, press inward
and pull out the buckles on both sides, and then remove the
right storage box cover. Open the rubber plug and insert it into the original
standard charger DC plug. Then plug the AC socket into the
110-220V power supply. The battery damage caused by using
inferior charger is not included in Three Replacement Policy.

Open the protective cap①, pull out the PKE insurance③,

first insert the DC output plug of the charger provided with
the car into the PKE charging port; then connect the charger
input AC terminal to 110-220V household AC.
●Note: When reassembling batteries or fuses, please
remember to reset the EFI hardware. For details, see the
service information in this section.
2. Headlight height adjustment
Caution:
●The height of the headlights is too high or too low, which
will affect safe driving. The light height should be adjusted
reasonably according to the presence or absence of the
occupant and the weight change of the driver.
●It is strictly forbidden to adjust the light height during
riding. It is recommended to find a smooth road with a
straight line distance of about 150 meters for adjustment
① is the protective cap for the charging DC interface;② under the premise of not affecting traffic safety at night.
is the charging insurance;③ is the PKE insurance, which Use a polished rod with a diameter of 6mm (0.24 in) and a
must be unplugged when charging the battery through the
length of 150～200mm (6～8 in) with a Phillips screwdriver
DC interface with the charger;④ is the TEST button, which
from just below the headlights and go up through the
function is same as the unlock button on the auxiliary switch.
dimming hole of the horn bracket, and align it with the
M350 charging serration of the dimming bolt; Rotate the clockwise to turn
Press the button indicated by the arrow to open the right down, and counterclockwise to turn up.
storage box cover.

117 / 223
3.Fuse box
Caution:
●If the fuse is blown, you must replace the fuse of the same specification. It is forbidden to use wires such as copper or iron wire
for direct connection.
●If it is blown after replacement, you need to troubleshoot the entire vehicle cable before replacing it.
●This vehicle uses a small fuse. The width is about 11mm (0.43in), the length is about 17mm (0.67in), and the thickness is about
4mm(0.16in).
●Use the buzzer file of the multimeter to connect the exposed metal part of the fuse to judge whether it has been blown, or use
a tool to unplug and observe.
Refer to the previous steps to remove the battery cover and then pull up the fuse box. After opening the fuse box cover,
check whether the fuse is normal.
No. Name Function Specification
① Main insurance Protect all circuits 25A
② ECM Protect ECM, ECM relay, oil pump relay and other electrical devices 15A
③ Regular power supply Protect fans, meters, and anti-theft device connectors 15A
④ Hydraulic control unit motor Protect ABS hydraulic control unit motor 25A
⑤ Reserve - 25A
⑥ Reserve - 15A
⑦ Hydraulic control unit ECU Protect the hydraulic control unit 10A
⑧ Light Protect the headlight 10A
⑨ Reserve - 15A
⑩ Reserve - 10A

No. Name function Specification

① start up Protection starting circuit 10A
② ABS Protect the ABS controller 10A
Protect position lights, turn signals, tail lights, brake lights, license
③ Assistant 10A
plate lights, horns, overtaking lights and other lamps
Protect the deputy handle switch, Speedometer, windshield, anti-
④ Others 10A
theft device connector

The fuse box of M310 folding rear compartment is shown in the figure below. There are two 10A spare fuses on the outside
of the fuse box.

The M310 integrated rear compartment fuse box is shown below:

118 / 223
 The M350 fuse box is shown below:

4. Troubleshooting
If the button cannot be pressed, it is directly judged as a switch problem. If there is no response when pressed, it is necessary
to judge the problem of the switch, circuit, or electrical device.
4.1 Right hand switch
a.No response when pressing the start button：
Y

Disassemble the
No response Whether the Whether the Whether the handle switch and Troubleshoot
when pressing Is the key Y battery has Y insurance is N electric torch Y N
short-circuit the start the main cable
the start button nearby electricity blown light is on button switch line

N N N
Y

Charge the
Bring the key Whether the The right hand
battery through
close flameout switch handle vice
the PKE
is on switch failure
charging port

Turn to“ ” N Y

Disassemble the
handle switch and
short-circuit the
Faulty right handle
Y switch line of the N
switch
flameout switch
button, can it be
started?

b. When the light switch is turned on, the headlight does not turn on, check whether the light fuse is blown, if it is blown,
check the cable fault; if it is normal, disconnect the handle switch and short the light switch line, if it is lit, it is judged as a switch
failure. Otherwise, check for cable or headlight failures.
c. The "E"/"S" mode cannot be switched by pressing the ECO button. Disconnect the switch and short the ECO button switch
line. If it is lit, it is judged as a switch failure. If it is not lit, check the meter and cable failure.
4.2 Right hand handle vice switch
a. “FUEL” Button failure
Disassemble the
Short press Whether the
auxiliary switch and Sub switch
"FUEL" no battery has Y Y
short the "FUEL" failure
response electricity
switch wire

N N

Refer to the troubleshooting

Charge the process of the fuel tank cap not
battery opening

b. No response at start-up
If the engine cannot be started, please refer to the previous "No response when pressing the start button" for
troubleshooting.

119 / 223
 c. "SEAT" button failure
If the battery is out of power and inconvenient to charge, or the cushion lock fails to open, you can fill in the quality feedback
form and let the engineer guide the method of manually opening the cushion. For safety reasons, this manual does not provide
this method.

Whether the
The cushion
can't open
battery has Y Can the fuel tank
cap be opened? Y Does the horn
sound Y Sub switch
failure
electricity

N N N
Check PKE (brown- Submit the quality
Charge the
yellow and blue-red feedback sheet to be
battery
control terminals) solved by the engineer

d. “ ” Not responding
There is a detailed description of PKE functions in the driver's manual, including the method of emergency starting the vehicle
when the sensor key is exhausted, and the specific meaning of the buzzer sound.
Bring the
Replace the battery, the Right auxiliary
induction key switch failure
model is CR1225
close to

Y N Y
Fill in the quality
No response Whether the Disassemble the right
feedback form and
when
The sensor key is
too far away N sensor key has Y auxiliary switch and
short-circuit the N assist in the
investigation by
unlocking sufficient power unlocking switch wire
the engineer

4.3Left hand handle auxiliary switch

The windshield
Whether it is normal
cannot be raised Check the
or lowered by
pressing the
to push or pull the
windshield rocker Y windshield motor
or motor controller
arm by hand
windshield button

Left hand
handle Left hand handle
N
No response when
pressing MOD Auxiliary switch
Auxiliary failure
switch

Y
Remove the auxiliary
No response when
switch and short the
pressing SET
button switch line

Troubleshoot
N cable or
instrument failures

120 / 223
4.4 Horn
Caution:
●There should be more than 5 seconds interval when adjusting or
checking the horn. Continuous sounding may cause ablation of the
internal coil of the horn.
●The horn is a riveted structure, which is difficult to restore after
disassembly.
●It is prohibited to adjust the bracket nut③.
a. If the horn switch does not respond, please refer to the
troubleshooting process of the left-hand switch on the next page
b. The speaker sounds abnormal
If the sound is small, hoarse, etc., first confirm whether the battery is
sufficient, and turn on the headlights to determine whether the battery is
sufficient according to the brightness of the light. It is normal to start the
engine and raise the speed, but abnormal low speed can also be judged as
insufficient battery power. The battery needs to be charged.
If the power is sufficient, check whether the horn adjustment bolts①
and nuts② are loose. If they are loose, tighten them and check again. If
the fault cannot be eliminated after tightening, try to loosen the nut②
and then use a Phillips screwdriver to fine-tune the bolt①. If the horn
does not sound, turn it counterclockwise about 270 degrees, if it is hoarse,
turn it clockwise until the sound is normal; tighten the nut② after the
sound is normal. If the fault persists, it is judged that the horn is faulty and
needs to be replaced.

4.5 Left hand switch

The left hand switch controls the turn signal, horn and far, low beam, hazard warning light, and overtaking light. It is difficult
to check if there are more lines.

121 / 223
 Left-hand switch problem determination flow chart
(If the button is not working, it is directly judged as a switch problem)

1. Headlights are
always on

2. The headlights are

The horn The near/high Double flashing flashing
Turn signal does light does not light
does not beam does not 3. The headlights are
not light up up
working light up slightly bright

4. The indicator light of

the instrument is
slightly bright
N
Connect the lead wire
Check whether the
directly to the power Check whether the Does the turn
secondary Light failure
supply to see if the turn N secondary button light up?
insurance (powder)
signal is on? insurance (powder)
is burned?
is burned? Disassemble the handle
switch and dry/short-circuit
the overtaking button
switch wire. Has the above
Horn failure
Y N Y situation changed?

Y Connect the horn Engineer Disassemble the handle Check headlights/

directly to the Check whether assistance to fill in switch and short-circuit cables/meters
battery. Does it the meter is on? N the quality the light switch line. Is it
sound? on? Y
feedback form

122 / 223
Troubleshoot Y
cables Y N Y
Disassemble the handle There is also a
Press the double problem with the Y
switch and short-circuit the Troubleshoot
flash button, is it double flash button
horn switch wire. Does it N cable faults
on? (The chances are
sound? N
small)

Y Y Y

Left handle switch failure

4.6 Light
Caution:
●When using wires to detect lamps, please pay attention to distinguish the positive and negative poles. For detailed wire colors,
please refer to the electrical schematic diagram in the driver's manual provided with the car.
The troubleshooting methods of the lamps are basically the same. You can directly lead the wires to the battery with the
battery. If the lamp is normal, you need to check the cable or switch failure, if it is not normal, it is the lamp failure. The vehicle
lamps are all LED, and the lamp housing is usually ultrasonically welded or sealed with glue and the waterproof performance will
be invalid after disassembly.
●The luminaire is reserved with ventilation holes. When the ambient humidity is high, water mist may form inside the luminaire,
which generally does not affect the use. It will disappear automatically after the humidity drops.
●The surface of the lamp should be kept clean. It can be moistened with clean water and then gently wiped with a clean soft
cloth. The soft cloth should be changed to a different position or cleaned with clean water each time the soft cloth is wiped. If it
is wiped directly, the remaining fine sand particles may scratch the surface of the lamp.
The general process of lamp troubleshooting:
After power on, turn on Unplug the plug,
Check whether the
the left/right hand switch
and the lamp does not
Check if the
insurance is blown N lighting terminal is
plugged in
Y connect the lamp
and the battery with Y Troubleshoot switch
or cable failure
light up a wire

Y N N
Replacement Reconnect the
insurance terminals Damaged lights

4.7 Windshield failure

When the windshield switch is pressed, the windshield lifts and falls abnormally, which can be investigated separately
according to the following two phenomena.
Measure whether there is a
Press the windshield switch
Press the windshield 12V voltage between the
again, and listen to whether
Fault phenomenon 1 switch, the windshield Y controller and the motor plug Y Stuck inside the motor
there is a weak relay sound
has no response (measured when the
at the windshield
windshield switch is pressed)

N Controller exception
N

Check the switch plug and If the plug has been

whether the controller plug is plugged in, the handle
loose switch button will fail

When the windshield is raised

The inside of the motor
and lowered, there will be
gearbox is abnormal.
jams and jumps.

Press the windshield

Fault phenomenon 2 switch, the windshield
has response
The windshield lifts and moves
The controller
smoothly, without stuttering. But
abnormality caused the
the lift is small and it cannot reach
windshield motor to stop
the predetermined position
prematurely

123 / 223
 3. EFI system
Know Before Service
Caution:
1. The structure and working principle of the EFI system are relatively complicated, and it is necessary to have a certain
understanding of the working principle and structural characteristics of each EFI system before checking and troubleshooting.
The content of this chapter requires certain maintenance experience. It is recommended to check or repair with a qualified
maintenance organization.
2. Please keep the fuel in the fuel tank at least 3L (3.17 US qt, 2.64 lmp qt, 0.79 US gal, 0.66 lmp gal), otherwise it will affect the
normal operation of the EFI system. Instrument oil level display 1 grid or less need to be replenished fuel as soon as possible.
3. When the vehicle is parked for more than 3 hours, the vehicle should be energized before the first start. Turn on the flameout
switch "" and wait for the fuel pump to complete the fuel pressure before starting the vehicle.
4. If you fail to start several times, the cylinder may have been flooded. You need to turn the throttle to the end and press the
start button for 3 seconds to execute the cylinder cleaning procedure.
5. If the battery low voltage warning symbol flashes, charge the battery in time; too low voltage may cause the EFI components
to fail to work normally, fail to start or start difficult, insufficient power, etc.
6. The EFI system needs to be reset when the battery is reinstalled, the power is suddenly cut off during driving, the idling speed
is abnormal, and the insurance is re-plugged. The specific method is as follows:
a. Unlock the vehicle and support the main bracket;
b. Pinch the brake and start the vehicle;
c. Pull the engine speed above 3000 rpm;
d. After releasing the throttle, turn off the flameout switch and lock the car;
e. After waiting for 5 seconds, unlock the vehicle again to complete the reset of the EFI system.
7. Pay attention to the following when checking or troubleshooting EFI system failures:
a. After power-on, the parts connected to the 12V power supply should not be removed at will to avoid the self-inductance of
the coil in the electrical appliance and cause the instantaneous voltage to damage the ECU or sensor.
b. Do not blindly disassemble and inspect when failure occurs. Check the electrical control part after confirming that the
mechanical part is normal.
c. During the fault diagnosis, give priority to using the diagnostic Speedometer to read the fault code or determine the fault
code according to the flashing frequency of the fault indicator, and conduct targeted inspections.
d. Pay attention to check whether the EFI components are oxidized and whether the connection is reliable
Tools：
PT300EFI flashing diagnostic
Multimeter
Speedometer（16PIN）

8. The driving conditions and maintenance conditions of each vehicle are different, so it is impossible to list all the fault
phenomena and troubleshooting procedures one by one. Only some of the more common faults can be listed. Maintenance
personnel themselves also need to have certain professional knowledge and experience accumulation process.

●Do not turn on the flameout switch for a new car or a vehicle that is about to run out of fuel. Be sure to replenish enough fuel
before turning it on, otherwise the fuel pump will be damaged if it runs dry without fuel.
●Do not insert or unplug the plugs of various parts at will, and it is forbidden to clean the plugs directly with water. After
plugging and unplugging, be sure to check whether it is plugged back correctly.

124 / 223
Error code
Caution:
●Unlock the vehicle and turn on the flameout switch. When it is not started, the EFI fault light is always on as normal. If it is not
on, the vehicle cannot be started.
●After starting the vehicle, if the fault light is on and the EFI failure is reported, it means that the EFI system is abnormal.
●When the EFI system reports a failure, continuing to drive the vehicle may cause damage. Please contact a qualified
maintenance organization or our special maintenance point for troubleshooting in time.

1. M310 Read the fault code through the meter

When the engine is running, if the EFI failure indicator
light " " is on, it indicates that there is a fault in the EFI
component that needs to be rectified.
a. Turn the throttle to the maximum before energizing
the whole vehicle, and keep it in the fully open position,
then turn on the electric door lock and flameout switch.
The system detects a fault and the fault light will start to
flash. Note: M125 needs to use the diagnostic instrument of
b. The fault code has 4 digits. Read the fault code ISO15765-4 communication protocol (CAN diagnosis) to
according to the number of flashes. For example: P0201 read the fault code, which cannot be read through the
flashes in the following way: continuous flashing 10 times- instrument.
intermittent 1 second-continuous flashing 2 times- M350
intermittent 1 second-continuous flashing 10 times-
Press the button indicated by the arrow to open the right
intermittent 1 second- Flashes once in a row.
storage box cover.
c. If there is more than one fault, the next fault code will
flash after the fault light is off for 4 seconds. Therefore,
after the fault light is off during the flashing process,
waiting for more than 5 seconds and still no longer lights
up, it means that the fault code has been flashed.
d. If you need to observe the blinking code again, you
need to turn off the flameout switch first, then turn it on
again, and keep the throttle fully open.
2. Read the fault code through the diagnostic
tool
M125/310 Press down the central cylinder of the expansion nail
Open the right storage box cover, insert the buckle with with 4 # hexagonal socket, and then take down the
your fingernail or a thin flat-blade screwdriver, press in and expansion nail. Pull out the cover plate. Note that the back
pull out the buckles on both sides at the same time, then of the cover plate is pasted with a non inductive antenna
remove the right storage box cover⑴. and cannot be pulled by force.

Pull out the OBD plug, connect the diagnostic tool to Pull out the OBD plug and connect the diagnostic
read the fault code. Different batches of OBD plugs may instrument to read the fault code. Different batches of OBD
have different colors. There are two colors, black and plugs may have different colors, including black and white,
white, with the same function. If the OBD plug has a with the same functions. If the OBD plug has a protective
protective cover, remove it first. cover, remove it first.

125 / 223
3. Error code
Code Instruction Code Instruction
The heating control circuit of the upstream 1 Engine coolant temperature sensor signal is
P0030 PD116
cylinder oxygen sensor is open unreasonable
The upstream 1 cylinder oxygen sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit voltage is
P0031 P0117
heating control circuit voltage is too low too low
The upstream 1 cylinder oxygen sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit voltage is
P0032 P0118
heating control circuit voltage is too high too high
The intake pressure sensor/atmospheric
P0106 P0122 Throttle position sensor circuit voltage ultra-low limit
pressure sensor is unreasonable
P0107 Intake pressure sensor is shorted to ground P0123 Throttle position sensor circuit voltage limit
The intake air pressure sensor is shorted to The signal of the upstream 1 cylinder oxygen sensor is
P0108 P0130
the power supply unreasonable
Intake air temperature sensor signal voltage The signal of the upstream 1 cylinder oxygen sensor is
P0112 P0131
is too low too low
Intake air temperature sensor signal voltage The signal circuit voltage of the upstream 1 cylinder
P0113 P0132
is too high oxygen sensor is too high
Upstream 1 cylinder oxygen sensor circuit
P0134 P0627 Oil pump relay control circuit is open
signal failure
The oil pump relay control circuit is shorted to the
P0201 1 cylinder injector control circuit is open P0629
power supply
1 cylinder injector control circuit is shorted to
P0261 P0650 MIL lamp driver stage circuit failure
ground
The 1 cylinder injector control circuit is
P0262 P0444 Canister solenoid valve open
shorted to the power supply
No speed sensor pulse signal (open circuit or
P0322 P0459 Canister solenoid valve is shorted to the power supply
short circuit)
P0480 Fan control circuit is open P0458 Canister solenoid valve is shorted to ground
P0691 Fan control circuit is shorted to ground P2300 1 cylinder ignition coil is shorted to ground
The fan control circuit is shorted to the
P0692 P0628 The oil pump relay control circuit voltage is too low
power supply
P0511 Idle speed actuator control circuit is open P1098 Dump sensor signal voltage is too low
P0563 System battery voltage is too high P1099 Dump sensor signal voltage is too high
4. Clear fault code
After troubleshooting the EFI, it needs to be cleared manually or through a diagnostic tool. M310 can be cleared manually,
M125 need to use the ISO15765-4 communication protocol (CAN diagnosis) diagnostic instrument to clear.
4.1 M310 manually clear
a. Unlock the vehicle
b. Turn off the flame switch to "";
c. Start the vehicle, refuel in neutral gear to more than 4000 rpm and hold for 10 seconds;
d. Release the throttle, turn the flameout switch to "", and be careful not to power off the whole vehicle, and wait for more
than 10 seconds;
e. After repeating the above three steps for 4 times, the fault light goes out.

126 / 223
4.2 Use the diagnostic tool to clear
The steps of different brands or models may be different, so please refer to the description of the diagnostic Speedometer
manual to clear the fault code.

●When the engine is running, the fault light does not turn on, and the fault light flashes after the engine is turned off, it is a
historical fault, which will not affect the performance and life of the whole vehicle, and will automatically disappear later.
EFI parts layout

M310 M125

M350
1 2 3 4 5 6
OBD diagnostic
Carbon canister Fuel injector
Dump switch interface (main Fuel pump EFI relay
solenoid valve (M310)
cable)

7 8 9 10 11 12
Crankshaft
Ignition coils Throttle valve Water and oil Oxygen Sensor MSE6.0 ECU
position sensor
(M310) body (M310) shared sensor (M310) (M310)
(M310)

127 / 223
 13 14 15 16 17 18
External intake Throttle Body Crankshaft
Oxygen Sensor Fuel injector Ignition coils
pressure sensor Assembly position sensor
(M125) (M125) (M125)
(M125) (M125) (M125)

19 20 21 22 23 24
Air filter intake air
temperature MSE8.0 ECU Fuel pump Oxygen Sensor Ignition coil body EFI high voltage
sensor (M125) （M350） (M350) （M350） line（M350）
(M125)

25 26 27 28 29
External intake Crankshaft Air filter intake air
Throttle valve ECU
pressure senso position sensor temperature
body (M350) （M350）
（M350） (M350) sensor（M350）

Fault diagnosis and elimination of EFI parts

Caution:
●Once the EFI components are disassembled, the EFI system needs to be reset. For details, see the service information in this
chapter.
●Fuel pumps, three-in-one sensors, stepping motors, ECUs, etc. are precision parts, such as unauthorized disassembly may
cause damage, and it is not within the scope of the three guarantees for human reasons.
●After disassembling the throttle valve body, apply lint-free cloth or textured paper to seal the air filter outlet and intake
manifold to prevent foreign matter from entering.
1. Dump switch

Can ride Replace the

normally dump switch
Short-circuit the
black-brown, white-
Fuel cut off
yellow wires
during driving
connected to the
dump switch Check ECU, fuel
Can't ride
pump, throttle
normally
valve body, etc.

2. OBD port
The main cable has its own OBD interface, and the
location is shown in the previous section to read the fault
code through the diagnostic Speedometer. Use the
diagnostic tool through the diagnostic interface to read
historical fault codes, current fault codes, clear fault codes
and read ECU status.

The picture above shows the cable end connector

128 / 223
No. 1 5 6 7 14 16
Blue/y yellow/ brown/ green/
Color green Red
ellow white white black
3. Fuel pump
Caution:
●The fuel pump is a precision component that needs to be
assembled in a dust-free workshop and requires rigorous
testing, so it is forbidden to disassemble it by yourself.
●The engine of this vehicle is designed with a high
compression ratio. It is recommended to add 95# and
above unleaded gasoline for a long time. In order to extend
the service life of the vehicle, please be sure to go to a
regular gas station to refuel.
●It is forbidden to run the fuel pump in dry state or in
water, otherwise its service life will be shortened, and it will
be directly damaged in severe cases. The positive and
negative wires of the fuel pump cannot be connected in
reverse. It is forbidden to disassemble the fuel inlet filter,
which may cause foreign matter to enter the fuel pump or
block the fuel injector.
●The disassembly of the fuel pump or high-pressure fuel
pipe should be carried out in a well-ventilated, dust-free or When reassembling, you need to pre-tighten diagonally
dust-less environment; dangerous operations such as and then tighten the 5 bolts. Otherwise, the uneven
fireworks or mobile phones should be strictly prohibited in compression of the seal rubber ring of the fuel pump may
the disassembly site. cause leakage and cause safety hazards.
When it is difficult to start the engine or start without 4. Carbon canister solenoid valve
dust; the engine is not working well, the operation is
When the engine performance is poor; the idle speed is
unstable, etc.; the fuel injector does not inject fuel; the
poor; the air-fuel ratio is incorrect, the carbon canister
engine is running weak and the acceleration performance is
solenoid valve should be checked.
deteriorated. It is necessary to check whether the fuel
Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the
pump is abnormal.
two inserts of the canister solenoid valve plug should be
Refer to the steps of "Maintenance-Fuel Pipe-
35±2Ω, otherwise it can be judged that the solenoid valve is
Replacement of High-pressure Fuel Pipe" in this manual to
faulty.
remove the surrounding bottom plate and high-pressure
fuel pipe. Refer to the section "Maintenance-Fuel Pipe-Fuel
Pump" to measure fuel pressure with a fuel pressure gauge,
or use a simple test method to test whether the fuel pump
is normal.

5. EFI relay
M310 folding rear storage box: there are two PVC
sheaths at the battery, each sheathing encloses four relays,
If the fuel pump needs to be removed from the vehicle, a total of eight relays (starting auxiliary, light, oil pump,
the fuel pump can be used to drain the fuel in the fuel tank. main relay, front motor, rear motor, cooling fan, rear box
After lifting the vehicle, press the plug buckle as shown in starting). M310 integrated rear compartment: there are 4
the figure to pull out the cable. Remove 5 bolts from the relays (starting auxiliary, light, oil pump, main relay) near
bottom with a 10# sleeve, and then remove the fuel pump the ECU on the right side of the vehicle, and 2 relays (front
after removing the high-pressure fuel pipe bracket. Be motor, cooling fan) on the left rear side.M350 has 5 relays
careful not to press the fuel outlet pipe shown in the red (starting auxiliary, lighting, oil pump, main relay and cooling
circle. Once damaged, you can only replace the entire fuel fan) at the relay bracket on the left side of the front riser of
pump assembly. the head.

129 / 223
 engine stalls when the injector plug is unplugged, indicating
that the injector is normal.

b. Pull out the plug after pressing the anti-trip lock. Using
a multimeter to measure the static coil resistance should be
Cable end Relay 12±0.6Ω, otherwise the injector must be replaced if it fails.
3 and 5 are normally closed contacts, which can be
tested with a multimeter buzzer. 1 and 2 are normally open
contacts. Otherwise, it can be judged as a relay failure.
The following cable end colors are for reference and the
actual vehicle shall prevail. Different batches of thread
colors may vary, but the function is the same.
Cable end wire color：
Wire
1 2 3 5
no. Relay
Black
Blue/w
light Red and White
hite
white
If you need to replace the fuel injector, wait until the
Start Green Black/ Red
green engine and muffler have cooled down. After placing the oil
assist red white green
White/ Red/bl White/ Green/y container at the bottom, refer to the steps for removing
Oil pump the high-pressure oil pipe to pull out the high-pressure oil
black ack black ellow
Main White/ Black/ Orange pipe at the end of the fuel pump to discharge the remaining
Red fuel. Use a 10# sleeve to remove the bolt⑴, remove the
relay black white black
Front Light injector holder⑵, and then take off the injector⑶.
green black White
motor green
Rear Light
green black White
motor green
cooling Green/ Green
green black
fan white blue
Rear box Light Black/w
green White
start green hite
6. Fuel injector
When the engine is unstable and weak, and the power
performance is poor, check whether the injector is normal.
Need to remove the cushion and storage box first. 7. Ignition coils
There is no high-voltage spark; the high-voltage spark is
weak; when the engine is started without dust, check
whether the ignition coil is normal. Common faults of
general ignition coils such as short circuit, open circuit or
grounding of the coil will cause no high voltage. In addition,
the material of the ignition coil insulation layer is aging, the
insulation performance is deteriorated, and the leakage of
the ignition coil makes the electric spark weak and the
ignition energy is insufficient. As a result, it causes unstable
idling, intermittent flameout and inability to catch fire.
When encountering this kind of failure, it is necessary to
Can be judged by the following methods： check whether the resistance and insulation performance
a. Park the vehicle firmly, start the engine, and let the of the ignition coil meet the requirements, if not, replace it.
engine run at idle speed. Use the auscultation needle or Remove the spark plug from the engine and install it on
stethoscope to listen to the working sound of the cylinder. the high-pressure cap according to the steps in the section
You should be able to hear the rhythmic working sound of "Maintenance-Spark plug-Removing the spark plug". Put
the injector. If the sound is clear and even, it works away the side brackets, use the main bracket to park the
normally. If the sound is low or cannot be heard, the vehicle firmly and unlock the vehicle, turn the flameout
injector needs to be removed for troubleshooting. Or the switch to "", hold the brake handle, and place the spark

130 / 223
plug close to the engine cylinder head cover or box (should
be far away from the spark plug mounting screw hole)
about 6mm (0.24 in), press the start button. If a blue spark
is found on the spark plug electrode, the ignition system is
normal, otherwise it should be inspected by a qualified
maintenance unit.
If you replace the ignition coil, follow the steps below:
a. Put down the lef rear pedal and use the 4# inner
hexagon to remove the M6×14 bolt.
M350
Refer to the previous 310 steps and disassemble it to the
following figure.

b. Pull out in sequence in the direction of the arrow

(from the rear wheel to the front wheel). Note that there
are 5 staples at the red circle and a circle of buckles around.
Need to use a lot of force to pull out. Remove the left cable tie and pull out the high pressure
cap at the spark plug.
Hold the ignition coil body with one hand, and press the
anti falling snap of the plug at the arrow with the other
hand to pull out the plug. Since it is difficult to pull out the
waterproof rubber plug in the plug, be careful not to break
the plastic bracket.

c. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove 2 M6×14 bolts.

Starting from the bottom where the left cover plate of the
fuel tank and the tail skirt intersect, pull the left cover plate
outward with one hand and press the front part of the tail
skirt with the other hand; pull out the upper part of the left
cover plate after pulling out the bottom. Then grasp the
middle of the cover, press down the back of the cover and
pull out the left cover at the same time.
Remove M6×12 bolts with 4 # socket head, remove the
ignition coil and bracket assembly from the vehicle. remove
the two M6x22 bolts with an 8# sleeve, and then remove
the ignition coil body and the high voltage wire assembly.
Unplug the high voltage wire from the ignition coil body.

d. Refer to the section "Maintenance-Removal of Spark

Plug" to remove the left pedal. Steps are not repeated
here.
e. ignition coil
M125/310
Unplug the ignition coil connector, pull out the high-
pressure cap at the spark plug and use a Phillips
screwdriver to remove the two M5×16 bolts⑹, cut the
cable tie⑺ and then remove the ignition coil.

131 / 223
 8. Throttle valve body
8.1 Common failure phenomena
1. The engine is easy to stall when the vehicle is running, and it is difficult to start, especially cold starting.
2. Idle speed is unstable or no idle speed, and there is intermittent jitter when accelerating.
3. Insufficient power, poor acceleration performance and unstable operation.
8.2 Disassembly
Please refer to the description in "Maintenance-Throttle Valve Body" in this manual for detailed steps of disassembling and
assembling the throttle body, three-in-one sensor and stepper motor.
8.3Troubleshooting process

Idle speed adjustment

Throttle body troubleshooting Throttle body sensor
bolts are loose, return
process performance inspection
springs are stuck, etc.

The diagnostic instrument

According to the idle speed, reads the data stream, and
determine the position of the idle The fault light is always
the engineer needs to judge
speed adjustment bolt and fix it; on during riding
whether the sensor is
replace the return spring or clean working properly
the valve plate

Check the corresponding sensor according

to the fault code, if the line is normal, it can
be judged that the sensor is faulty and
needs to be replaced

8.4 Sensor
M310 Three-in-one sensor
The fault code can be read through the diagnostic tool to confirm whether the three-in-one
sensor is faulty.
For details on the disassembly and assembly of the three-in-one sensor, please refer to the
description in "Maintenance-Throttle Valve Body- Disassembly of the Three-in-One Sensor".
The resistance of the two terminals T and G can be measured to determine whether it is
abnormal. The resistance value at 25°C (77F) is 1940～2040Ω.
M125/350 sensor
For the disassembly, assembly and inspection of the throttle valve body position sensor and the
external intake pressure sensor, please refer to the previous section on the throttle valve body.
Air filter intake air temperature sensor
Remove the temperature sensor from the air filter and place it in the ambient temperature 20℃
（68F）～30℃（86）, and use a multimeter to check whether the resistance of the two pins is between
2726～1770 Ω.
9. Water and oil shared sensor
When the engine is difficult to start, the idling speed is unstable, the engine performance is poor,
and the engine is easy to stall, check whether the sensor is abnormal. The fault code can be read
through the diagnostic Speedometer to confirm whether the water and oil shared sensor is faulty.
First, remove the storage box by referring to the steps for dismantling the storage box. Refer to
the steps for removing the throttle valve body to remove the throttle valve body to facilitate the
removal of the water and oil shared sensor. M310/350 located on the right side of the intake
manifold.M125 under the thermostat on the right side of the vehicle. First pinch the top of the plug,
press down the anti-dropping card, and then unplug the plug.
The normal temperature resistance value of the two pins of a multimeter is 1.5～4.0kΩ.
Due to limited space, it is recommended to use a 72-tooth 17# ratchet wrench to remove the
water and oil shared sensor counterclockwise, and remove the 9×2 EPDM rubber O-ring. New O-rings need to be replaced
during reassembly to avoid leakage.
Standard torque：13±1.5N.m (1.3±0.2 kgf.m,10±1 lbf. ft)

132 / 223
10. Oxygen Sensor

●The oxygen sensor must be removed after the engine and muffler have cooled down completely.
When there is poor engine performance, unstable idle speed, high fuel consumption, and incorrect air-fuel ratio, check the
oxygen sensor. The fault code can be read through the diagnostic Speedometer to confirm whether the oxygen sensor is faulty.

M310 M125 M350

10.1 Check
First follow the steps of disassembling the glove box to remove the glove box and find the four-pin plug of the oxygen
sensor. Pinch the top of the plug with two fingers, press the arrow indicating buckle, and then pull it out. The oxygen sensor of
M350 is located at the front bend of the muffler.
Use a multimeter to measure the resistance of the heating element of the two wires to 9±2kΩ (M310/350 are white wires,
M125 is red and white wire); M310/350 model can measure the current should be less than or equal to 2.1A. Otherwise, it can
be judged that the oxygen sensor is faulty. The ceramic inside the oxygen sensor is hard and brittle. It is forbidden to knock with
hard objects or blow with strong gas, otherwise it is easy to cause damage.
Or remove the oxygen sensor and observe the color of the top part of the head, which is normally light gray. If it is white, it
means that the silicon poisoning has been damaged and needs to be replaced, if it is black, it means that there is carbon
deposits that can be cleaned up and continue to use; if it is brown, it means that the silicon poisoning needs to be replaced.
10.2 Replace
M310
First pull out the plug, use needle-nose pliers to remove the buckle (1) from the bracket, and then use a 22# open-end wrench
to remove it counterclockwise. Install after cleaning the installation surface.
The thread of the new sensor is coated with a special paste-like thread anti-sintering agent to prevent air leakage and
facilitate subsequent disassembly. If there is no problem after removing the old inspection, you need to apply a proper amount
of anti-sintering agent to the thread before installation.
Torque standards：44N.m (4.5 kgf.m, 32 lbf. ft).
Oxygen sensor thread: M18×1.5.

M125
After finding the oxygen sensor plug, first push the dark red buckle in the direction of the arrow, then hold the plug end of the
oxygen sensor with one hand, press the buckle indicated by the arrow on the cable end with the other hand, and pull out the
plug. Then use a 22# open-end wrench to remove it counterclockwise. Install after cleaning the installation surface.

133 / 223
M350
a. Remove the M310 ignition coil as shown in the following figure. Remove the cable tie on the left side.

b. Remove the cable tie at the bottom.

c. Find the plug shown in the figure on the left side of the intake manifold, press the anti slip snap indicated by the arrow and
pull out the plug. Use a 22 # open-end wrench to remove the oxygen sensor from the muffler anticlockwise.

11. ECU
M310/350
When the engine cannot be started and the performance is poor, check whether the ECU is normal. Because the ECU is more
complicated and difficult to judge, the elimination method can generally be used to remove the ECU from a normal vehicle of
the same model and replace it with a faulty vehicle.
Refer to the steps of "Maintenance-Rear Shock Absorption-Replacement Rear Shock Absorber" and remove the right tail skirt
to expose the ECU.
The index finger and middle finger are respectively located under the lever. While pressing the buckle with the thumb, turn
the index finger and middle finger to the thumb direction to pull out the ECU plug. Use 5# inner hexagon to remove the bolt⑴
to take off the ECU⑵.

134 / 223
M125
The ECU can only be removed after removing the rear storage box, rear armrest and rear right rear skirt. Pull out the ECU plug
after pressing the buckle indicated by the arrow. Remove 2 M6×12 bolts with 4# hexagon socket to remove the ECU.

12. Crankshaft position sensor

When the engine starts without dust or is difficult to start; poor acceleration and unstable idling; when the engine is stalled
intermittently, it is necessary to check whether the crankshaft position sensor is normal.
The crankshaft position sensor is installed on the right crankcase cover and integrated with the magneto stator. Locate the
sensor plug on the right side of the vehicle, press the head anti-trip lock and pull it out. Use a multimeter to measure the
resistance of the crankshaft position sensor① at 25°C (77F), M310/350 it should be 150±20Ω, M125 it shout be 280±20Ω,
otherwise it should be replaced.
In addition, the three-hole plug of the stator② of the magneto uses a multimeter to measure the phase-to-phase resistance
of any two terminals at 25°C (77F), which should be 0.7±0.15Ω.

135 / 223
 The engine cannot start and there is no sign of fault diagnosis process
When the start button is pressed and the starter motor can drive the engine to run normally, but the engine does not work
normally, and there is no sign of the car, you can refer to the following diagnosis process to troubleshoot the cause of the fault.
No spark or weak Check the ignition
strength system

Check the
Unable to start high-voltage
spark of the Add fuel replace
ignition coil

Y N Y

Check if the air

Check if fuel is Check spark plug
With car signs Y Y filter element is N Check for leaks
sufficient gap
blocked

Check whether the

Check fuel pump Measure fuel
fuel pump is N
and cable pressure
working

Check whether the Check the injector Check the three-

N in-one sensor and
injector is normal and wiring
the water and oil
shared sensor
Y

Measure fuel
pressure
Check the idle speed
Toog low Too high control valve

Normal

Check fuel pump, fuel Check the fuel

Check cylinder Check cylinder
tank vent pipe, carbon pump pressure
pressure pressure
canister regulating valve

The engine cannot be started and there is a car symptom fault diagnosis process
When the start button is pressed, the starter motor can drive the engine to run normally. When there are signs of a car but
cannot start, you can refer to the following diagnosis process to troubleshoot the cause of the fault.
Check the ignition coil

N
Check the air filter outlet pipe and
the air filter element; whether the
Check the diagnostic code Turn the right hand to the Check whether the high
N N fuel tank vent pipe, carbon Y
with a diagnostic tool rubber sleeve voltage spark is normal
canister and other hoses are
blocked or bent too large
Y Y Y
N

Corresponding investigation Check the idle speed Troubleshoot problems Check whether the ignition
according to the code table control valve and its wiring found timing is normal

N Y
Do not add fuel; check
whether the cable is
Check the amount of fuel in the fue
The engine is returned to the broken or open the circuit;
N tank; the vent pipe and the fuel
factory to adjust the timing check whether the fuse is
pump and the filter of the fuel pum
blown; check the fuel
pump
Y
Check the spark plug, and check
Check cables, relays, ECU,
the valve clearance if necessary;
insurance, water temperature Use a multimeter to check
if the spark plug is wet, check Y Check the three-in-one sensor
sensor the EFI system
whether the injector is abnormal
Injector etc.
and whether it is dripping
N

Replace the sensor

136 / 223
Poor acceleration
Rotate the rubber sleeve with the right hand. The engine speed cannot increase immediately, and there is hysteresis, and the
acceleration is slow; you can refer to the following diagnosis process to troubleshoot the cause of the fault.
Check
Check if the air
Poor Check the whether the Check the three- Check fuel
Y N filter element is N
acceleration ignition timing intake system in-one sensor pressure
blocked
is leaking
N Y Y N
Y N

Check whether
The engine is
the fuel pump,
returned to the Repair or Clean up or Clean up or
fuel pump filter
factory to adjust replace replace replace
screen, and fuel
the timing
are sufficient

Check engine
exhaust pipe,
Check or clean
carbon canister, fuel
the injector
tank vent pipe and
other hoses

High idling speed of hot car

When a cold car occurs, it can run at a normal fast idling speed. After a hot car, the idling speed does not fall back to 1500-
1700 rpm. You can refer to the following diagnosis process to troubleshoot the cause of the fault.

Warm up idling
Check the wires
speed is too high

Check whether the

Check whether the Check for leaks at Check the water Check whether the
exhaust pipe of
throttle body is not N the intake N and oil shared N N idle speed control
the engine is
tightly closed manifold sensor valve is normal
leaking

Y
Y Y Y N

Check the free stroke of

the throttle cable; remove
the throttle valve body Replace Replace Replace Replace
assembly for cleaning

Unsteady idle speed of cooling car

Cold car idling is Check the idle Check the water
unstable and easy speed control Y and oil shared Y Check the injector
to stall valve sensor

N N

Overhaul or
Replace
replace

137 / 223
Unsteady idling, easy to cutoff
The engine is running at an unstable idling speed, easy to stall, and can return to normal after a warm car. You can refer to the
following diagnosis process to troubleshoot the cause of the fault.
Unsteady idling / flameout

Check the oil circuit

Whether it returns to
normal Y N Is gasoline enough
normal after filling gasoline

Check whether the gasoline bottom

N layer is obviously stratified (water Y Change the gasoline
deposits)

N
Y Check whether the oil pressure of
the high-pressure oil pipe reaches
Check whether the battery Can the fuel cutoff speed be
Check the battery, rectifier 290kpa-310kpa (if there is no oil
Y voltage is lower than 13V in reached within 3 seconds when N
and magneto pressure gauge, remove the
the shutdown state the neutral throttle is fully opened?
injector to observe the gasoline
atomization)
N
Y
N
Are there any modification
parts with strong magnetic
N Check whether the
fields such as modified GPS Replace the oil pump
and anti-theft device? oil pump buckle is off

The modified parts with strong Y

magnetic field should be Check whether the black and
installed as far away as possible Is it normal after white wire and red wire of the The flameout switch is faulty,
Y N Y
from the relay wiring harness removal ECM main relay are back to replace the right handle switch
and electrical device box, or not normal after short-circuiting
installed

N
Turn off the flameout switch, and
check whether the engine Check whether the crankshaft Re-wrap the wiring harness with
crankshaft position sensor and the N
Y position sensor wire is Y electrical tape if repairable, replace
cable plug are tightly inserted or damaged it if it is not repairable
water has entered

Tighten the plug / Does it return to normal after short-

Replace the dump
Tighten the plug after circuiting the white-yellow line and the Y
switch
the drain is dried black-brown line of the dump switch?

Clamp the terminal

Whether the ignition coil terminal (old)/
Y and plug it back/plug
plug (plug) is loose or has poor contact
in
N

Troubleshoot or
Whether the high-voltage Troubleshoot or replace the
replace the spark Y
line is crimped or broken high-voltage line/ignition coil
plug

Y N

Whether the spark plug Whether the internal contact between

Contact engineer N is loose, carbon deposit, N the ignition coil and the high-voltage Y
aging line is corroded or poorly contacted

138 / 223
Analysis flow chart of EFI failure indicator light always on
If the EFI failure indicator light " " is always on, you should first check whether the wires of the EFI sensors are loose.
The fault light is
always on during
driving

Read fault code

Idle speed fault

Canister solenoid Rear brake light
Other fault codes 0505, stepper motor
valve failure, 0444 does not light up
circuit is normal

Check the
There has been a
corresponding EFI Loose wire
power outage in the N N
parts according to plug
whole vehicle
the fault code

The solenoid valve

wire plug of the
After checking the Throttle leakage is If it is not ruled
The circuit of the carbon canister
route, judge Reset the EFI High idle too small and out, the solenoid
N part is intact and N Troubleshooting and the rear brake
according to the system speed needs to be valve of the
undamaged light wire are
process replaced canister is plugged
damaged incorrectly

The throttle body

Throttle position
has a large After connecting
sensor bounces
The EFI parts are leakage and the wire plug, you
and needs to be
damaged needs to be need to re-write
reinstalled
replaced the ECU

139 / 223
Electrical schematic diagram of EFI system

140 / 223
 4. Ignition system
Know Before Service
1. The content of this chapter requires certain maintenance experience. It is recommended to check or repair with a qualified
maintenance organization.
2. Do not disassemble the parts connected to the 12V power supply at will after power-on, to avoid the self-inductance of the
coil in the electrical appliance, which may damage the ECU or sensor due to the instantaneous voltage.
3. Use spark plugs with correct calorific value. Spark plugs with improper calorific value may damage the engine.
4. Ignition system failures include poor plug connection and corrosion of wiring terminals. These two items should be checked
first.
5. Since the ECU is factory preset, the ignition timing cannot be adjusted. If you need to adjust the ignition timing, you can only
return to the factory for repair.
6. Ensure that the battery has sufficient power. If the power is insufficient, it may result in a slow start speed or weak spark
intensity of the spark plug or no spark.
Tool：
Multimeter

7. The driving conditions and maintenance conditions of each vehicle are different, so it is impossible to list all the fault
phenomena and troubleshooting procedures one by one. Only some of the more common faults can be listed. Maintenance
personnel themselves also need to have certain professional knowledge and experience accumulation process.
8. See the section "Spark plug" in the chapter "Maintenance" of this manual for details of spark plug disassembly and inspection.
Before disassembling the spark plug, clean up the surrounding debris and dust with a dust blower. After disassembly, the spark
plug port must be blocked to prevent foreign matter from falling into the engine.

●Do not plug and unplug the plugs of various parts at will, and it is forbidden to clean the plugs directly with water. After
plugging and unplugging, be sure to check whether it is plugged back correctly.

141 / 223
Troubleshooting
Check the following items before diagnosing the ignition system
a. Check whether the spark plug is abnormal;
b. Check whether the ignition coil high-voltage cap or plug is loose;
c. Check whether water enters the high pressure cap;
d. If there is no spark, find the ignition coil of the same model to confirm that there is no fault and install it on the faulty
vehicle to test whether there is spark;
e. Check to unlock the vehicle, turn the flameout switch to "", and measure whether the "initial voltage" of the ignition
primary coil is consistent with the battery voltage when the engine is not started.

Spark plug without spark

1. Improper spark plug gap
If the gap is too small, the electrode has a "flame suppression" effect to inhibit flame generation, and the spark intensity is
weak; if the gap is too large, the ignition voltage will cause no spark. M310/350 adjust to the standard 0.8-0.9mm (0.031-0.035
in), M125 adjust to the standard 0.7-0.9mm (0.028-0.035in).

M310/350 M125
2. A layer of oil film is attached to the surface of the spark plug electrode
Engine oil or gasoline flees into the combustion chamber and adheres to the surface of the electrode, causing the electrode to
short-circuit and cause no sparks. Engine oil is generally introduced from the gap between the piston and the cylinder wall and
valve guide. Check whether the gap is normal. If it is abnormal, replace the corresponding parts. The accumulated gasoline may
be caused by the mixture being too thick when the cold engine is started, and it can be cleaned before trying to ignite.
3. The spark plug skirt is damaged
The high-voltage current breaks down and leaks from the damaged part of the skirt, and the spark plug needs to be replaced.
4. The electrode has carbon deposits, and the center electrode leaks electricity to the surroundings without discharging to the
electrode
Excessive accumulation of carbon or oil on the electrode causes a short circuit; and may cause the insulator to burn out. Clean
up carbon deposits or replace spark plugs.
5. Electrode damage
The center electrode is damaged by the electric spark or the chemical corrosion of the burning gas for a long time, and it
needs to be replaced.
6. Reduced spark plug insulation
Reduced insulation performance will weaken the ignition voltage, resulting in weakened or no sparks; need to be replaced
7. Short circuit of ignition coil high voltage wire
Ignition coil needs to be replaced
8. Insufficient battery power
If the battery is insufficient, the spark strength is weak or there is no spark. Use the charger provided with the car to charge.
Or charge for long-distance riding.
9. ECU failure
After the above reasons are eliminated, the ECU that has been removed from the same model vehicle can be replaced with a
faulty vehicle to judge.

142 / 223
Ignition system layout

M310 M125

M350
1- Dump switch 2- Side bracket flameout switch 3- Faucet 4- PKE 5- Ignition coil 6- Spark plug 7- Right-hand handle auxiliary
switch 8- Right-hand handle switch 9 Fuse box 10- Relay 11- Starting relay 12- Battery 13- Magnetic Motor stator 14- Crankshaft
position sensor 15- ECU 16- Ignigion body(M350) 17- High voltage line (M350)
Caution:
●The fuse box comes with the main wiring harness and there are 3 in total. For detailed illustrations, please refer to the EFI relay
section in the "Electronic Injection System" chapter of this manual.
●The magneto stator and crankshaft position sensor are integrated in one part and cannot be replaced separately. For details
about the troubleshooting of the crankshaft position sensor, please refer to the section "Crankshaft Position Sensor" in the
"Electronic Injection System" chapter of this manual.

Electrical schematic diagram of ignition system

143 / 223
Ignition system inspection
Caution:
●If there is no spark in the spark plug, check all the cable connections for looseness or poor contact before checking the ignition
system.
●Use a high-precision digital multimeter.
For details of the ignition coil test method, please refer to the section "Ignition Coil" in the "Electronic Injection System"
chapter of this manual.
Pull out the high-pressure cap, find a spark plug of the same model that is confirmed to be normal, and install it on the high-
pressure cap close to the cylinder head cover to do an ignition test to confirm whether the ignition coil is faulty.
Refer to the crankshaft position sensor section in the "Electronic Injection System" chapter of the "Electronic Injection
System" chapter of this manual to check whether it is abnormal.
Ignition timing
Caution:
●The ignition timing is preset in the ECU before leaving the
factory and cannot be adjusted. If adjustment is required,
the engine can only be returned to the factory for repair.
●If the right crankcase cover and cylinder head cover of the
engine are removed to check the timing, the crankcase
cover gasket must be replaced; it is recommended that the
cylinder head cover gasket is also replaced and the sealant
should be applied to the position shown in the figure.
●Because professional tools and equipment are required to
assemble, detailed step-by-step instructions are not given
The bolt center is aligned with the dot center
here, only a rough explanation.
●The M125/350 steps are similar to the M310, taking the
M310 as an example.

The timing of the sprocket is aligned with the timing of the

cylinder head
Refer to this manual for the method of disassembling the Flywheel Checking Fixture：
rear damping assembly of the engine's rear wheel and
remove it first; then remove the peripheral parts of the
engine. Pack the whole engine and return it to the factory
for maintenance through logistics or express delivery.
Check：

Remove the rotor from the engine, install the flywheel

gauge as shown in Figure 1, and check whether the marking
line on the side of the rotor is in the slot (Figure 2).

The triangle is aligned with the flywheel timing mark

Installation:
a. Align the keyway of the flywheel with the half-circle
key and install the flywheel in place, put in φ10.3×φ28×4

144 / 223
washer, M10×1.25×45 hexagon flange bolts, screw in the
threads manually, tighten the timing chain, and turn the
flywheel clockwise , Align the line immediately after the "T"
mark on the flywheel with the triangle mark on the box
body, install the flywheel limit tool, tighten the bolts with a
wind gun, and correct with a fixed torsion, and mark with
an oil-based pen. Torque: 75±7N.m (7.7±0.7 kgf.m, 55±5
lbf.ft).
After the fixed-torque correction of the flywheel bolt is
completed, turn counterclockwise to start the large tooth.
If the rotation is flexible, the assembly is qualified. If it can't
rotate or can rotate in both directions, the flywheel should
be removed and reassembled and the unidirectional device
should be checked. Pull the starting big tooth upwards, the
axial clearance is about 0.7mm (0.028in), it is qualified.

b. Tighten the timing chain, check again and align the line
immediately after the "T" mark on the flywheel with the
triangle mark on the box.
c. Rotate the camshaft to align the dots with the
camshaft pressing plate bolts, insert the timing driven
sprocket into the timing chain and assemble it on the
camshaft, and at the same time, the timing of the timing
driven sprocket is aligned with the timing of the cylinder
head Degree mark.
d. Apply thread glue to the M6×16 bolts. After pre-
tightening by the air screw, tighten it with the air screw,
and finally correct it with a fixed torque wrench. Torque:
12±1.5 Nm (1.2±0.2 kgf.m, 9±1 lbf.ft) . And mark it with a
marker.
e. Remove the flywheel limit tool and put it back to its
original position.
f. Restore the disassembled engine parts.
g. Use the whole machine leak detection equipment to
detect whether there is a leak.
h. Reinstall the rear shock absorber of the engine rear
wheel back on the vehicle.
Ignition coils
For details on the disassembly and test methods of the
ignition coil, please refer to the section "Ignition Coil" in the
"Electronic Injection System" chapter of this manual.

145 / 223
 5. Starting system
Know Before Service
1. If current flows through the starter motor when the engine is not started, it can be judged that the starter motor is damaged
and needs to be replaced.
2. Before servicing the starter motor, turn on the engine stop switch to " " to prevent the misoperation from causing the
starter motor to start suddenly and cause personal injury.
3. When the power is insufficient, the engine may not be able to start quickly, or the ignition current cannot be provided.
4. You can check or repair the startup system by referring to the steps in the troubleshooting process.

●When the engine cannot be started, do not press the electric start button frequently. Frequent operation can cause
overheating or damage to the starter motor, flooding, battery feed, etc.

Troubleshooting
Caution:
●Ensure that the battery is fully charged and in good condition.
●Check whether the main fuse (25A) and ECM fuse (15A) are blown. If the fuse is replaced with a new one and it is blown out,
you need to troubleshoot the line first.
●The starting motor should work under the following conditions:
a. Unlock the vehicle;
b. Retract the side bracket;
c. Turn the engine flameout switch to " ";
d. Press the start button.

Starter motor does not run troubleshooting process：

1. Starting relay
Use two thick wires to
Open the seat cushion connect the two
The ignition cannot be Whether there is a
and remove the battery terminals of the starting
started by holding the "click" sound at the Replace the
cover and pull out the relay, and connect the N
brake lever after the moment of power- starting relay
starting relay from the other end to the
vehicle is electrified on
battery compartment positive and negative
terminals of the battery.
Y

Replace the Short-circuit

starter motor starting relay

Check whether
Does the
Repair the cable Y the starter motor N Y Start relay is normal
engine start
cable is open

146 / 223
 2. Starter motor
Does the Brake switch or
After the vehicle is Short circuit
starter motor N flameout switch
energized, the flameout relay
work? failure
switch is hit“ ”

N
Y

The flameout
switch of the Whether the EFI Press the start Does the starting
N Y Relay failure
right handle is fault light is on button relay respond?
faulty

Check whether Judged as a

Repair the cable the starter motor starter motor
cable is open failure

Replace the
starter motor

3. The starter motor runs slowly

Check whether the battery power is insufficient;
Check whether the battery cable connector is in poor contact;
Check whether the starter motor cable is in poor contact;
Check whether the starter motor is abnormal.
4. The starter motor is working normally, but the engine cannot be started
Check whether the starter gear train is faulty;
Check the ignition system for malfunctions.
Ignition system layout

M310 M125

M350
1-Right-handle switch (stop switch, start button) 2-Right-handle secondary switch (to unlock the vehicle) 3-Front disc brake main
pump (front brake switch) 4-Rear disc brake main pump (rear brake switch) 5-Fuse box 6-Battery 7-Starting relay 8-Starting
motor 9-Side bracket flameout switch

147 / 223
Starting system electrical schematic diagram

Starter motor
Caution:
●If the starter motor is removed for maintenance, replace
the O-ring with a new one and apply a proper amount of
engine oil.
●Our company only sells starter motor assemblies, not O-
rings and motor parts separately. The O-ring has an inner
diameter of φ25mm (0.98in) and a wire diameter of 3mm
(0.12in).
●The M125/350 steps are similar to the M310, taking the
M310 as an example. M125 loosen the rubber buckle and the wire clamp.
1. Remove the starter motor
a. Refer to the steps of removing the rear storage box to
remove the rear storage box. For the removal steps, refer
to the stepping motor removal and cleaning carbon
deposits in the section of the throttle valve body in the
"Maintenance" chapter.
b. M310 cut off the two grade 0 flame-retardant cable
ties as shown in the figure.

c. Loosen the clamp bolt shown in the figure with a 4#

inner hexagon counterclockwise, and pull the air filter
148 / 223
outlet pipe toward the rear wheel to pull out the throttle e. When reassembling, make sure not to omit the O ring
valve body. that comes with the starter motor, and align the teeth of
the electric starter reduction gear. Note that the O-ring
needs to be correctly assembled into the box, as it will
cause leakage if cut edges occur. Torque of the two bolts
for fixing the starter motor: 12±1.5 N.m (1.2±0.2 kgf.m, 9±1
lbf.ft). And mark with a marker.

d. Pull the air outlet pipe to the right side of the vehicle
to expose the two M6×30 bolts that fix the starter motor,
and remove them with an 8# sleeve. After removing the
bolts, remove the starter motor from the engine in the
direction indicated by the big arrow.

2. Disassemble the starter motor

Caution:
●If the magnet tile pulls the electric pole towards the motor housing, the coil may be damaged.
●When installing the electric motor from the slot of the starter motor housing to the housing, make the commutator bar face
the rear side;
●When installing the back cover of the starter motor, please align the marking line with the index line;
●When installing the front cover of the starter motor, pay attention to prevent damage to the oil seal lip of the electric drive
shaft, and align the marking line of the front cover with the index line on the motor housing.
Disassemble and assemble the starter motor as shown in the figure below.
●The M125 steps are similar to the M310, taking the M310 as an example.

149 / 223
1-M6×90 bolt×2 2-O ring×2 3-O ring 4-starter motor front cover 5-gasket 6-rectangular sealing ring 7-starter motor outer shell 8-
rectangular sealing ring 9-electric pole 10-screw ×2 11-Negative brush×2 12-Volute spring×4 13-Positive brush×2 14-Brush frame
15-Brush holder insulation gasket 16-Starter motor back cover 17-Insulation gasket 18-Nut×2 19- Gasket

Examination
Starter motor front cover：
Check whether the oil seal of the front cover is worn and
damaged;
Also check whether the outer ring fits tightly with the front
cover.

Denki：
Clean the metal scraps on the electric screw, and check
whether the commutator bar is discolored;
Check that there should be a gap between the commutator
and the crankshaft.

Motor back cover：

Check whether the bushing of the back cover is worn or
damaged;
Check whether the brush is damaged, measure the length
of the brush, and use the limit11.5mm（0.45in）.
Check the connectivity of the back cover as follows： Check the starting relay
The positive brush is connected to the end of the cable;
●The M125/350 steps are similar to the M310, taking the
the cable end is not connected to the back cover; the
M310 as an example.
negative brush is connected to the back cover.
1. Operation check
a. Remove the seat cushion, remove the battery box cover
assembly, and pull out the starting relay.

150 / 223
 green/red wire, and one to any bolt connected to the frame.
It should be conductive when the start button is pressed.

b. Unlock the vehicle, turn the engine shutoff switch to "

", retract the side bracket, pinch the brake handle and
press the start button. You should hear the sound of the start 3. Check the starting relay
relay picking up, otherwise you should check the start circuit. Use a thicker wire to directly connect the 12V battery to
2. Check the relay coil the relay. Use the buzzer file of the multimeter to measure
2.1 Input line the green/red and yellow-red wires, which should be
conductive, and should be disconnected after disconnecting
Adjust the multimeter to the DC voltage 20V file (if it is an
the battery.
automatic range multimeter, adjust it to the DC voltage file).
Insert the red test lead into the rubber sleeve of the 4. Disassembly and assembly of the starting relay
yellow/red wire and stick it tightly to the terminal. Open the black protective cap of the starting relay and use
Unlock the vehicle, turn the engine off switch to " ", and a 10# sleeve to remove the self-contained M6 nut, take out
the black test lead can select any bolt connected to the frame the wire and screw it back to the nut to prevent loss; use the
nearby. When the brake handle is pressed and the start same method to remove the other end. Unplug the
button is pressed, the voltage measured between the yellow/red and green/red wires.
yellow/red wire and the ground wire should be the battery
voltage.

When re installing, the yellow/red and green/red wires of

the relay correspond to the color of the main cable, and the
nuts are not distinguished. Be sure to close the protective cap
2.2 Ground wire
after tightening the nut.
The vehicle is powered off and locked. Set the multimeter
to the buzzer position, connect one test lead to the

151 / 223
 6. Fuel supply system
Know Before Service
1. Bending or twisting the control cable will affect the smooth operation, and may cause a short circuit or open circuit, causing
the vehicle to lose control.
2. The operation should be carried out in an open and ventilated place. All activities that may cause sparks, such as smoking,
calling on mobile phones, etc., are prohibited on the job site.
3. Before operation, release the pressure of the high-pressure fuel pipe. The method is as follows: unplug the fuel pump, start
the engine and run at idling speed until the engine stops. Turn off the engine，Turn off to " ", turn off the power and lock the
bike.
4. Do not fully open the throttle valve body manually after removing the throttle cable, which may cause abnormal idling.
5. After removing the throttle valve body, apply masking paper or a clean non-woven fabric to block the air inlet to prevent
foreign matter from falling into the engine.
6. Do not damage or operate the throttle valve body, which may cause abnormal throttle operation.
7. After removing the throttle valve body, prevent dust or foreign matter from entering the throttle hole or air passage. If
necessary, it can be cleaned with dry compressed air.
8. It is forbidden to loosen or tighten the bolts or nuts that have been marked with a marker on the throttle, which may cause
abnormal throttle opening and closing and idle speed control.
9. Cannot use carburetor cleaning agent.
10. Throttle valve body parts not specified in this manual shall not be disassembled.

●After reinstalling the battery or EFI components, reset the EFI system. For specific operations, please refer to the precautions in
the driver's manual or the throttle valve body chapter of this manual.

Fuel tank removal ●The M125/350 steps are similar to the M310, taking the
M310 as an example.
Caution:
●The demolition site must be ventilated and pay attention to 1. Disassemble the fuel tank assembly
fire prevention. See the previous chapters for specific a. Follow the steps in the pre-service instructions to first
matters, so I won’t repeat them here. consume the fuel in the high-pressure fuel pipe.
●First use the oil well pump or wait until the fuel in the fuel b. Refer to the steps for removing the cover first to
tank is almost exhausted before disassembling. remove the outer cover of the fuel tank, the side cover, the
●Be careful not to pull the nylon rope shown in the figure, pedal and other plastic appearance parts. Remove the Anti-
forcibly pulling it may break. And our company does not sell Vibration plate. Use a 10# sleeve to remove the 4 M6×12
this nylon rope separately. bolts on the right side.

●Pay attention to protect the oil outlet of the oil pump, and
only pull out the high-pressure oil pipe axially. Be careful not
c. Press the anti-trip buckle of the plug of the oil level
to pull or press the oil port radially.
sensor and pull out the plug.

152 / 223
 d. Remove the oil pump plug in the same way. Pinch the
snorkel clamp and move it down, and pull out the snorkel.
Press the anti-release buckle of the high-pressure oil pipe at
the end of the oil pump, and pull the high-pressure oil pipe
along the axis of the oil outlet of the oil pump.

e. Use needle-nose pliers to slightly clamp the cable tie

and push it up to remove it from the bracket.

f. Use a 10# sleeve to remove the 4 M6×12 bolts (1) that

fix the fuel tank.

g. After confirming that the high-pressure oil pipe, vent

pipe and oil level sensor plug have been unplugged, stand on
the right side of the vehicle to facilitate the removal of the
fuel tank assembly. Hold up the fuel tank assembly and turn
2. Disassemble the fuel pump
it clockwise (as shown in Figure 1), while turning, let the
seam welding on the right side of the fuel tank go down to Turn the fuel tank assembly over and place the fuel pump
the bottom of the bracket (as shown in Figure 2). Turn facing upwards firmly. The small wooden stool can be turned
clockwise about 90 degrees and turn the fuel tank assembly over to ground the surface of the stool and put the fuel tank
forward (as shown in Figure 3). After adjusting the position assembly on.
continuously, remove the fuel tank assembly (see Figure 4). Loosen 5 bolts⑴ diagonally with a 10# sleeve, grasp the
Because it is difficult to describe the process in detail, it takes high-pressure oil pipe bracket⑵, and remove the bolt⑴
many patience to try. completely.

153 / 223
 When re-assembling, you need to pre-tighten the corners
and then tighten the 5 bolts. Otherwise, the uneven When reassembling, you need to pre-tighten the corners
compression of the sealing rubber ring of the fuel pump will and then tighten the 4 M6×16 bolts. Otherwise, the uneven
easily cause leakage and cause safety hazards. compression of the sealing rubber ring of the oil level sensor
Caution: may cause leakage and cause safety hazards.
●Early production vehicles do not contain brackets⑵, you 4. Remove the external parts of the fuel tank
can purchase and install them by yourself. assembly.
●The length of the bolt without bracket (1) is M6×16, and the a.Take off the 4 segments directly⑴.
length with bracket is M6×20. b.Press down the fuel tank cap⑵ and then rotate it
●The fuel pump is a precision component that needs to be counterclockwise to remove it.
assembled in a dust-free workshop and requires rigorous c. The battery rubber pad (3) is pasted on the shell of the
testing, so it is forbidden to disassemble it by yourself. fuel tank, which is difficult to remove. If you need to remove
Therefore, the decomposition process of the fuel pump is not it, you can use a heat gun to heat it and tear it off, or use a
explained here. cleaning agent that removes the adhesive to remove it.
3. Remove the oil level sensor
Place the removed fuel tank assembly. It is recommended
to protect the fuel pump at the bottom of the fuel tank.
Use a 10# sleeve to remove the 4 M6×16 bolts⑴, and pull
the sensor⑵ out. Be careful not to pull it forcibly to avoid
the deformation of the float connecting rod, which will cause
the deviation of the oil volume display to increase.

Examination
1. Fuel pressure test
Refer to the fuel pump section in the "Maintenance" chapter for the test method.
2. Fuel pump inspection
Unlock the vehicle, turn the engine stop switch to "", you should be able to hear the sound of the fuel pump running. If you
don't hear the fuel pump running sound, turn off the engine and turn off the power first.
Refer to the steps in the "Maintenance" chapter to replace the high-pressure oil pipe first to remove the surrounding bottom
plate. Refer to the previous fuel tank removal steps to unplug the fuel pump.
Use a multimeter to measure the voltage of the fuel pump plug cable end, unlock the vehicle, and when the engine stop
switch is turned to "", the fuel pump will accumulate pressure for about 5 seconds, during which time the battery voltage should
be able to be measured.
If the battery voltage can still be measured without starting the engine after the pressure accumulation is completed, check
whether the fuel pump relay is normal. If the relay is normal, the fuel pump needs to be replaced if it is abnormal.
3. Oil level sensor
Use the resistance file of a multimeter to measure the resistance. The lowest position (empty oil): 287～313Ω, the highest
position (full oil): 27～79Ω.
Pull the float connecting rod, there should be no jamming phenomenon and good contact of the contacts during the rotation
process.
Check the appearance of the float, and there should be no damage.

154 / 223
 7. Cooling system
Know Before Service
1. Please refer to the radiator section of the "Maintenance" chapter of this manual for the corresponding precautions for the
coolant (antifreeze).
2. Check the cooling water pipe; check the height of the cooling liquid, adding and discharging the cooling liquid have been
described in detail in the radiator section of the "Maintenance" chapter, and this chapter will not be repeated.
Tool:

Air source with adjustable

Hoop clamp Multimeter Homemade cover*
air pressure
*It can be blocked with a soft rubber plug, or folded in half with a hose and tied up with a rope or wire as a plug for the small
pipe to test the sealing of the water tank filling port. You can find a water pipe with an inner diameter of 16mm to cut off a
section, and use a suitable air pipe joint and clamp to assemble it firmly at the other end to test the air tightness of the water
tank filling port, the main water tank, and the small water tank.

●When the engine is not completely cooled, opening the water tank cover may cause the coolant to spray out and cause burns.
The water tank cover must be opened after the water tank and engine have cooled down.
Troubleshooting
1. The engine temperature is too high:
a. The coolant temperature of the meter is abnormal or the water temperature sensor is abnormal;
b. The thermostat is abnormal;
c. Insufficient coolant;
d. The radiator, water pipe, and water tank are blocked;
e. There is air entering the cooling system;
f. The cooling fan is faulty;
g. Cooling fan relay failure (see the EFI relay section in the "Electronic Fuel Injection System" chapter).
2. The engine temperature is too low:
a. The coolant temperature of the meter is abnormal or the water temperature sensor is abnormal;
b. The thermostat is abnormal;
c. The cooling fan relay is faulty (see the EFI relay section in the "Electronic Fuel Injection System" chapter).
3. Coolant leakage
a. Water pump seal failure;
b. O-ring is damaged or aging failure;
c. The radiator cover is damaged;
d. The gasket is damaged or aging failure;
e. Water pipe rupture;
f. The radiator is damaged.

155 / 223
Coolant system distribution map
M310

1- Main water tank 2- Water tank filling port 3- Secondary water tank 4- Aluminum water inlet pipe 5- Aluminum water outlet
pipe 6- Small water tank 7- Water and oil shared sensor 8- Thermostat 9- Water pump cover assembly
1- Main water tank 2- Water tank filling port 3- Secondary water tank 4- Aluminum water inlet pipe 5- Aluminum water outlet
pipe 6- Small water tank 7- Water and oil shared sensor 8- Thermostat 9- Water pump cover assembly
M125

156 / 223
1- Secondary water tank 2-Secondary water tank link pipe 3-Engine inlet pipe 4- Thermostat outlet pipe 5- Thermostat 6- Water
tank inlet pipe 7- Water and oil shared sensor 8- Water tank outlet pipe 9- Water tank cover 10- Radiator assembly 11- Water
pump cover assembly
M350

1- Main water tank 2- Water tank filling port 3- Secondary water tank 4- Auxiliary water tank is connected with water pipe 5-
Main water tank inlet pipe 6- Main water tank outlet pipe 7- Water and oil shared sensor 8- Thermostat 9- Water pump cover
assembly

157 / 223
Coolant flow diagram
M310

1- Main water tank inlet pipe 2- Leakage pipe 3- Small water tank outlet pipe 4- Water inlet pipe 5- Secondary water tank
connection pipe 6 Main water tank outlet pipe 7- Engine inlet pipe 8- Small water tank inlet pipe 9- Small circulation outlet pipe
10-Water pump cover inlet pipe 11-Cylinder inlet pipe
M310 cooling system:
Small loop (indicated by the blue arrow):
Water pump → Cylinder inlet pipe → Cylinder → Thermostat → Small circulation outlet pipe → Water pump cover inlet pipe

Big loop (indicated by the green arrow):

Water pump → Cylinder inlet pipe → Cylinder → Thermostat → Small water tank inlet pipe → Small water tank → Small water
tank outlet pipe → Main water tank inlet pipe → Main water tank → Main water tank outlet pipe → Engine water inlet pipe →
Water pump cover inlet pipe

Caution:
●The hoop indicated by the red arrow in the figure should face backwards.
●Early production vehicles (produced before mid-March 2021) have different routing of leaky pipes. All the products currently
produced come out from the front of the main water tank and are tied to the water tank bracket with cable ties.

158 / 223
M125

1- Secondary water tank 2-Secondary water tank link pipe 3-Engine inlet pipe 4- Thermostat outlet pipe 5- Thermostat 6- Water
tank inlet pipe 7- Water and oil shared sensor 8- Water tank outlet pipe 9- Water tank cover 10- Radiator assembly 11- Water
pump cover assembly
M125 cooling system:
Small loop (indicated by the blue arrow):
Cylinder → thermostat → Thermostat outlet pipe → Engine inlet pipe → water pump cover

Big loop (indicated by the green arrow):

Cylinder → thermostat → Water tank inlet → water tank → Water tank outlet pipe → Engine inlet pipe → water pump cover
M350

1- Main water tank 2- Water tank filling port 3- Secondary water tank 4- Auxiliary water tank is connected with water pipe 5-
Main water tank inlet pipe 6- Main water tank outlet pipe 7- Water and oil shared sensor 8- Thermostat 9- Water pump cover
assembly
Small loop (indicated by the blue arrow):
Water pump →Water pump cover outlet pipe→ Cylinder →Thermostat →Water pump cover inlet pipe

Big loop (indicated by the green arrow):

Water pump →Water pump cover outlet pipe→ Cylinder →Thermostat→ Main water tank inlet pipe→ Main water tank→Main
water tank outlet pipe→ Water pump cover inlet pipe
159 / 223
Cooling system disassembly
Caution:
●Before disassembling, please refer to the steps of
discharging the cooling liquid in the cooling system section of
the "Maintenance" chapter to drain all the cooling liquid
first.
●Wear protective measures such as waterproof gloves and
protective glasses during disassembly, and prevent the d. Use an 8# sleeve to remove the 3 M6×22 bolts shown
coolant from contacting the skin. in the figure.
●The disassembly operation must be performed after the
engine, radiator, and muffler are completely cooled.
M310 Remove the radiator assembly
a. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove M6×16 bolt⑴, water
pipe limit bracket⑵ will not be removed temporarily. Use a
10# sleeve to remove the M6×12 bolt⑶, and separate the
water pipe fixing bracket⑷ from the limit bracket⑵.

e. Use an 8# sleeve to remove one M6×22 bolt that fixes

the aluminum water inlet pipe; fix two M6×30 bolts on the
upper left side of the main water tank and the upper right
side of the small water tank.

b. Place the oil pan underneath, clamp the hoop with hoop
pliers and move it about 40mm (1.6 in) in the direction of the
arrow. Wear waterproof gloves with both hands and f. First open the black rubber cover of the auxiliary water
separate the engine water inlet pipe from the tee joint. Use a tank, grasp the auxiliary water tank connecting water pipe
flat-blade screwdriver to loosen the clamp and move it about with one hand, and use the hoop clamp to remove the φ9
40mm (1.6 in) in the direction of the arrow, and separate the hoop in the direction of the arrow, then slowly lower the
inlet pipe of the small water tank from the thermostat. Use water pipe while catching the drain with the oil pan. Coolant.
an oil pan to receive the coolant that may remain in the pipe. Use the same method to remove the φ10.5 hoop and then
pull out the water pipe. Cut the cable tie, and use an 8#
sleeve to remove the 2 M6×22 bolts that fix the auxiliary
water tank. Remove the auxiliary water tank assembly from
the vehicle. Remove the bolts on the right side of the main
water tank and the aluminum outlet pipe.

c. Press the buckle indicated by the arrow to pull out the

plug of the cooling fan of the small water tank.

160 / 223
 g. Use the hoop pliers to move the φ10.5 hoop in the k. After loosening the hoop with hoop pliers, disassemble
direction of the arrow, and then pull out the leaking pipe. the radiator assembly. The distribution diagram of each hoop
Check whether the auxiliary water tank is damaged. is shown in the figure below.
M310 Coolant system hoop/clamp distribution
map

h. Use an 8# sleeve to remove the two M6×12 bolts that

fix the water inlet.
1-Water pipe clamp (φ26) 2-Water pipe clamp (φ22)*10 3-
Water pipe clamp (φ26) 4-Water pipe clamp (φ9) 5-Water
pipe clamp (φ10.5)*2
M310 Thermostat assembly and small loop

i. Pull out the engine water inlet pipe and the small water
tank water inlet pipe, and pull out the water tank assembly
to the left. Grasp both sides of the main water tank and pull
it up in the direction of the arrow to remove the radiator
assembly from the vehicle.
1- Thermostat assembly 2-M6×22 bolt*2 3-Small circulating
water pipe 4-Tee pipe 5-M6×12 bolt*2 6-Water pipe hoop
(φ22)*3 7-Water pump cover inlet pipe 8-Water pipe hoop
(φ24)*3 9-Cylinder inlet pipe 10-Water pump cover assembly
Caution: The bolt (5) at the thermostat is an exhaust bolt,
and the bolt at the water pump cover is a bolt for cooling
liquid. There are O-rings of φ5.6×φ1 at both locations, which
need to be replaced once they are disassembled.
a. Use the hoop pliers to remove the hoop⑹ and hoop⑻,
j. If you need to remove the water filler fixing bracket, you and separate the water pipes⑶,⑺ and⑼ and the three-
can use an 8# sleeve to remove the bolt. Grasp the bracket way pipe. Remove the hoop from the water pipe.
and use an 8# sleeve to remove the bolt, and remove the b. Use an 8# sleeve to remove 2 bolts⑵, take off the
lower mounting bracket of the main water tank. thermostat assembly, and remove the O ring⑾ from the
thermostat assembly. Once disassembled, O ring⑾ needs to
be replaced.

161 / 223
 b. Remove the right part of the cover before proceeding to
the next step.
Before reassembly, the joint surface should be cleaned.
Note that the O-ring cannot be missing and must be correctly
assembled in place. The hoop should be clamped inside the
boss to prevent loosening. Bolt⑵ Torque: 12±1.5 N.m
(1.2±0.2 kgf.m, 9±1 lbf.ft).

c. Remove the right pedal bolt fixing bolt and turn it over
to the back. Remove 2 M6×22 bolt with 8 # socket to take off
the right pedal.Place the oil tray at the bottom, hold the
φ10.5 hoop with the hoop pliers, and then move about
M125 Remove the radiator assembly 40mm(1.6 in) away from the arrow direction.After both
Unfasten the rubber wire buckle (1), remove the two hands wear waterproof gloves, pull out the vice water tank
M6×22 bolts with an 8# sleeve, and then pull out the connection water pipe, and use the oil tray to catch the
auxiliary water tank assembly. Use the hoop pliers to remove cooling liquid that may remain in the water pipe and the
the two φ10.5 hoops, and then remove the auxiliary water secondary water tank.
tank leakage pipe (2) and the auxiliary water tank connecting
water pipe (6).

d.Hold the φ26 hoop with the hoop pliers and then move
it 40mm(1.6 in) in the direction of the arrow to pull out the
outlet pipe of the main water tank.

The radiator assembly is assembled on the engine, and the

removal steps are detailed in the engine service manual
section.
M350 Remove the radiator assembly
a. After the coolant is discharged, remove the cover first as
shown in the figure. Pull out the plug of the cooling fan of the
main water tank at the lower left side in the direction of the
arrow, press the anti slip snap and then pull out the plug. e. Loosen the φ26 clamp with a flat-head screwdriver from
above and remove it. Remove the water inlet pipe of the
main water tank.

162 / 223
 1-Water pipe clamp (φ9) 2-Water pipe clamp (φ26)*3 3-
Water pipe clamp (φ24)*2 4-Water pipe clamp (26)

M350 Thermostat assembly and small loop

f. Pull the two water pipes out of the water pipe clamp,
which is made of plastic, and pay attention to your strength.

1- Thermostat assembly 2-M6x22 bolts *2 3-M6x12 bolts

*2,4- Water pipe hoop (φ25), 5- Water pump cover inlet
pipe, 6- Water pump cover hoop (φ24), 7- Water pipe hoop
(φ26) * 2, 8 - Water pump cover outlet pipe, 9- Water pump
cover assembly
Note: The bolts at the thermostat are exhaust bolts, and the
bolts at the pump cover are coolant drain bolts. There are
φ5.6×φ1 O rings in both places, which need to be replaced
g. Use an 8# socket to remove the two M6x22 bolts on
once removed.
both sides and remove the tank assembly.
a. Use the hoop pliers to remove the hoop⑷ ⑹ and
hoop⑺, and separate the water pipes⑸ and⑻. Remove the
hoop from the water pipe.
b. Use the 8# sleeve to remove the 2 bolts (2), remove the
thermostat assembly, and remove the 16.5×1.95 O ring from
the thermostat assembly. Once removed, the O ring needs to
be replaced.

Before reassembly, the joint surface should be cleaned

and the O-ring should not be leaky and properly assembled.
The hoop should be stuck to the inside of the convex
h. After loosening the hoop with the hoop pliers, platform to prevent loosening. Torque: 12± 1.5N.m (1.2±
disassemble the radiator assembly. See the figure below for 0.2kgf.m,9±1 lbf.ft).
the distribution of each hoop.
M350 Coolant system hoop/clamp distribution map

163 / 223
Cooling system accessories
Caution:
●Special ventilation tooling (gas pressure reducing valve, air gun, sealing tube) is required for testing.
●After the soaking inspection is completed, the water stains should be wiped clean in time, or use a dust blower to blow dry. If
the main water tank and the small water tank are blown dry by blowing dust loose, the wind pressure should not be too large
and should be far away from the radiating fins to avoid damage or deformation of the radiating fins.
●Except the gas pressure is specified when doing the air tightness test, the compressed air of 160kPa (1.63 Kgf/cm2, 23.2 psi)
shall be introduced, and the parts shall be immersed in water and left for 10s without bubbles. If there are bubbles, the air leaks
and needs to be replaced.
●The heat dissipation fins are allowed to have a small amount of lodging deformation. If the lodging area is too large, it will
affect the heat dissipation effect, and it is recommended to replace it. A small amount of deformation can be corrected with a
small flat-blade screwdriver.
●It is forbidden to use high-pressure water gun or high-pressure air to directly flush or blow the heat sinks of the main water
tank and the small water tank.
●Before further testing, check the appearance for signs of leakage. If there is a slight leakage, try to repair it, otherwise it should
be replaced.
1. Main water tank
M310
Check whether the cushion rubber is aging and cracked.
Block the A and C ports with a self-made cap, and check the tightness by
ventilating from the B port.
Compressed air with lower air pressure can be blown from the back to
the water tank from a long distance to clean up foreign objects on the
surface. Or use a low-pressure water gun to spray the radiating fins from a
long distance to clean up foreign objects on the surface.
M350
Check whether the cushion rubber is aging and cracked.
Block the A and B ports with a self-made cap, and check the tightness by ventilating from the C port.
Check whether the fan and net cover are securely assembled and the rotating fan blades are not stuck.Check whether the
buffer is aging and cracked. Check whether the fan cable is damaged.
The fan plug is positive in blue and negative in black.Find a battery with sufficient power and connect the cable to the positive
and negative terminals. Check whether the fan draws back.
Compressed air with lower air pressure can be blown from the back to the water tank from a long distance to clean up foreign
objects on the surface. Or use a low-pressure water gun to spray the radiating fins from a long distance to clean up foreign
objects on the surface.

1- Tank front guard screws *3, 2- tank front guard, 3- water tank, 4- fan page nut, 5- fan page, 6- fan motor, 7- Fan guard, 8-
fan guard bolts *3, 9- fan motor bolts *3, 10- Buffer glue
2. Attention to the water tank filling port
M310
Caution:
●Special ventilation tooling (gas pressure reducing valve, air gun, sealing tube) is required for
testing.
●After the soaking inspection is completed, the water stains should be wiped clean in time.
2.1 Overall leak check
Seal the small tube and ventilate the large tube for air tightness inspection.

164 / 223
2.2 Check of pressure relief valve
Pass 120kPa (1.22 Kgf/cm2, 17.4 psi) compressed air into the big pipe, put the water filler into the water and let stand for 10
seconds. The small pipe should be free of bubbles. Increase the compressed air to 130kPa (1.33 Kgf/cm2, 18.9 psi). Bubbles
appear.
M350
The overall tightness check is consistent with the M310. The inspection method of pressure relief
valve is the same. The gas pressure is 100kPa(1.02Kgf /cm2, 14.5 psi), and there is no bubble, while the
gas pressure is 110kPa(1.12Kgf /cm2, 16 psi),and there are bubbles.
3. Auxiliary water tank
First check whether the rubber cover is aging and cracked, if any, replace it. If the appearance is good,
then check the air tightness.
Seal the two small water outlets and open the black plastic cover of the water tank for air
tightness inspection.
Continue to seal the small water outlet, fill the auxiliary tank with water and turn the auxiliary
tank upside down, and observe whether the rubber cover of the water tank seeps. If there is
seepage, it is unqualified. Pour out the water after checking the tightness, remove the plug and let
the auxiliary water tank dry naturally or blow it dry with a dust blower.
4. Aluminum inlet pipe and aluminum outlet pipe(M310)
Check whether the weld is cracked or cracked; check whether the buffer rubber is aging and
cracked. If the appearance is good, then check the air tightness.
Seal one end and ventilate from the other end to check air tightness.
5. Small water tank(M310)
Check whether the fan and net cover are firmly assembled, and there should be no jamming
of the rotating fan blades. Check whether the cushion rubber is aging and cracked. Check
whether the fan cable is damaged.
Seal one water outlet and ventilate from the other end for air tightness inspection.
The blue of the fan plug is the positive pole, and the black is the negative pole. Find a battery
with sufficient power and connect the wires according to the positive and negative poles, and
check whether the fan draws air backwards.
Compressed air with lower air pressure can be blown from the back to the water tank from a
long distance to clean up foreign objects on the surface. Or use a low-pressure water gun to
spray the radiating fins from a long distance to clean up foreign objects on the surface.

1-Water tank front guard bolt*4 2-Water tank front guard 3-Water tank 4-Fan nut 5-Fan 6-Fan motor
7-Fan Guard 8-Fan Guard Bolt*3 9-Fan Motor Bolt*3
6. Water and oil shared sensor
For details on sensor detection and disassembly methods, please refer to the section "Electronic Injection System" chapter EFI
Parts Fault Diagnosis and Elimination.

165 / 223
7. Thermostat
7.1 Inspection
●The M125/350 steps are similar to the M310, taking the M310 as an example.
Check the appearance for damage and leakage.
Simple test method (test on the whole vehicle):
After the cold car is started, immediately open the water filler cap. If there is no fluctuation
in the liquid level, the thermostat is normal, otherwise it is abnormal. Check that when the
water temperature is lower than 70°C (158 F), the thermostat should be in a closed state. When
the temperature is higher than the initial opening temperature, the expansion valve of the
expansion cylinder will gradually open, and the circulating coolant in the radiator will begin to
flow.
After the temperature rises, check the inlet pipe of the small water tank. You should be able to clearly feel the signs of water
flow or the temperature of the pipe wall, otherwise the pump or waterway will be blocked.
When the temperature reaches 80°C (176 F), the heating rate slows down, and the thermostat works normally. If the water
temperature has been rising rapidly, when the internal pressure reaches a certain level, the sudden overflow of boiling water
indicates that the valve is stuck.
If it is stuck or closed loosely, it can be removed and cleaned or repaired first, otherwise it should be replaced.
7.2 Failure phenomenon
When the water temperature gauge indicates high, the engine temperature is overheated, but the coolant temperature in the
water tank is not high, it is not hot when touching the radiator by hand, and the small water tank fan rotates normally. It
indicates that the big circulation is blocked or blocked, which can be preliminarily judged as abnormal thermostat.
There are generally two cases of abnormal thermostat:
a. The main valve is closed for a long time, and the coolant is circulated in a small circulation route regardless of the water
temperature, which causes the engine to overheat.
b. The main valve is in the open state for a long time, and the phenomenon is that the water temperature rises slowly when
starting, especially in winter, the slow rise of the coolant temperature makes the engine not work at the normal temperature,
and the engine temperature is too low.
7.3 Disassembly
Checking method of thermostat assembly:
Seal the two ports, pass in compressed air of 181 kPa (1.85 Kgf/cm2, 26.3 psi) from the other port, put it in the water and let it
stand to see if there are bubbles, if there is leakage.

1-M6×10 bolt*2 2-M6×12 bolt 3-φ5.6×φ1O ring 4-thermostat upper shell 5-thermostat core 6-thermostat lower shell
7.4 Thermostat core inspection
Check the opening temperature, full opening temperature and lift of the main valve in the
thermostatic heating equipment with adjustable temperature. If one of them does not meet the
specified value, it should be replaced. Or use a thermometer, water, heater, and container to test.
The initial opening temperature of the thermostat is 80～84℃ (176～183 F), and the core moving
0.1mm (0.004 in) can be regarded as the initial opening. The full opening temperature is 95°C (203 F),
and the core movement is greater than 3.5mm (0.14 in).
The simple test method is to put the core body into a high temperature resistant container, pour it
into boiling water and soak for a period of time, take out the core body with pliers, and observe
whether the valve can be fully opened. Until all closed.
The joint surface should be cleaned before rematching, and no O-ring should be installed.
8. Water pipe
Check whether there are cracks, bulges and other defects on the surface of each water pipe. Block one end of the water pipe,
ventilate the other end and put the water pipe into the nozzle to check if there is any air bubbles, if any, replace it.

166 / 223
9. Check the water pump cover assembly(M310)
Check the two points indicated by the arrows for leakage. The bolts are for cooling liquid bolts. If there is leakage, remove the
bolts and replace the O-ring. If there is leakage at the leaking pipe of the right crankcase cover, you can try to remove the
leaking pipe (because the sealant is applied before press-fitting, it is difficult to pull out), clean it up, reapply the sealant and
reinstall it; or directly replace the right crankshaft Box cover assembly.
A small amount of coolant leaking from the leaking pipe is normal. If the engine is running continuously, it is abnormal. The
water pump cover needs to be disassembled to check whether the seal has failed.

M310

M125

M350

167 / 223
 8. Braking system
Know Before Service
1. The content of this chapter requires certain maintenance experience. It is recommended to check or repair with a qualified
maintenance organization.
2. Frequent inhalation of the dust generated by the brake pads, regardless of the composition, may have a certain impact on
health. Avoid breathing dust particles.
3. Do not use a blow gun or brush to clean the brake assembly, but a vacuum cleaner.
4. Avoid dripping the brake fluid on the paint surface of the cover or the surface of the parts. If it is accidentally splashed, it
needs to be rinsed with water immediately.
5. When disassembling the front disc brake main pump and the rear disc brake main pump, make sure that the brake fluid in the
oil cup is in a horizontal position. Do not turn it upside down to prevent air from entering, which will affect the braking effect. In
severe cases, it may cause the brake to fail and cause personal injury.
6. The steps for replacing brake fluid and exhausting air are the same. For detailed steps, see the section on brake fluid in the
"Maintenance" chapter.
7. When the brake pads or brake discs have oil stains, the braking force will be reduced. The contaminated brake pads should be
replaced, and the oil stains on the brake discs can be removed with a good-quality degreasing cleaner.
8. After removing the oil cup cover of the main pump, prevent dust and water from entering.
9. If you need to add brake fluid after maintaining the brake system, you must use the newly opened DOT4 brake fluid. Do not
mix with other brake fluids.
10. Switch to unplug the ABS hydraulic control unit when the vehicle is powered on. Excessive voltage may damage the hydraulic
control unit. The entire vehicle must be powered off before maintenance.
11. The hydraulic control unit is a precision part, and it is forbidden to disassemble it by non-professionals.

●If you accidentally swallow the brake fluid, you should contact the poison control center or hospital immediately; if you
accidentally get the brake fluid into your eyes, rinse with water and seek medical attention immediately.
●Brake fluid must be kept away from children and pets.
●The vehicle must be parked on a flat and stable ground or a lifting platform.

●Wear protective gloves/protective clothing/protective goggles/protective masks to maintain the brake system.
●It is strictly forbidden to directly flush the main pump with high-pressure water.

168 / 223
Trouble shooting
Soft feeling from brake lever
a. The brake system oil circuit enters the air
b. Brake fluid leakage
c. The brake pads or brake discs have oil stains
d. Wear of brake caliper or disc drive main pump piston
seal ring
e. Brake pads or brake discs are worn
f. The disc brake caliper is oily c. After grasping the front brake main pump, remove the 2
g. The main pump of the disc brake is oily bolts (2) with a 5# inner hexagon, and remove the right
h. The disc brake caliper does not slide flexibly auxiliary switch.
i. Insufficient brake fluid
j. The brake oil circuit is not unblocked
k. Brake disc is twisted and deformed
l. Wear and stickiness of disc brake caliper piston
m. The piston of the disc brake main pump is worn and
sticky
Hard feeling from brake lever
a. The brake oil circuit is blocked
b. The piston of the disc brake caliper is worn and sticky d. Tilt the front brake main pump so that the bolt⑴ faces
c. The piston of the disc brake main pump is worn and upward, wear waterproof gloves and use a 12# sleeve to
sticky remove the bolt⑴, remove the copper pad⑶, remove the
d. The disc brake calipers cannot slide normally FMC-HU oil pipe, and remove the brake fluid in the main
e. Wear of brake caliper or disc drive main pump piston
seal pump. Pour out. Bolt⑴ Standard torque: 32N.m (3.3kgf.m,
24 lbf.ft).
Disassemble the disc brake main pump
and calipers
Caution:
●The protective measures and brake fluid hazards have been
explained before, so I won’t repeat them here. e. Refer to the steps of adding brake fluid to remove the
●The two copper pads at the brake hoses of the upper cover; refer to the steps of removing the brake switch
disassembled calipers and the main pump must be replaced and brake handle to remove.
to avoid leakage. The surface of the disc brake oil pipe bolt f. Disassemble the front disc brake main pump
and the copper pad can be reused if there is no scratch. “a”. is the oil window assembly that cannot be
●Disassembling the main pump and calipers requires high disassembled unless necessary; “b” is the φ0.5 oil hole; “c” is
hands-on ability, and it is recommended to be carried out by the φ3 pressure relief oil hole.
professional personnel or maintenance organizations. The
replaced brake fluid should be recycled by a professional unit
and properly disposed of.
●The operator is responsible for the consequences caused by
manual disassembly or improper assembly, and is not within
the scope of the three guarantees.
●Operate in a dry, dust-less or dust-free environment.
●The M125/350 steps are similar to the M310, taking the
M310 as an example.
Disassemble the front disc brake main pump ⑤Dust cap⑥Retaining ring⑦Piston assembly (⑦a outer
a. Remove the cover according to the steps in the removal seal ring⑦b inner seal ring)⑧spring⑨main pump housing
direction in the "Front Fork Assembly" of this manual. Diesel or kerosene can be used to clean the brake fluid to
b. Use a 12# sleeve to loosen the disc brake oil pipe bolt⑴, facilitate the next step of decomposition. If the oil hole is
pay attention to loosen it and then tighten it slightly without blocked, use a dust blower or a small needle tool to clear it.
leakage, otherwise it will be more difficult to loosen this bolt After decomposition, use a soft lint-free brush to clean up all
later. Grasp the mirror rod of the right rear view mirror, use parts. It is not recommended to use a dust blower for drying.
a 13# sleeve to remove the nut④, remove the small The air compressor with poor drying or filtering effect may
washer③, spring②, and large washer①, and take off the blow dust, moisture or other debris into the main pump
rear view mirror. When reassembling, make sure that the housing that has been cleaned through the blower; high
small washer③ is aligned with the side plane of the mirror vacuum can be used Vacuum cleaner. Before assembling the
rod bolt. piston assembly and spring, apply a small amount of DOT4
169 / 223
brake fluid, and do not apply other lubricating materials such
as lubricating oil, grease or anti-rust oil.
g. Apply an appropriate amount of high-vacuum silicone
grease to the outer end of the handle bolt and piston
assembly according to the previous requirements for
lubricating the movable part of the handle. Refer to the
disassembly steps to reinstall, and follow the previous steps
to add the newly opened brake fluid and perform the
exhaust operation. Note that the copper pad (3) needs to be c. Remove the brake pads according to the steps of
replaced with a new one to prevent leakage. After the removing the brake pads
assembly is completed, it is necessary to confirm that the d. Front disc brake caliper disassembly
brake has been restored before driving the vehicle. A dust blow gun can be used to blow in compressed air
Disassemble the rear disc brake main pump from the oil pipe bolts to blow out the piston. Pay attention
The rear disc brake main pump and the front disc brake to placing towels or other soft materials on the piston to
main pump are mirrored and symmetrical. Please refer to the prevent damage caused by collision between the piston and
steps for disassembling the front disc brake main pump for the caliper mounting plate; and the dust blow gun should be
disassembly. kept away from the caliper body. If the distance is too close,
the piston may suddenly fly out and cause damage. Check
the piston and caliper cylinder for scratches, damage, pits,
etc. Check whether the pin is deformed.

Disassemble the front disc brake caliper

M125/310
a. Use 5# inner hexagon to remove bolt⑴, and remove the
wire clamp. First use a 12# sleeve to loosen the disc brake oil
pipe bolt⑷, pay attention to loosen it and then tighten it
slightly to avoid leakage, otherwise it will be more difficult to 1- Caliper mounting plate 2- Brake pad holder 3- Caliper pin
loosen this bolt later. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove bolts rubber cap 4- Piston 5-dust seal 6-oil seal 7-caliper pin 8-
(2) and to remove the wheel speed sensor. Use a 14# sleeve bleed nozzle 9-bleed nozzle rubber cap 10-caliper housing
to remove the bolt (3). Standard torque of bolt⑶: 24N.m 11-caliper mounting plate pin rubber cap 12-brake spring
(2.4kgf.m, 18 lbf.ft); Standard torque of bolt⑷: 32N.m M350
(3.3kgf.m, 24 lbf.ft).
First use 14# to loosen the tubing bolt without leakage.
Then remove two M10×1.5×60 bolts with 8# hex. The
standard torque of the bolts is 45 ~ 50N.m(4.6 ~ 5.1kgf.m, 33
~ 37 lbf.ft). Do not operate the brake handle after removing
the caliper.

b. After wearing waterproof gloves, loosen the bolt⑷

with a 12# sleeve, and turn the caliper upside down so that
the head of the bolt⑷ is facing down to drain the brake fluid
into the oil pan. Remove the bolt⑷ and the copper pad and
then remove the FC-HU oil pipe. Refer to the brake fluid
steps to remove the upper cover of the front disc brake main
pump to speed up the discharge of brake fluid.

170 / 223
Front disc brake caliper disassembly

b. Use a 14# sleeve to remove the bolt (3). Standard

torque of bolt (3): 24N.m (2. 4kgf.m, 18 lbf.ft).
1- Bolt 2- Circlip 3- Inner side caliper housing 4-φ30 oil seal 5-
φ30 dust seal 6-φ30 piston 7- Disc brake pad 8- brake spring
9- Out side caliper housing 10-Pin 11-φ34 oil seal 12-φ34
dust seal 13-φ34 piston
A dust blow gun can be used to blow in compressed air
from the oil pipe to blow out the piston. Pay attention to
placing towels or other soft materials on the piston to
prevent damage caused by collision the piston; and the dust
blow gun should be kept away from the caliper body. If the c. Refer to the procedure for replacing the brake pads to
distance is too close, the piston may suddenly fly out and remove the brake pads first.
cause damage. Check the piston and caliper cylinder for d. Disassemble the rear disc brake caliper
scratches, damage, pits, etc. Check whether the pin is Refer to the previous steps to disassemble the front disc
deformed. brake caliper piston to remove the rear disc brake caliper
Caution: piston. Check the piston and caliper cylinder for scratches,
●Apply silicone grease to the surfaces of the two pins damage, pits, etc. Check whether the pin is deformed. The
indicated by the arrows. points that should be paid attention to during cleaning and
●The oil seal and dust seal should be replaced with new ones assembly are detailed in the previous description, and will
after disassembly. DOT4 brake fluid should be applied to the not be repeated here.
oil seal and piston, and silicon grease should be applied to
the outer ring of the dust seal.
●Apply thread fastening glue to the thread of the caliper pin,
torque: 22N.m (2.2kgf.m, 16 lbf.ft).
●The torque of the air release nozzle: 7～9N.m (0.7～
0.9kgf.m, 5～7 lbf.ft).
●The open end of the piston should face the caliper
mounting plate, and do not install it backwards.
●If there is slight rust on the surface of the piston, it can be
polished off with 2000 mesh fine sandpaper.
e. Refer to the disassembly procedure to restore all parts
and add new DOT4 brake fluid according to the procedure of
replacing the front disc brake brake fluid. Only after
confirming that the brake is restored can the vehicle be 1- caliper mounting plate pin 2- bushing 3- rubber cap 4-
driven. caliper pin 5- vent nozzle 6-vent nozzle rubber cap 7-oil seal
8-dust seal 9-piston 10-caliper pin rubber cap 11- Caliper
Disassemble the rear disc brake caliper mounting plate 12- Brake pad spring 13- Caliper housing
a. Place an oil pan at the bottom of the caliper, wear Caution:
waterproof gloves and loosen the bolt⑴ with a 12# sleeve, ●Apply silicone grease to the surface of the pin and bush
remove the copper pad⑵, and remove the RC-HU oil pipe. indicated by the arrow.
Refer to the steps for adding brake fluid to the main pump of ●The oil seal and dust seal should be replaced with new ones
the rear disc brake. Remove the upper cover of the main after disassembly. DOT4 brake fluid should be applied to the
pump to accelerate the discharge of the brake fluid. Bolt⑴ oil seal and piston, and silicon grease should be applied to
Standard torque: 32N.m (3.3kgf.m, 24 lbf.ft). the outer ring of the dust seal.
●Apply thread fastening glue to the thread of the caliper pin,
torque: 27N.m (2.8kgf.m, 20 lbf.ft).
●The torque of the air release nozzle: 7～9N.m (0.7～
0.9kgf.m, 5～7 lbf.ft).
●The open end of the piston should face the caliper
mounting plate, and do not install it backwards.
●If there is slight rust on the surface of the piston, it can be
polished off with 2000 mesh fine sandpaper.
171 / 223
Brake hose and wheel speed sensor brake fluid into the oil pan, and then refer to the front and
rear disc brake main pumps. Add brake fluid step to remove
Check the gap between the wheel speed sensor the upper cover of the main pump to accelerate the
and the induction ring gear discharge of brake fluid. Remove the disc brake oil pipe bolts
Caution: and copper pads at the main pumps of the front and rear disc
●The M125/350 steps are similar to the M310, taking the brakes. Only the disassembly steps of the brake hose are
M310 as an example. explained here.
●The vehicle needs to be parked on a stable lifting platform b. Press the buckle indicated by the arrow, turn the plug
or on a level and level ground. push rod in the direction indicated by the arrow, and pull out
Put down the main bracket to park the vehicle firmly and the plug. In order to prevent the remaining brake fluid from
let the rear wheels hang in the air. entering the plug when the hose is removed in the next step,
Use a feeler gauge to check whether the gap between the the plug of the hydraulic control unit can be wrapped with an
wheel speed sensor and the ABS induction ring gear is 0.4- oil-resistant film plastic bag.
1.2mm (0.02-0.05in).
If the gap is not within the specified range, check whether
the wheel speed sensor is damaged and whether the ABS
induction ring gear is loose. The front wheel needs to check
whether the position of the sensor installed on the front disc
brake caliper mounting plate is deformed, and the rear wheel
is to check whether the mounting position on the rear rocker
arm is deformed and whether the rear wheel nut is loose.

Front wheel

M310

Rear wheel
Remove the brake hose and wheel speed sensor
Caution:
●Check whether the brake hose is normal according to the
maintenance table.
●Before disassembling the brake hose, drain the brake fluid
before operation. M125
●Before removing the hose, remove the upper cover of the
front and rear disc brake main pump, loosen the disc brake
oil pipe bolts from the front and rear disc brake calipers to
drain the brake fluid.
●The discharged brake fluid needs to be properly disposed
of, and it is forbidden to continue to use it. It is forbidden to
dump at will to pollute the environment; or put it at will, etc.
It should be handed over to a qualified recycling unit for
proper disposal.
●The M125/350 steps are similar to the M310, taking the
M310 as an example.
Release brake fluid
a. Refer to the previous steps to remove the oil pan first,
place the oil pan at the front and rear calipers, remove the
disc brake oil pipe bolts and copper pads first, and drain the

172 / 223
 a. Locate the plug of the wheel speed sensor on the left
side of the frame, and pull out the plug after pressing the
anti-release card.
b. For the removal method of FC-HU and wheel speed
sensor caliper, please refer to the section “Removing the
front disc brake caliper”.
c. Cut off the 2 cable ties⑴, remove the 3 wire ties⑺, and
remove the wheel speed sensor wire⑹. Check whether the
cable is damaged. If the cable sheath is frayed, wrap it with
electrical tape to avoid short-circuit and cause vehicle failure.
M350
The front wheel speed sensor is also responsible for
FMC-HU: Front disc brake main pump-hydraulic control unit
FC-HU: Front disc brake caliper-hydraulic control unit providing a speed signal to the meter to display the speed
RMC-HU: Rear disc brake main pump-hydraulic control unit per hour.
RC-HU: Rear disc brake caliper-hydraulic control unit Use an 8# sleeve to remove the bolt⑵, and take off the
Use oil-resistant plastic bag or plastic film to put it around FC-HU hose.
the bottom of the hydraulic control unit, and fix it with tape If you need to remove the hose bracket⑷, you can use 4#
to prevent the residual brake fluid from dripping on the parts inner hexagon to remove the bolt⑶ and then take it off. If
when the oil pipe nut joint is loosened. M310 use a 12# you only remove the hose, you can skip this step.
open-end wrench to loosen the oil pipe nut joints at the
hydraulic control unit counterclockwise, M350 use 14# open-
end wrench. M125/310 the nut torque: 18N.m (1.8 kgf.m, 13
lbf. ft).M350 the bolts torque: 21N.m (2.1 kgf.m, 15 lbf. ft).
Wipe up the remaining brake fluid with a clean non-woven
fabric. Take care to take protective measures and prevent
dripping onto the cover or cable connector.
FMC-HU and RMC-HU
Use an 8# sleeve to remove the bolt⑴ that fixes the seat
of the oil pipe, pull down the upper part of the FMC-HU hose, d. Check whether the surface of the removed hose is
pull it out from the lower part of the direction cover, and aging, cracked, damaged, abraded, etc. Wipe up the
then pull it out from the hose bracket. Check whether the remaining brake fluid with a non-woven cloth, and then wrap
surface of the removed hose is aging, cracked, damaged, the ends of the hose with cling film or a plastic bag to
abraded, etc. Wipe up the remaining brake fluid with a non- prevent foreign matter from entering. Check whether the
woven cloth, and then wrap the ends of the hose with cling cable sheath of the wheel speed sensor cable is damaged. If
film or a plastic bag to prevent foreign matter from entering. the sheath is frayed, it can be glued with electrical tape to
Remove and inspect the RMC-HU hose in the same way. prevent short-circuit.
RC-HU and wheel speed sensor (rear wheel)
a. Find 3 cable ties on the frame tube above the fuel tank
on the right side of the frame, and cut the cable ties⑴ that
bind the RC-HU hose in the middle. Do not cut the other 2
cables. When reinstalling, make sure that the cable tie
cannot be tied too tightly, and a certain gap should be left.

FC-HU and wheel speed sensor (front wheel)

b. Find the plug of the wheel speed sensor⑵ on the right

side of the middle part and unplug it.

173 / 223
 e. Pull out the RC-HU hose and wheel speed sensor wire
from the rear inner mud plate.

c. First remove the 3 pieces of wire clamp⑷, and then pull

out the wheel speed sensor⑵ and the RC-HU hose from the
f. Pull out the wheel speed sensor from the clamp⑸,
4 pieces of oil pipe clamp⑶. If you need to remove the
remove the bolt⑹ with a 4# inner hexagon, and then
tubing clamp (3), you can use 4# inner hexagon to remove
the bolts and then you can take it off. remove the wheel speed sensor from the car. If you need to
remove the clamp⑸, you can use 4# inner hexagon to
remove the bolt⑹ that fixes the clamp.

d. Pull the RC-HU head out of the gap between the

g. Check whether the surface of the removed hose is
auxiliary water tank and the frame.
aging, cracked, damaged, abraded, etc. Wipe up the
remaining brake fluid with a non-woven cloth, and then wrap
the ends of the hose with cling film or a plastic bag to
prevent foreign matter from entering. Check whether the
cable sheath of the wheel speed sensor cable is damaged. If
the sheath is frayed, it can be glued with electrical tape to
prevent short-circuit.

174 / 223
ABS system layout

1-Front and rear wheel speed sensor 2-ABS hydraulic control unit 3-OBD diagnostic interface
ABS hydraulic control unit control unit. In order to facilitate the disassembly, the 2 bolts
need to be installed back.
Caution:
●Before disassembling the hydraulic control unit, the
positive and negative electrodes of the battery must be
disassembled to prevent damage to electrical components
caused by misoperation.
●Brake fluid is toxic, so it needs to be protected. For specific
precautions, please refer to the pre-service instructions.
●Be careful not to bend or bend when disassembling the
brake hose connector. The cable connector has an anti-trip
buckle and cannot be pulled out forcibly. After removing the
hose, prevent foreign matter from entering.
●Before reassembling the hose connector at the hydraulic
control unit, apply a small amount of brake fluid to the
c. Refer to the previous steps to release the brake fluid,
thread.
remove the 4 hose connectors and unplug the cable
●After replacing the new hydraulic control unit, you need to
connectors.
refill the brake fluid and exhaust the air to ensure that the
brakes are restored to normal before driving the vehicle.
Disassemble
a. Refer to the steps to remove the cover and remove it to
the figure first.

M310

b. Use a 8# sleeve to remove 2 bolts (1) Remove the water

tank filler bracket assembly to expose the ABS hydraulic

175 / 223
 M125

M350
d. Remove the 2 bolts that were put back in the front (1)
Remove the hydraulic control unit and bracket assembly
from the car.

e. After holding the hydraulic control unit firmly, use 4#

inner hexagon to remove the M6×16 bolts⑵, then the
hydraulic control unit can be removed. If you need to replace
the bracket⑷, you need to remove the flanging bushing and
the cushion rubber⑹.

176 / 223
 ABS brake system troubleshooting process
Restart the power supply, and the
whole vehicle is energized
ABS troubleshooting

The ABS indicator on When the vehicle is powered on, the ABS indicator on the
The ABS indicator light on
the meter does not meter flashes continuously for 30 seconds, the indicator light
the meter lights up
light up is always on

Press the ABS switch on the left Push the

Check the internal
Check the cable deputy handle switch, the switch is motorcycle, Speed
circuit of the meter
invalid. >5Km/h

Replace the left deputy ABS indicator ABS indicator is

handle switch light goes out still on

177 / 223
During driving, the ABS indicator flashes Check whether ABS
While riding, the ABS indicator light is During driving, the ABS indicator light is Check if the
(approximately 1 second/time), and the ABS the ABS diagnosis
dimly lit, and the ABS works normally always on and the ABS function is invalid fuse is blown
function is invalid controller scanner
connector is detects error
reliably connected codes
Check whether the Check if the ABS
Check Check if front and rear Check if the contacts of ABS button
bolt of the circuit is diagnosis Check whether
whether the wheel speed sensor the front and rear wheel on left sub
negative wire of damaged, open scanner there is a broken
cable ground contacts are adsorbing speed sensor are broken switch not
the engine motor circuit, short detects error wire or short
wire is tight iron filings or damaged well
is tight circuit codes circuit in the If loose
connected,
circuit, and then
change left
replace the fuse
sub switch
If loose If loose If yes If damaged If yes

Reconnect

Tighten the Tighten the Remove iron Replace wheel

Repair cable
bolts bolts filings speed sensor
 Trouble shooting process with portable ABS diagnostic scanner

Open the right storage box The vehicle is electrified and Choose "TAYO
Select "Diagnosis"
cover and remove the right enters diagrnostic mode Motorcycle"
storage box cover. Connect
the diagnostic instrument
through OBDⅡ interface
Select "BOSCH ABS"

Select "Data Check Select "Clear Trouble

Analysis" whether the Code"
Select "Read
Trouble Code" front wheel
Push the motorcycle, check the wheel speed sensor is
of the front and rear wheels with a damaged or
the connector Unplug the diagnostic
Read current error Read historical diagnostic instrument
is loose device, restart the
code error codes power supply of the
vehicle, ride normally
and use the brakes (the
No front wheel speed

Read wheel speed Check

ABS control display whether the maximum speed
historical Is there an
system is

No
No
should preferably

No
error error code? There exists rear wheel

178 / 223
normal error code sensor is exceed 100km/h
codes
(62mph), no need to
No rear

damaged or
wheel speed

the connector brake at the maximum

Yes
speed)

Yes
is loose

Press ENTER to
Press “ENTER” to Record
enter, view the
enter, view the error code error code
error code
M310 Troubleshooting process with portable ABS diagnostic scanner

Error Code Explanation Error Code Explanation

5043H Front wheel speed sensor disconnected/ground short circuit/power supply short circuit 5017H Front wheel inlet valve (EV valve) failure
5042H Front wheel speed sensor failure---unstable signal 5018H Front wheel drain valve (AV valve) failure
5045H Rear wheel speed sensor disconnected/ground short circuit/power supply short circuit 5013H Rear wheel inlet valve (EV valve) failure
5044H The rear wheel speed sensor is faulty---the signal is unstable 5014H Rear wheel drain valve (AV valve) failure
5025H There is a deviation in front and rear wheel speeds 5035H Motor failure
5052H Power supply failure (low voltage) 5019H Valve relay failure (relay that guarantees fail-safety)
5053H Power supply failure 5055H ECU failure
5223 EEPROM is out of range 5122H EEPROM read failure
 9. Battery/charging system
Know Before Service
1. It is necessary to properly dispose of discarded batteries to avoid pollution to the environment. It is recommended that waste
batteries be returned to a professional recycling agency for recycling.
2. It is forbidden to use chargers that have not passed the inspection to charge the battery.
3. The EFI system needs to be reset when the battery is reinstalled, the power is suddenly cut off during driving, the idling speed
is abnormal, and the insurance is re-plugged. The specific method is as follows:
a. Unlock the vehicle and support the main bracket;
b. Pinch the brake and start the vehicle;
c. Pull the engine speed above 3000 rpm;
d. After releasing the throttle, turn off the flameout switch and lock the car;
e. After waiting for 5 seconds, unlock the vehicle again to complete the reset of the EFI system.
4. The vehicle should be powered off before disassembling the battery.
5. Before troubleshooting the charging system, check whether the battery is in normal use and maintenance. Check with the
owner whether you often use high-power electrical appliances, or do not drive a motorcycle for a long time, or turn on the lights
for a long time without starting the vehicle.

●When the engine cannot be started, do not press the electric start button frequently. Frequent operation can cause
overheating or damage to the starter motor, flooding of the tank, and battery feed.
●When the vehicle is energized, connecting or unplugging the plug may cause damage to some electrical components.
●Overcharge or undercharge, or long-term discharge may cause damage to the battery.

179 / 223
Troubleshooting
Battery damage or attenuation troubleshooting process

Battery failure

Y
Use a
Measure the
multimeter to
battery voltage
Remove the battery and check whether Battery
first, then
use a battery tester to there is leakage, Check the voltage<charging
Y Y measure the
check the battery the leakage charging voltage voltage<14.5～14.9
charging voltage
performance current should V
after starting the
be less than
engine
0.3mA
N
N
N
Unplug the 3P
(yellow) plug of
Battery failure Check the magneto
the rectifier and
recheck whether Y Rectifier failure
the leakage
current is below
0.3mA
Measure the
magneto 3P plug, the
N resistance of any 2
Magneto coil
N
failure pins should be
Faucet lock 0.55～0.85Ω (25℃/
failure or short 77°F)
circuit
Y

Measure whether the

voltage of the red
wire and green wire
Rectifier failure Y
of the magneto is
normal, and whether
the plug is loose

Check whether the whole vehicle

circuit is accessible, whether the plug
is loose or poorly connected, whether it
is short-circuited

180 / 223
Charging system layout diagram

1-Charging port (PKE) 2-Main fuse (25A) 3-Battery 4-Magnetic motor 5-Rectifier
Electrical schematic diagram

Letter G R Y
Chinese green Red yellow
English Green Red Yellow

Battery disassembly ●The whole vehicle must be powered off before

disassembling the battery.
1. Disassembly ●The negative pole must be removed first, and then the
Refer to the steps “a” to “d” in the section "Removing the positive pole. The opposite is true when installing.
stepper motor and cleaning the carbon deposit" in the ●The positive and negative electrode protective caps must
section "Throttle valve body" in the "Maintenance" chapter be covered when reinstalling.
of this manual to remove the battery. ●After removing the battery, reset the meter time and reset
Caution: the EFI system.

181 / 223
●The M125/350 steps are similar to the M310, taking the c. Measure whether the leakage current is below 0.3mA. If
M310 as an example. it exceeds the standard value, check whether the circuit has
2. Check a short circuit.
Open the seat cushion, remove the battery cover and 2. Check the charging voltage
remove the protective caps of the positive and negative Caution:
electrodes, and use a multimeter to measure the battery ●Before testing, make sure the battery is in good condition.
voltage. Note that the vehicle should be turned off before ●Do not disconnect the battery or any electrical devices
measuring the voltage. before the whole vehicle is powered off.
domestic: a. First warm up the engine to normal operating
temperature, and then turn off the engine.
b. Connect the red test lead of the multimeter to the
positive electrode of the battery and the black test lead to
the negative electrode directly. Adjust the multimeter to the
20V DC voltage range. Turn on the high beam of the
headlights and start the engine. Measure the charging
voltage when the engine speed is 5000 rpm.
standard:
Battery voltage<Charging voltage<15.5V
foreign:
3. Inspection of magneto stator charging coil
a. Remove the storage box, find the yellow 3P plug of the
rectifier above the frame tube on the left side of the rear of
the frame and unplug it.

Full voltage 13.1～13.3V

Charging voltage
required for ≤12.8V
Voltage
unloaded car
Charging voltage
≤12V
required for loading
Caution:
●The battery that has just been charged should be placed for
about 30 minutes before measuring. The voltage of the
battery that has just been charged will fluctuate.
3. Charging
If the battery cannot be started due to insufficient power,
it can be charged with the charger provided with the car.
Open the right storage box cover and remove the cover to
see the DC charging port that comes with PKE. M125/310 the b. Check whether the plug is loose or corroded.
battery can be charged after unplugging the PKE fuse. For c. Use the resistance profile of a multimeter to measure
specific steps, please refer to the section "Checking the the resistance of any two wires of the black 3P plug. The
battery voltage" in the chapter "Inspection of sound, light, standard is 0.55～0.85Ω (25℃/77°F).
and electrical devices" in the chapter "Maintenance", or the
instructions delivered with the car.
Charging system check
1. Leakage test
a. Turn off the vehicle and cut off the power supply, and
remove the negative wire of the battery.
b. Adjust the multimeter to the current position. Connect
the black test lead to the negative terminal of the battery
and the red test lead to the removed negative wire. Pay d. After unplugging the yellow 3P plug, measure the red
attention to first adjust the current to the high gear, and positive wire and green negative wire with a multimeter, and
then gradually reduce to the appropriate gear. the battery voltage should be measured. Use the buzzer file
of the multimeter to check whether the green negative wire

182 / 223
and the ground wire (the ground wire can be found in any Vehicles produced after May 25, 2022: Use a 10# Torx
stud directly connected to the frame) are always conducting. wrench to fix the M6 nut above, and use an 8# socket to
Remove the rectifier remove the M6×22 bolt at the bottom. Note that there are
two bushings between the rectifier and the front of the rear
a. Follow the steps to remove the storage box after fender.
removing it first. Unplug the two plugs of the rectifier and cut
off the cable tie (1).

b. Refer to the steps of removing the armrests and rear

skirts to remove them first. Vehicles produced before mid-
August 2022 .remove the bolts⑵ fixing the rear fender on
both sides with 5# inner hexagon respectively, and remove
the bush⑷ and the rubber pad⑷. After that, remove the
M6×14 bolts with 4# inner hexagon.

d. Pull down the rectifier and pull the cable out of the hole
in the front of the rear mud board. Remove the rectifier from
the car. When pulling out the cable, be careful not to pull it
forcibly to avoid damaging the plug or pulling off the wire.
After that, remove the M6×14 with 4# inner hexagon

c. Vehicles manufactured before May 25, 2022:

Remove 2 bolts (5) from the bottom with 8# short sleeve,
and then pull down the rectifier and rear fender assembly to
a certain distance to facilitate the extraction of the rectifier
cable.

183 / 223
 10. Front fork assembly
Know Before Service
1. Use good quality tools, or special tools and fixtures designed by our company. The use of inferior tools may cause damage to
parts, peeling of plating, improper assembly, etc.
2. The O-rings, paper gaskets, copper gaskets, and component seals used for sealing must be replaced before assembly.
3. Fasteners with torque requirements need to use a torque wrench to check the torque; if the torque is not required, refer to
the general torque value recommended by general fasteners.
4. Clean up before assembly; after assembly, check whether the assembly is correct and in place.
5. The vehicle should be parked in a balanced manner and pay attention to safety during disassembly and assembly. Including
but not limited to the use of electric tools, hand tools, pneumatic tools, hydraulic tools, handling; prevent contact with skin,
eyes, burns, etc.
6. The replaced oils, liquids, batteries, etc. must be recycled and handed over to a qualified organization for disposal; it is
forbidden to dump them at will to pollute the environment or water sources.
7. Swallowing or inhaling coolant, brake fluid, etc. will cause certain harm to the human body. Any exposed skin such as hands
and face should be cleaned thoroughly after each addition. If swallowed by mistake, immediately contact the poison control
center or hospital; if inhaled, immediately go to a ventilated environment. If it accidentally splashes into the eyes, immediately
rinse the eyes with a large amount of running water and seek medical advice or consultation in time. Keep away from children
and pets.
8. When replacing the front wheels, jacks or similar devices are needed to support the entire vehicle.
9. Contaminated disc brake discs and disc brake pads will reduce the braking effect. Please replace with new disc brake discs and
clean the contaminated brake discs.
10. When the front wheel is removed, please do not operate the brake handle.
11. After the front wheel is installed, please press the brake handle repeatedly until the brake restores the braking effect.

Only part of the basic requirements for matters needing attention, prevention of accidental injury, etc. can be listed; it is not
possible to list all situations in detail. Be vigilant during disassembly and assembly to prevent accidents.

184 / 223
Exploded view of front fork components:
M125/310 Directional exploded view

185 / 223
M350 Directional exploded view

186 / 223
M125(2024)

187 / 223
Front fork exploded view
M125/310
The M125 are similar to the M310, taking the M310 as an example.

188 / 223
M350

189 / 223
Exploded view of lower link board
M125/310
The M125 are similar to the M310, taking the M310 as an example.

190 / 223
M125 2024 version

191 / 223
M350

192 / 223
Change the direction of the handle
Caution:
●When removing the disc brake oil cup, it must be vertically
upward to prevent air from entering the brake pipeline.
●When disassembling and assembling the handle switch, pay
attention to adjusting the internal wiring harness of the
switch to avoid damage to the wire skin caused by the shell
or bolt column.
●The M125/350 steps are similar to the M310, taking the
M310 as an example. b. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove the bolt (maded before
1. Remove the direction of the handle April 11,2023 is M6×14, after is M6×12) ; then use 6# inner
a. Hold the middle cover in the direction with your hands, hexagon to remove 4 M8×30 bolts, remove 2 pressure blocks,
and pull out the middle cover in the direction of the arrow. and take out the direction handle assembly.

b. Use a cross screw to remove the two self-tapping screws c. Use 5# inner hexagon to remove the bolts a and b that
at the lower cover, and use a straight screw to pry off the come with the right-hand handle under the switch, and then
buckles at① and②. use the cross-batch to remove the bolts c, and separate the
upper and lower parts of the right-hand handle.

c. Use a single word batch to pick up the 3 buckles③, ④,

⑤ of the upper cover from the hole of the middle cover in d. Remove the bolts a and b under the left-hand handle
the direction, grasp the direction near the side of the seat switch with a 5# inner hexagon, and then remove the bolts c
with a cross-batch, and separate the upper and lower parts of
cushion, and remove the upper cover⑶ in the direction of
the left-hand switch.
the arrow. The direction of the upper cover⑶.

e. Use the 5# inner hexagon to loosen the M6×80 bolts of

the balance weight on the right side counterclockwise for 5
turns. Be careful not to screw too many turns, otherwise the
2. Remove the components nut that comes with the balance weight will fall to the
a. Use 5# inner hexagon to remove 4 M6×30 bolts⑵, and direction, which will increase the difficulty of dismantling the
remove the left auxiliary handle switch, the rear disc brake balance weight inside. Put the 5# hexagon socket on the
main pump, the right auxiliary handle switch, and the front head of the bolt, and then tap the M6×80 bolt inward with a
disc brake main pump. rubber hammer to loosen the buffer rubber and nut of the
193 / 223
balance block to facilitate the removal of the balance d. Snap the upper brackets⑦,⑧, and⑨ into the lower
assembly. Grasp the balance block and pull it out while part of the direction control cover, buckle the pressure block,
shaking it up and down, left and right. Use the same method tighten 4 M8×30 bolts with 6# inner hexagon, and use 5#
to pull out the left balance weight, soak in hot water for inner hexagon to fix 1 non-standard M6 Tighten the ×16 bolt
about 10 minutes before using Blow the dust gun into the ⑶, be careful not to miss the bushing⑸ and cushion rubber
gap between the left hand handle and the direction handle ⑹; then use a 5# inner hexagon to install a non-standard
tube according to the arrow, then pull the direction handle
M6×16 bolt⑶ + spring washer⑷ to fix the mobile phone
and the left hand handle in the opposite direction, and then
bracket installation bracket.
take out the left hand handle rubber case.
Right:

4. Installation of the direction handle cover

Left: a. When installing the upper cover in the direction, first
install the upper cover in the appropriate position, first
buckle the buckles a, b, and c on the front of the upper cover
in the direction, and then buckle the back buckles③,④,⑤
and The buckles① and② on both sides should be fastened.
After installation, the upper cover should be tightly fitted
with the lower cover, and the gap should be even. Finally,
tighten the 2 self-tapping screws at the lower cover (1) with a
3. Installation of the direction component flat-head screwdriver.
a. Apply 263 thread fastening glue to the inner wall of the
rubber sleeve in the left hand, and the length of the glue is
1/3 of the rubber sleeve of the handle, and then put the
rubber in the left hand into the direction handle; the inner
wall of the rubber sleeve in the right hand does not need to
be coated with the thread fastening glue. Just load it. Be
careful not to remove the throttle cable on the rubber sleeve
with your right hand. Reinstall the left and right balance
b. Finally, put the direction back on the middle cover.
weights according to the disassembly steps, and tighten the
M6×80 bolt with a 5# inner hexagon.
b. When installing the left and right handle switches, you
need to align the cross screrws with the positioning holes⑥ ●Attention should be paid when disassembling the direction
and then tighten them with a cross screw. Use a 5# inner handle cover to prevent damage to the buckle.
hexagon to tighten the other bolts. ●After installation, check whether the throttle cable is
assembled in place and whether the return position is
flexible.
●Self-tapping screws need to be installed vertically and the
torque cannot be too large.
●After installation, check the switch buttons of the left and
right handle switches and the left and right auxiliary handle
switches to check whether they can be used normally, and
c. When installing the auxiliary handle switch, align the check whether there is a pressure line.
joint surface of the auxiliary handle switch and the main
pump of the disc brake with the triangle mark on the handle
switch, and then tighten the 4 M6×30 bolts with a 5# inner
hexagon.

194 / 223
Replace the front wheel
Caution:
●Be careful not to damage the ABS coil when disassembling. ●After the front wheel is installed, please press the brake
●After removing the front wheel, do not press the brake handle repeatedly until the brake restores the braking effect.
handle. ●Contaminated disc brake discs and disc brake pads will
●The vehicle must be parked on a flat and stable ground or a reduce the braking effect. Please replace with new disc brake
lifting platform. discs and clean the contaminated brake discs.
●It is forbidden to use a high-pressure water gun to flush
against the oil seal at close range.
●The M125/350 steps are similar to the M310, taking the ●After each front wheel replacement, you must go to a
M310 as an example. professional organization for dynamic balance testing.
1. Remove the front wheel assembly ●Because the tire self-refilling may block the air hole of the
a. Lay down the main support, and then use a jack or a tire pressure monitoring sensor, causing difficulty in inflation
suitable device to support the whole vehicle to keep the front or failure of the tire pressure monitoring, it should not be
wheels off the ground. used.
b. Use 6# inner hexagon to loosen the two M8×35 bolts at
the front left shock absorber (1), then use 17# inner hexagon
to remove the front wheel shaft (2), and remove the front
wheel and 2 bushings.

2. Install the front wheel assembly

a. Separate the two brake pads in the brake caliper with a
single-size batch. If the resistance is too large and the two
brake pads cannot be separated, please refer to the method
of "Adding Brake Fluid" to remove the upper cover of the disc
brake oil cup and then separate it. 2 brake pads.
b. Put the front wheel in the middle of the front shock
absorber, shake the front wheel left and right to make the
disc brake disc snap into the middle of the brake pad, align
the shaft hole, insert the front wheel shaft⑵, tighten the
front wheel shaft with 17# inner hexagon, torque: 50N. m
(5.1 kgf.m, 37 lbf.ft), after the front wheel axle is tightened,
there is a gap of about 2.5mm between the left side bushing
of the front wheel and the shock absorber; use 6# inner
hexagon to tighten the two front left shock absorbers M8×35
bolt⑴, torque: 20N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 15 lbf.ft).

195 / 223
Front wheel assembly exploded view：
M310

NO. Part name QTY Caution

1 Oil seal TC φ28×φ42×7 2
2 GB276 bearing 6004-2RS-C3 2 φ20×φ42×12
3 Sleeve 1
4 Tire pressure sensor 1
5 ABS sensor gear（55T） 1
6 Non-standard bolt M8×25 10 25 N.m(2.5 kgf.m，18 lbf.ft)
7 265×4.5 brake disc 1
M125

NO. Part name QTY Caution

1 Oil seal TC φ28×φ42×7 2
2 GB276 bearing 6004-2RS-C3 2 φ20×φ42×12
3 Sleeve 1
4 Tire pressure sensor 1
5 ABS sensor gear（55T） 1
6 265×4.5 brake disc 1
7 Non-standard bolt M8×25 5 25 N.m(2.5 kgf.m，18 lbf.ft)
8 GB12615 φ3.2×9 5

196 / 223
M350

NO. Part name QTY Caution

1 Oil seal TC φ28×φ42×7 2
2 GB276 bearing 6004-2RS-C3 2 φ20×φ42×12
3 Sleeve 1
4 Tire pressure sensor 1
5 ABS sensor gear（55T） 1
6 265×4.5 brake disc 1
7 Non-standard bolt M8×25 5 25 N.m(2.5 kgf.m，18 lbf.ft)
8 GB12615 φ3.2×9 5

Inspection and maintenance of front wheel assembly： 1.2 Disc brake Replacement method
Caution: a. Refer to "Replace the front wheel" Remove the front
●This inspection should be completed by a qualified wheel assembly.
maintenance organization. b. Use 6# hex socket to remove 5 M8×25 bolts and remove
●Do not press the brake handle after the front wheel is the damaged disc brake disc.
disassembled c. After reinstalling the new disc brake disc, use 5# inner
●Be careful not to damage the ABS coil when disassembling. hexagon to tighten 5 M8×25 bolts. Torque: 25N.m (2.5 kgf.m,
●The vehicle must be parked on a flat and stable ground or a 18 lbf. ft). The M125 front disc brake disc is a floating disc,
lifting platform and the ABS gear ring is connected to the disc brake disc
●It is forbidden to use a high-pressure water gun to flush body by rivets. If you only need to replace the disc brake disc,
against the oil seal at close range. you need to use a grinding pen to polish off the rivet bulge
1. Disc brake and then remove the gear ring first. The rivets must be made
of stainless steel, not aluminum.
1.1 The service life of the disc brake disc d. Reinstall the front wheel assembly.
Under normal circumstances, the replacement mileage of
2. Front wheel oil seals and bearings
the brake disc is about 40,000 kilometers. The replacement
mileage is not absolute. It needs to be determined according 2.1 Service life of front wheel oil seals and
to the owner's travel habits (whether you like sudden bearings
braking), road conditions, maintenance intervals and other Under normal circumstances, the bearings and oil seals in
factors, but if the following three conditions are reached If the front axles need to be inspected within 50,000
any of them, they must be replaced. kilometers, but the bearings and oil seals in the front axles
a. Use a vernier caliper to measure the thickness of the need to be inspected according to the actual conditions of
disc brake disc less than 4.mm (0.16 in). the vehicle’s driving conditions and the size of the load. Into
b. Hang the front wheel in the air, observe from the front the oil seal and bearing, the fine dust in the water will
that the disc brake disc swings when the front wheel rotates, accelerate the wear between the bearing and the oil seal. At
and the disc brake disc deformation is detected. the same time, the mixed friction of water and grease
c. Touch the surface of the disc brake disc with your hands becomes an emulsion and loses the original lubricating effect.
to detect obvious pits, visually inspect for deep scratches and This also shortens the service life between the oil seal and
grooves.

197 / 223
the bearing. When the following conditions occur, the front the wheel may not be very uniform. When the wheel rotates
wheel oil seals and bearings should be checked in advance at a high speed, it will form a dynamic imbalance state,
a. Abnormal front wheel noise when riding. causing wheel jitter during driving. The direction of the
b. When the direction bar shakes left and right when shaking phenomenon, in order to avoid this phenomenon or
riding. eliminate the phenomenon that has occurred, it is necessary
2.2 Replacement method of front wheel oil seal to make the wheel in a dynamic situation by increasing the
counterweight method to make the wheel correct the
and bearing
balance of each edge part, this correction process Is what we
a. Remove the front wheel assembly by referring to
call dynamic balance.
"Replace the front wheel". The dynamic balance particles of the wheels can ensure
b. Use a flat-headed batch to lift out the oil seals on the that the wheels are more stable when rotating, reduce
left and right sides of the front wheel, check whether the oil vibration and shaking, improve the stability and comfort of
seals are damaged or deformed, check whether the outer the vehicle, and are conducive to safe driving.
ring of the bearing fits tightly with the rim, and if there is no a. Please go to a professionally qualified organization to
abnormality, turn the inner ring of the bearing by hand to test the dynamic balance after each replacement of the front
check whether the bearing rotates smoothly and if there is a and rear wheels.
jam. If it is astringent or abnormal sound, the front wheel b. The balance weight must be attached to the designated
bearing and oil seal need to be replaced. plane (red area) of the rim.
c. The replacement of the front wheel oil seals and
bearings must be completed by a professional maintenance
organization.
d. If there is no problem in the inspection, apply an
appropriate amount of lubricating grease on the front wheel
bearing, and then press-fit the oil seal to the original position
with a suitable size iron rod and rubber hammer.
e. Reinstall the front wheel assembly.
3. Front wheel rims and tires
3.1 The service life of the front wheel rim and tire M125/310 replacement of the front shock
Generally speaking, rims do not have the limit of service absorber
life and kilometers, but if the following situations occur, the Caution:
rims must be replaced. ●After the front wheel is disassembled, please do not press
a. The rim is deformed or warped. the brake handle.
b. Cracks or breaks in the rim ●Be careful not to damage the ABS coil when disassembling.
Under normal conditions, the front tires can be used for ●When disassembling the front fender, be careful not to
about 20,000 kilometers. Normal conditions mean that the scratch the shock absorber or the front fender.
road conditions are not bad and there is no tyre puncture. ●When removing the shock absorber, first remove the 2
Because the tires are made of rubber, there will be aging. bolts that fix the same shock absorber, remove one side of
Generally, the tires need to be replaced in about 4 years. If the shock absorber, and then remove the other side.
you don't change it, you need to check frequently to check ●The M125 steps are similar to the M310, taking the M310 as
the tire aging and whether there are cracks in the tire. If the an example.
following conditions occur, the tires must be replaced. 1. Disassemble the front wheel and front fender
a. The tire has been repaired many times.
b. When the tire tread wear reaches the limit position of
assembly
the design. a. Refer to "Replace the front wheel" to remove the front
c. There are many aging cracks in the tire. wheel.
3.2 How to replace the front wheel rim and tire b.Use 5# inner hexagon to remove one M6×30 bolt⑴, and
a. Refer to "Replace the front wheel" to remove the front take out the pipe clamp. Then use a 14# sleeve to remove
wheel assembly. two M8×37 bolts (2), and remove the front brake caliper.
b. Take the removed front wheel assembly to a
professional organization and use a tyre raking machine to
take out the tires.
c. Use a lifter to assemble new rims or new tires. And the
front tire pressure is charged to the standard value. M310
front tire pressure: 260kPa (37.7 PSI), M125: 220kPa (32
PSI),M350: 240kPa (35 PSI).
d. Put the assembled front wheel assembly back on the
vehicle.
3.3 Dynamic balance
The wheel is a whole composed of tires and rims. Due to
manufacturing reasons, the mass distribution of each part of
198 / 223
 c.Use 4# inner hexagon to remove the two M6×14 bolts⑶
on the left and right sides of the front fender; then use 5#
inner hexagon to remove one M6×30 bolt, take out the
gasket.

b. Use the same method to install another shock absorber.

c. Pick up the front wheel and install the bushing, align the
mounting holes between the two shock absorbers, penetrate
the front wheel axle, and tighten the front wheel axle with a
17# inner hexagon. Torque: 50N.m (5.1 kgf.m, 37 lbf.ft). If
d.First press the two sides of the front mud board one of the shock absorbers is not installed in place, the front
according to the small arrow, press the protrusion on the axle will not be tightened or can not be inserted into the right
front mud board arrow inward, and then move the front mud shock absorber. You need to remove the shock absorber that
board up to a suitable position and then pull it out in the is not in place and install it in place.
direction of the big arrow. d. After installing the front wheel, use the 6# inner
hexagon to tighten the two M8×35 bolts at the bottom of the
left front shock absorber, torque: 20N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 15 lbf.ft).
e. First use a single batch to separate the two brake pads
inside the brake caliper. If the resistance is too large and the
two brake pads cannot be separated, please refer to the
method of "Adding Brake Fluid" to remove the upper cover of
the disc brake oil cup and then separate it. 2 brake pads,
align the gap between the 2 brake pads in the disc brake
caliper with the brake disc on the front wheel and install it.
Then use a 14# sleeve to tighten two M8×37 bolts (2),
2. Remove the left and right front shock absorbers torque: 24N.m (2.5 kgf.m, 18 lbf.ft).
a. Use a 14# sleeve to remove the 4 M10×1.5×43 bolts, pry f. Press the position held when the front mud plate is
open the gap on the lower link plate with a straight batch, removed, pass through the appropriate position in the
and remove the front left shock absorber and the front right middle of the shock absorber, and install it to the
shock absorber. corresponding position, use the 4# inner hexagon to reinstall
the 2 M6×12 bolts (3), do not miss the installation of the
lining Set⑷, and cushion rubber⑸. Then use the 5# inner
hexagon to reinstall the two M6×30 bolts⑴, Caution: the
left M6×30 bolt⑴ needs to have a spring washer⑹.

●The vehicle must be parked on a level and stable ground or

on a lifting platform.
●After the front wheel is installed, please press the brake
handle repeatedly until the brake restores the braking effect.
3. Reinstall the shock absorber, front fender, front M350 replacement of the front shock
wheel and other components
absorber
a. Pry a gap on the lower connecting plate with a flat-
headed batch, insert the corresponding shock absorber, 1. Disassemble the front wheel and front
install the shock-absorbing in place, take the next batch, fender assembly
screw in two M10×1.5×43 bolts, use a 14# sleeve Tighten two a. Remove the front wheel by referring to Replacing the
M10×1.5×43 bolts, torque: 55N.m (5.6 kgf.m, 41 lbf.ft). Front Wheel.
b. Remove one M6x14 shaft shoulder bolt using the 4# hex
socket. Remove one M6x30 bolt using the 5# hex socket and
remove the pipe clamp. Remove the two M10 x 1.5 x 60 bolts
using the 8# hex. Remove the front brake caliper from the
shock absorber bottom barrel. Remove one M6x12 bolt using
a 4# hex socket.

199 / 223
 screwdriver to pry open the gap on the upper connection
board.

c. Remove the two M6x14 shaft shoulder bolts on the left c. Use a 6# hex to remove the four bolts of the M8x35, pry
and right sides of the front clay plate using the 4# hex socket; open the gaps in the lower connection plate with a flat-head
Then remove one M6x30 bolt with the 5# hex socket and screwdriver, and remove the left front shock absorber and
take out the gasket. the right front shock absorber.

d. Press both sides of the front clay tablet according to the

small arrows and push the bulge at the arrows inward. Then
3. Reinstall the shock absorber, front fender, front
move the front clay tablet upwards to the appropriate wheel and other components
position and pull it out in the direction of the large arrows. a. Use a flat-head screwdriver to pry open a gap on the
connection plate and insert corresponding shock absorber.

2. Remove the left and right front shock absorbers

a. Open the lid of both storage boxes. Remove twoM6x14 b. Use a flat-head screwdriver to pry open a gap in the
shaft shoulder bolts above the right storage box with 4# hex, upper connection plate and insert the corresponding shock
one M6×16 bolt below it and one expansion. Pull the storage absorber into the gap. Ensure that the upper end face of the
box cover assembly out for a certain distance, and then pull shock absorber is flush with the upper end face of the upper
out the inductive antenna plug on the back of the arrow. connection plate. Remove the flat-head screwdriver after
Remove the left storage box assembly in the same way, and installing the shock absorber in place. Screw in M8x35 bolts
unplug the USB charging cable. and tighten with 6# hex. Torque: 25N.m(2.6kg f.m,18 lbf.ft).

c. Install the two M8x35 bolts to lower connection plate

and install the other shock absorber in the same way.
d. Pick up the front wheel, install the bushing, align the
mounting holes between the two shock absorbations, Pierce
b. Turn the direction to the far left and use the 6# hex to the front axle, use 17# hex to tighten the front axle, torque
remove the M8x35 bolt. In the same way, turn the direction force: 50N.m (5. 1kgf.m, 37 lbf.ft).If one of the shock
to the far right and remove the bolt. Use a flat-head absorbers is not installed in place, the front axle will not be
200 / 223
tightened or cannot be penetrated into the right shock
absorbers. Remove the shock absorbers that are not installed
in place and install them in place.
e. After the front wheel is installed, use 6# hex to tighten
the two M8×35 bolts at the lower part of the left front shock
absorption, and the torque force is 20N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 15 lbf.
ft).
f. Use a slotted screwdriver to separate the brake pads
inside the brake caliper. If the resistance is too great to
separate the two brake pads, remove the upper cover of the
disc brake oil cup and then separate the two brake pads.
c. Extend the 10# torx wrench from the gap in the storage
Align the gap between the two brake pads in the disc brake
box, remove the two M6×20 bolts on the faucet lock support,
caliper with the brake disc on the front wheel before
remove the faucet lock and faucet lock support, no need to
installing. Then use 8# hex to tighten 2 M10×1.5×60 bolts,
connect the faucet lock and the faucet Remove the lock and
torsion force: 45 ~ 50N.m(4.6 ~ 5.1 kgf.m, 33 ~ 37 lbf. ft).
put it in a suitable place next to it.
g. Press and hold the position held when removing the
front mud pan, pass through the proper position in the
middle of the shock absorber, and install it to the
corresponding position, and then use the 4 # hexagonal
socket to insert 2 pieces of M6 × 14 shaft shoulder bolts.
Then install the 2 M6x30 bolts back with 5# hex. Note: the
M6x30 bolts on the left should be equipped with gaskets.

M125/310 replace the lower link board

Caution:
●After the front wheel is disassembled, please do not press Left
the brake handle.
●When the disc brake oil cup is removed, it must be vertically
upward to prevent air from entering the brake pipeline.
●After disassembly, make sure that all parts are installed
correctly.
●Appropriate amount of grease should be applied when
installing the bearing.
●The M125 steps are similar to the M310, taking the M310 as
an example.
1. Disassemble parts ahead of time
Refer to "Replace the front wheel", "Replace the front Right
shock absorber", "Replace the steering handle", and remove 3. Removing the direction pad
the front wheel, front shock absorber, and direction handle. a. Take out the handle switch harness and brake hose in
2. Remove the faucet lock the direction wire clip from the direction of the wire clip gap
a. Turn on the vehicle, press the 2 front storage box one by one, until the direction is taken out all the wire
switches at① to open the left and right storage boxes. harnesses in the wire clip, and then use the 4# inner hexagon
to remove the M6×12 bolt that fixed direction wire, take out
the direction of the wire clamp.

b. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove 4 M6×14 bolts, and 2

M6×16 bolts; then use 4# inner hexagon or other tools to b. Use a ratchet wrench + extension rod + 30# sleeve to
remove The two swell nails on the lower storage box, take remove the upper link plate cover nut.
out the left and right storage boxes, the left storage box has a
line connection, do not pull it vigorously, just place the foot
pedal.

201 / 223
 torque wrench. Torque: M125/310 is: 15N.m (1.2 kgf.m, 11
lbf. ft),M125 2024 version is 13N.m(1.3 kgf.m,10 lbf.ft) .

c. Install the direction base dis assembly tooling on the

direction pad block, and use 6# inner hexagon to install the 4
bolts on the direction pressing block on the dis assembly c. Put the rubber pad on the direction column adjustment
tooling and tighten it. Then use the ratchet wrench +30# nut; then screw in the second direction column adjustment
sleeve to screw down the dis assembly tool, and push the nut, screw the second direction column adjustment nut to
base and the direction handle pad block out. Finally, take out align with the notch of the first direction column adjustment
the tooling together with the direction, the pad and the nut, put Insert the snap-in gasket; finally screw in the third
direction, and take out the base together. steering column adjusting nut, M125/310/350 tighten the
nut to 100N.m (10.2 kgf.m, 74 lbf.ft),M125 2024 version is
80N.m (8.2 kgf.m, 59 lbf.ft).

4. Remove the lower link board assembly d. Install the semi-circular key in the groove of the lower
a. Use a four-jaw sleeve to remove the direction column link plate, then align the gap between the spacer and the
adjustment nut on the uppermost layer of the lower link base with the semi-circular key, and finally screw in the cap
nut, torque: 100N.m (10.2 kgf.m, 74 bf.ft)
plate, take out the cassette washer, the middle direction
column adjustment nut, and the adjustment nut rubber
gasket. Then use a four-jaw sleeve to remove the lowermost
direction column adjusting nut. Refer to the exploded view of
the lower link board.
b. One person supports the lower link plate with his hand,
and one person knocks the lower link plate with a rubber
hammer and a suitable tool, and finally removes the lower
link plate from the frame.
5. Install the lower link board assembly
a. Apply proper amount of lubricant to the new lower link
assembly and install it from under the frame. 6. Install other disassembly components
a. Refer to "Replace the front shock absorber" to replace
the front shock absorber.
b. Refer to "Replace the front wheel" to reinstall the front
wheel assembly.
c. Refer to "Replace the direction handle" to install the
assembly back in the direction.

b. Put the greased bearing, shaft ring, and dust cap on the
●The vehicle must be parked on a level and stable ground or
upper link plate in turn, and then screw in a steering column
on a lifting platform.
adjusting nut, and tighten the steering column adjusting nut
with a four-jaw socket. Torque: 50N.m(5.1 kgf.m,37 lbf. ft), M350 replace the lower link board
make sure that the upper link plate does not move up and The method of loading the M350 is basically the same as
down, loosen the direction column adjusting nut that of the M310 and will not be repeated here. The
counterclockwise by 1/4 turn, and finally tighten it with a
202 / 223
difference is that the M350 has one less adjusting nut and
one more step to remove the connecting plate.

203 / 223
 11. Disassemble the engine of the vehicle
Caution:
●The vehicle must be parked on a level and stable ground or
on a lifting platform.
●The operation can only be performed after the engine has
cooled down completely.
●Do not press the brake handle after removing the rear
brake caliper.
●Attention and sequence when removing the plastic buckle
to avoid the buckle from breaking
●Wear waterproof gloves when draining coolant to prevent it
from getting on your skin.
d. Lift the glove box slightly until the ambient light
●The storage box of subsequent production models has been
connector is exposed on the left side of the glove box, unplug
changed. For disassembly and assembly, please refer to the
the connector and take out the entire glove box.
chapter "Disassembly of the storage box" in "Disassembly of
Vehicle Covers".
●The M125/350/M125(2024) steps are similar to the M310,
taking the M310 as an example.
1. Disassemble the storage box
a. Push the whole car to a wide, flat place, lay down the
main bracket, and unlock the cushion lock.

e. After removing the starter relay from the battery

compartment, remove the electrical box assembly.

b. Use a 4# socket head to remove the 2 M6×16 bolts next

to the battery. Open the black protective cover of the
negative terminal of the battery, and use a Phillips
screwdriver to remove the negative bolt of the battery. Then
lift off the red protective cover of the positive pole of the
battery, use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the positive
pole of the battery, take out the positive and negative wires 2. Remove the cover
of the battery, and then screw back the bolts on the battery a. Remove 7 pcs decorative glues on the rear armrest, use
with a Phillips screwdriver. Straighten out the cables after 4# inner hexagon to remove 2 M6×16 bolt on the front,
pulling up the 3 fuse boxes. remove the 2 swell nails on the rear armrest, use 12# sleeve
Remove the 5 pcs M8×25 bolts. Remove the rear armrest.

c. Use a 4# socket head to remove the 2 M6×14 shoulder

bolts next to the battery. Remove the 2 expansion nails on
both sides. After removing the decorative buckle at the rear, b. After putting down the right rear pedal, use a 4# inner
use a 4# hexagon socket to remove 2 M6×16 bolts. hexagon to remove 1 M6×14 bolt on the peda.

204 / 223
 last hand, Grab the front of the tail skirt with one hand and
take it out in the direction of the arrow.

c.Then grasp the end of the side cover with your hand, and
press the arrow Pull out in the direction (from back to front)
until the 5 mushrooms (in the green circle) on the side cover g. Refer to steps a-j in the steps of "Removing the spark
are pulled out, and then take out the side cover. plug" to remove the left and right pedals and the left and
right trim cover components.

d. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove the 2 M6×14 bolts on

the front of the tail skirt, and then use 4# inner hexagon to
remove the 2 swell nails under the tail skirt. h. Pull down the connecting part of the surrounding
bottom plate and the middle of the surrounding (cyan) with
one hand, grasp the rear part of the surrounding bottom
(green mark) and pull it in the direction of the arrow until the
surrounding bottom is removed.

e. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove the 2 swell nails inside

the tail skirt and next to the rear taillight (marked by the
green circle).

3. Put the coolant and pull out the

connection plug
a. Place suitable utensils under the big arrow, use water
clamp pliers to remove the green hoop pointed by the big
arrow, pull out the engine water inlet pipe, and let out the
coolant; then use a single batch to remove the clamp pointed
by the small arrow and pull it out The inlet pipe of the small
water tank discharges the coolant.

f. Press down the part where the front part of the tail skirt
is in contact with the right part of the fuel tank cover
(golden), and pull the right part (golden) of the fuel tank
cover with one hand until the front of the tail skirt is pulled
out; then hold the middle part of the fuel tank with the other
hand Press the cover (blue) down, grab the front part of the
tail skirt with one hand and pull up until the front part of the
tail skirt is separated from the middle cover (blue) of the fuel
tank; hold the rear part of the tail skirt (green mark) with the

205 / 223
 b. Unplug the high-voltage package plug from the engine f. Locate and pull out the plug of the magneto stator
head. charging cable⑦ at the left frame.
Caution: One end of the magneto stator charging cable is
connected to the inside of the engine, and one end is
connected to the connector on the rectifier; do not pull out
the wrong plug.

c. Refer to the steps in "Remove the Throttle Valve Body

Assembly to Clean Carbon Deposits" and unplug the plugs of
the stepping motor① and the three-in-one sensor② on the g. Use an 8# sleeve to remove a bolt on the starter motor,
throttle valve body. and take out the negative wire⑧ on the bolt.
Caution: The negative wire of the early production model
is fixed on the bolt around the starter motor.

d. Locate and unplug the plugs of the high-pressure fuel

pipe③ and the fuel injector④ at the front end of the
throttle valve.
Caution: A small amount of fuel will flow out when the
high-pressure oil pipe is pulled out, and it is forbidden to drip
onto the surface of the part.
h. Use an 8# sleeve to remove a bolt on the starter motor,
and take out the negative wire⑧ on the bolt.
Caution: The negative wire of the early production model
is fixed on the bolt around the starter motor.

e. Locate and unplug the crankshaft position sensor⑤ and

the oxygen sensor⑥ in the frame position on the right.
Caution: One end of the crankshaft position sensor is
connected to the inside of the engine, one end is connected i. Locate and unplug the plug of the cylinder head water
to the main cable; one end of the oxygen sensor is connected temperature sensor⑩ on the right side of the throttle valve
to the engine in front of the muffler, and the other end is body.
connected to the main cable; do not unplug the wrong plug. Caution: The water temperature sensor of the cylinder
head is directly connected to the engine, do not pull out the
wrong way.

206 / 223
 j. Locate and unplug the tube connecting the throttle body remove a M12×1.25×290 bolt that fixes the engine on the
to the carbon canister at the lower part of the throttle body. right side of the vehicle, pull out the bolt from the frame.

k. Locate and unplug the pipe connecting the oil and gas
separator to the air filter on the left side of the throttle body. c. One person uses 14# torx wrench to extend from under
the tail skirt and fix the 1 M10×1.5×55 bolt on the top of the
left rear shock absorber, and one person uses 14# socket +
ratchet wrench to remove and fix the left side from the
frame. One M10 nut for rear shock absorption, and a bolt of
M10×1.5×55 is drawn out. Use the same method to remove
the 1 M10 nut that fixes the right rear shock absorber, one
person holds the frame, and the other uses a rubber hammer
+ suitable tools to knock out one M10×1.5×55 bolt that fixes
the right rear shock absorber.

l. Use a 4# inner hexagon to remove one M6×16 bolt that

fixes the wheel speed sensor on the rear rocker arm, take out
the wheel speed sensor and take it out of the fixed clamp.
Then use a 14# sleeve to remove the two M8×37 bolts that
fix the brake caliper, and pass the brake caliper and wheel
speed sensor in the direction of the arrow from the middle of
the shock absorber.

d. Two people hold the left and right handlebars and the
frame respectively, push the whole car forward, push it to a
flat and wide place, lay down the side brackets, and use a
rubber stool with a suitable height to support the right side
of the vehicle. Keep the vehicle balanced.

4. Disassemble the engine

a. Use a 12# sleeve to remove the two M8×25 bolts that fix
the right pedal bracket, and remove the rear right pedal
assembly.

5. Install the engine

a. Two people cooperate to push the whole car to a
suitable position, and first place the rear brake caliper on the
whole car on the disc brake disc, being careful not to knock
the shock absorber. Another person holds the vehicle, and
one person adjusts the cradle mounting hole on the vehicle
b. One person uses a 17# torx wrench to insert a M12 nut frame to align with the engine mounting hole. After aligning,
that fixes the engine on the left side of the vehicle from the use a suitable tool to penetrate a M12×1.5×290 bolt.
front of the air filter, and another person uses a 15# sleeve to

207 / 223
 b. One person holds the whole car and slightly lifts the rear e. Install the rear pedal on the right side of the vehicle to a
part of the frame, and one person rotates the two rear shock suitable position, install two M8×25 bolts, and tighten them
absorbers to the frame installation groove, and then rotates with a 14# sleeve; connect the small water tank inlet pipe to
the right shock absorber until it is aligned with the frame the corresponding pipeline, and tighten it with a single batch
installation hole. Pass one M10×1.5×55 bolt, use one M10 Clamp; then connect the engine water inlet pipe back to the
nut on the left side to tighten, torque: 30N.m (3.1 kgf.m, 22 corresponding pipe, and use the water clamp clamp to fix the
lbf.ft). When installing the left side shock absorber, you need clamp to the appropriate position to prevent leakage of
to slightly shake the frame from side to side until the shock coolant.
absorber installation hole is aligned with the frame
installation point, and then use the same method to fix the
left side shock absorber.

f. Reconnect the plugs of the stepper motor and the three-

in-one sensor on the throttle valve body; reconnect the
connectors of the high-pressure fuel pipe, fuel injector,
oxygen sensor, crankshaft position sensor, magneto stator
charging cable, and cylinder head water temperature sensor;
c. open the brake pads on the rear brake caliper with a flat-
Reconnect the negative and positive wires connected to the
blade or other suitable tool, then install the brake caliper on
starter motor and tighten the bolts; install the two tubes that
the rear rocker arm, and then install 2 M8×37 bolts⑹, use connect the carbon canister to the throttle valve body and
14# set Tighten the barrel, torque: 24N.m (2.4 kgf.m, 18 the oil-air separator to the air filter.
lbf.ft); then connect the wheel speed sensor plug back to the g. Refer to "Adding Coolant to the Main Water Tank" to
corresponding position, install a M6×12 bolt⑸, use 4# inner add an appropriate amount of coolant.
hexagon to tighten ; Finally, install all the pipes connecting
the brake calipers and the wheel speed sensor into the
corresponding clamps, and arrange the lines.

d. Insert the high-voltage package at the front of the

engine back, and install one M12 nut back on the cradle to fix
the engine, use 17# torx wrench to fix M12 nut, another
person uses 15# socket to tighten bolt, torque: 65N.m (6.5
kgf.m, 48 lbf.ft).

208 / 223
 12. Disassembly and assembly of vehicle covering parts
Caution:
●The vehicle must be parked on a level and stable ground or on a lifting platform.
●The operation can only be performed after the engine and muffler has cooled down completely.
●Attention and sequence when removing the plastic buckle to avoid the buckle from breaking
●The M125/350/M125(2024) steps are similar to the M310, taking the M310 as an example.

1. Windshield 2.Right front turn light 3. Right cover front storage box 4. Front right panel 5. Front storage box panel right
decorative cover 6. Right pedal decorative cover 7.Right fuel tank cover plate 8. Right pedal 9. Right side cover 10. Cushion 11.
Tail skirt right part 12. Rear rack 13. Rear mudguard

1. Windshield 2.Left front turn light 3. Left cover front storage box 4. Front left panel 5. Front storage box panel left decorative
cover 6. Left pedal decorative cover 7.Left fuel tank cover plate 8. Left pedal 9. Left side cover 10. Cushion 11. Tail skirt left part
12. Rear rack 13. Rear mudguard

209 / 223
1. Instrument panel 2. Front right pedal pad pressure plate 3. Front right pedal pad 4. Rear right pedal pad 5. Rear right pedal
pad presser 6. Fuel Tank Outer Cover 7. Fuel tank cover middle part 8. Front left pedal pad pressure plate 9. Front left pedal
rubber pad 10. Rear left pedal rubber pad 11. Rear left pedal pad presser

Disassembly and assembly of vehicle panel

Caution:
●During disassembly, please pay attention to the force to prevent breaking the buckle.
●When removing the panels, please remove them in strict order. Do not forcibly remove the panels to prevent irreparable
damage to the corresponding panels.
●When unplugging the plug, please control the force and disassembly method. Do not forcibly unplug the plug to prevent
damage to the plug, resulting in poor contact of harness connector and affecting the function of various parts.
●When installing the harness plug, please check whether the harness thimble in the harness male connector is deformed or
misaligned, so as to prevent the harness thimble in the harness male connector from being damaged during the installation of
the harness plug, thereby affecting the function of each part.
Windshield removal c. Take out the left and right decorative covers of the
windshield, the windshield, and the rubber pads of the
a. Remove the 4 decorative buckles on the windshield.
windshield bracket in turn.

b. Use 4# inner hexagon to loosen the 4 M6×16 bolts on

the left and right decorative covers of the windshield. Removal of the front sun visor
a. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove the 2 swell nails on the
front sun visor.

210 / 223
 b. Hold the mark on the front sun visor (green rectangle) Removal of the front panel
with your hand, pull it up in the direction of the arrow, and
a. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove the two M6×12 bolts
take out the front sun visor.
on the front panel.

Removal of the front cover b. Grasp the mark on the front front cover (green box)
a. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove one M6×14 bolt on the with your hands, and pull out according to the arrow until
front cover. Then use 4# inner hexagon to remove the 2 swell the mushroom head (small arrow) on the right side of the
nails on both sides of the front cover. front front cover is pulled out; use the same method to
remove it The mushroom head on the left side of the front
front cover.

b. Raise the windshield rocker arm to the highest position,

then grab the mark on the front cover (green rectangle) with
your hand, and pull it up in the direction of the small arrow; c. Grasp the mark on the front cover (green rectangle) with
pull out the two mushroom buttons (blue circles) on the your hands, and pull it up in the direction of the arrow until
front cover After exiting; continue to grasp the mark on the the two positioning buckles (blue circles) of the front front
front cover (green rectangle) and pull it diagonally upward cover and both sides of the front front cover are fixed.
according to the big arrow until the 6 buckles on both sides (Yellow area, 6 locations on the left and right), pull out the 12
of the front cover (yellow area, 3 on the left and right) are all buckles, and remove the front cover.
pulled out.

Disassembly of headlights
c. After pulling out all the buckles, grasp the mark on the a. Use the 4# inner hexagon to remove the 4 M6×14 bolts
front cover (green rectangle) with your hand, and pull it around the headlight; use a cross to remove the 2 fixed
down in the direction of the arrow until the front cover is headlight self-tapping Nail.
removed.

211 / 223
 b. Hold the headlight with one hand and take it out for a Disassembly of the of the Speedometer
certain distance, pull out the 3P plug (green and white wire)
behind the headlight with the other hand, and take out the panel
headlight completely. a. Remove the two M6x12 bolts from the front turning
light with a 4# socket.

b. Grasp the marked place (green rectangle) on the

Speedmeter panel with one hand and lift it up in the
Removal of front turn signal direction of the big arrow. With the other hand, press the
front storage box panel at the junction of the front storage
a. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove the two M6×16 bolts
box panel and the Speedometer panel, Until the 8 buckles
on the front left turn signal.
(Yellow area, 4 places on the left and right) connecting front
storage box panel and the Speedometer panel are separated

b. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove 1 swell nail on the top

of the front left turn signal; use a cross screw to remove 1 c. Grasp the Speedometer panel with one hand and lift it
self-tapping nail on the top rear of the front left turn signal. up slightly in the direction of the big arrow, and pull out the
Speedometer plug () connected to the Speedometer with the
other hand. Caution: When pulling out the plug, you must
first press the lock buckle pointed by the arrow on the back
of the plug with your fingers, and then pull it out. Plug, do
not unplug the Speedometer plug directly; finally grasp the
two sides of the Speedometer panel, lift it in the direction of
the big arrow, and pull it out to take out the Speedometer
panel.

c. Take out the front left turn signal with one hand, and
unplug the 2 bullet joints of the front left turn signal with the
other hand.

Removal of the front left and right panels

a. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove two M6×12 bolts and a
swell nail on the front left panel, and then pull out the
decorative glue of the front left panel by hand.

d. Remove the front right turning light by the same

methods.

212 / 223
 b. Grasp the mark on the front left panel (green rectangle) Removal of the windshield base
with both hands, and carefully pull out in the direction of the
a. Use a 4# inner hexagon to remove the M6×16 bolts that
big arrow. When pulling out, you need to follow the order of
fix the bracket. Locate the two plugs of the windshield
the small arrow pointing to separate 11 buckles (Yellow area;
controller and unplug them.
4 front vents, 1 decorative cover on the left panel of the
front storage box + 1 mushroom button, 6 front storage box
panels), and 1 mushroom buckle (Blue area) on the
connection of the front left panel and the front vent, the
front storage box left panel decorative cover, the front
storage box front panel, remove the front left panel.

b. Use an 8# sleeve to remove the M6×30 bolts on the left

side of the auxiliary water tank and the M6×30 bolts on the
right side to remove the main water tank from the base.
Remove the auxiliary tank drain hose from the windshield
base. Remove the horn bracket using a 6# Allen. Use an 8#
c. Use the same method to remove the front right panel. sleeve to remove the water filler bracket and remove 2
M6×16 bolts.

Removal of the front part of vent

Use 4# inner hexagon to remove the 2 swell nails on the
inside of the front part of vent. Then unplug the 3 connectors
on the upper left side of the front vent. c. After holding the windshield base assembly firmly, use a
Caution: When unplugging the connector, you need to 12# sleeve to remove 3 M8×25 bolts, and then remove the
press down the lower tip of the connector before pulling it windshield base assembly from the vehicle.
out, otherwise the connector buckle will be damaged.

Use 5# inner hexagon to remove 4 M6×14 bolts on the d. Use a 4# socket head to remove 2 M6×16 bolts and take
front vent. Remove the front vents and the position lights off the flanged bushing. Remove the windshield control.
installed on the vents and other parts.
Caution: When removing the last bolt, you must hold the
front vent with your hand to prevent the front vent from
falling directly and scratching the paint.

e. Use needle-nose pliers to remove the two retaining

springs, grab the left windshield bracket and remove the pin

213 / 223
and buffer glue, and remove the rocker spring. Remove the Removal of the left and right decorative
right windshield and rocker spring in the same way. Each pin
has 2 pcs buffer glue. covers of the front storage box
a. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove one M6×14 bolt
connecting the left decorative cover of the front storage box
panel and the surrounding middle part; use 5# inner hexagon
to remove 1 non-standard M6×14 bolt on the left decoration
cover of front storage box panel; use 4# inner hexagon to
remove 1 swell nail on the left decoration cover of the front
storage box panel.

f. Use a 4# hexagon socket to remove 2 M6×16 bolts and

remove the spring washer. Separate the windshield motor
pressure plate, windshield motor assembly and windshield
base assembly.

b. Pry out the front left pedal rubber pad and the front left
pedal aluminum pad from the position pointed by the small
arrow using a single-character batch, and then pull out the
front left pedal rubber pad and the front left pedal aluminum
pad upwards in the direction of the big arrow. Caution:
When using the one-word pry, you can use non-woven cloth
and other tools to wrap the one-word batch to prevent
g. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove 2 M4×16 bolts to
scratching the paint surface.
separate the rocker arm pressure block from the lower right
rocker arm. Remove the 2 pieces of rocker arm bumper glue
from the rocker arm clamp. Remove the left lower rocker
arm in the same way. If you buy a windshield motor, you
need to buy a "1240300-007000 HJ125-6 Battery rubber
gasket”, pasted on the side of the windshield motor pressure
plate.

c. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove the two M6×12 bolts⑷

connecting the left decorative cover of the front storage box
panel on the front storage box panel.

h. Remove the M8×16 bolts with 6# inner hexagon, and

remove the gasket, bearing and upper rocker arm.

d. Use one hand to grasp the left decorative cover mark

(green rectangle) of the front storage box panel and pull out,
and use one hand to hold the mark (green rectangle) of the
front storage box panel and press down Until the top of the
left decorative cover of the front storage box panel and the
front storage box panel are connected (yellow area), the 3
buckles are separated,and then the left decorative cover of
the front storage box panel is surrounded by the front
214 / 223
storage box panel in the order of the small arrows. The
connection of the middle and left pedal decoration cover
(yellow area: 7 buckles on the front storage box panel, 3
buckles on the left pedal decoration cover; blue area:
surrounds the 4 points where the middle part is connected to
the front storage box panel The 10 buckles of the bayonet)
and the 4 bayonets are separated, and then remove the left
decorative cover of the front storage box panel, remove the
left decorative cover of the front storage box panel.

b. Remove 7 pcs M6x14 bolts on the left pedal with 4#

inner hexagon. Remove a M6x16 bolt with 5# inner hexagon
and then take off the bushing on the front part.

Use the same method to remove the right decorative

cover of the front storage box panel.

c. Remove the two M6x14 bolts of the in side of left pedal

decorative cover front part with 4# inner hexagon.

Disassembly of the left &right side cover

a. Put down the left rear pedal and use the 4# inner
hexagon to remove the M6×14 bolt. Pull out in sequence in
the direction of the arrow (from the rear wheel to the front
wheel). Note that there are 5 staples at the red circle and a d. Remove an M6x14 bolt from the bottom plate and the
circle of buckles around. It takes a lot of force to pull out. decorative cover of the left pedal with a 4# inner hexagon;
then remove the 1 swell nail of the left pedal decorative
cover and 1 swell nails of the bottom plate

b. Remove the right side cover by the same method. e. Hold the left pedal decorative cover and the left pedal
Disassembly of the foot pedals and trim with two hands and take out the left pedal decorative cover
and the left pedal in the direction of the arrow.
cover
a. Protrude the rear pedal rubber pad and rear pedal
rubber pad pressure plate from the position indicated by the
small arrow with the Slot-type Screwdrivers. Pull the rear
pedal rubber pad and rear pedal rubber pad pressure plate
upward in the direction of the big arrow until the rear pedal
rubber pad and rear pedal rubber pad pressure plate are
removed. Caution: Use a tool such as non-woven cloth to
wrap the Slot-type Screwdrivers when using it to prevent
scratches on the paint surface.

215 / 223
 f. Remove the right pedal trim cover and the right pedal sleeve to remove the 4 M6×12 bolts that fix the fuel tank,
in the same way. and then remove the air deflector.
Removal of the surrounding middle part
Use 4# inner hexagon to remove the two M6×12 bolts
connecting surround middle part and the front storage box
panel and then remove the middle surround.

Disassembly of the cushion

a. First press the “ ”power button of the vehicle, then
press the seat lock switch of the vehicle to open the seat
lock, and then long press the power button for 2 seconds to
shut down the vehicle

b. Hold the seat cushion with one hand, remove the 3 M6

nuts fixed on the seat cushion bracket by 10# double offset
Disassembly of the surrounding bottom ring spanner or 10# sleeve , grasp the seat cushion with both
Grasp the rear part of the around the bottom plate by hands and pull it out obliquely upward according to the angle
hand, and pull it back in the direction of arrow until the of the stud (big arrow direction) cushion. Caution: When the
bottom plate is taken out. angle is incorrect and the cushion cannot be pulled out, do
not use brute force to forcibly pull out the cushion to prevent
damage to the threads on the cushion installation studs.

Removal of the cooling fan air guide plate

a. Use an 8# sleeve to remove the M6×22 bolts on the left c. Flip the seat to the back, pay attention that the seat
and the M6×30 bolts on the right, and push the water tank cushion should not be placed directly on the ground or a
assembly forward. hard surface to prevent scratching the cover or edge of the
seat cushion. Hold the decorative cover of the seat cushion
with one hand, then remove the 2 ST4.2×12 self-tapping
screws on the head with a 5# hexagon socket, or remove 2
pcs ST3.9×12 self-tapping with a Philips screwdriver, and
remove the decorative cover of the seat cushion. If you need
to remove the cushion cushion glue, you can directly remove
it by hand.

b. After removing the expansion nails on both sides, pull

back the protruding installation part of the air deflector and
then remove it. If it is inconvenient to operate, use a 10#
216 / 223
 b. Use a 4# inner hexagon to remove the two M6×14 bolts
Disassembly of the storage box which fix the front of the tail skirt.
Refer to the steps of "Removing the Stepper Motor and
Cleaning the Carbon Deposit".
Disassembly of the rear hand rest
a. Remove 7 pcs buckles from the bolt, and use the 4#
inner hexagon to remove two pcs M6x16 bolts; Remove 5 pcs
M8x25 bolts with 12# sleeve; Use 4# inner hexagon to
remove 2 swell nails from the rear handrail; Hold the rear
armrest anywhere with both hands, lift the rear armrest up
in the direction of the big arrow and remove the rear
armrest. c. Grasp the mark of the fuel tank middle cover by hands
and press it down (green rectangle 1; here is the color of the
parts for easy identification, the middle of the fuel tank cover
is black, and the right part of the fuel tank cover is gray. The
tail skirt is red) With the other hand, grab the tail skirt mark
(green rectangle 2) and pull it up until the two buckles at the
junction of the tail skirt and the middle part of the fuel tank
cover (yellow area) are separated;Hold the mark on the tail
skirt (green rectangle 4) with one hand, and then hold the
mark on the right part of the fuel tank cover (green rectangle
3) with one hand and pull it out until the 2 buckle positions
b. Flip the rear armrest to the back and remove the 2 and 2 clip pins at the junction between the tail skirt and the
M6×12 bolts on the left side using a 4# hexagon socket to right part of the fuel tank cover (yellow area) are
remove the left buffer rubber of the rear armrest (L in the separated;Finally, grab the end skirt marks (green rectangles
figure), and remove the right buffer glue (R in the figure) in 5, 6) and pull in the direction of the arrow. Remove the right
the same way. Remove the 5 M6×12 bolts at the rear of the skirt cover.
4# hexagon socket, remove the flanging bushing and the
flanging bushing buffer glue, and then remove the bottom
plate.

d. Use the same method to remove the left side of the tail-
cover board.

Disassembly of the left and right tail cover

a. Remove the 4 swell nails from the apron by 4# socket.

217 / 223
Disassembly of tail light taillights. Note that there is a friction button in the middle, so
it takes a lot of force to break it apart.
a. Remove the two M6x14 bolts on the left part of the
bottom plate of the tail cover by 4# inner hexagon. Remove 1
ST4.2×12 screw on the left part of the tail skirt bottom plate
by 5# inner hexagon. Grab the left part of the tail skirt
bottom plate and pull it in the direction of the big arrow to
remove the left part of the tail skirt bottom plate.

b. Use the same method to remove the right side of the

tail-cover board.

Disassembly of rear fender

a. Use the 4# inner hexagon to remove the 4 M6x14 bolts
(which connecting the rear inner clay plate to the frame).

c. Use 4# inner hexagon to remove the 2 swell nails which

connected to the rear clay board with the taillight

b. Find out and unplug the joint of rear license plate light,
left and right turn signal and rectifier from the rubber cover
on the left side of the frame.
d. Find out and unplug the taillight plug (3P) from the
plastic cover on the left side of the frame, hold both ends of
the taillight and pull it out diagonally in the direction of the
arrow to remove the taillight.

c. One person uses 14# sleeve to fix the non-standard

M10×1.5×55 bolt from upper of the rear shock absorption,
one person uses 14# sleeve + ratchet wrench or box wrench
to remove the non-standard M10×1.5 nut, from the upper
e. 4 Hold the taillight cover with one finger, and push part of the rear shock absorption of the frame inside; nut
the cover latch with your thumb in the direction of the torque: 30N.m（3.1 kgf.m, 22 lbf.ft）.Remove nuts on the
arrow. Push the buckle on the other side away in the same other side using the same method.Two bolts can not be
way. After pushing the buckles on both sides open, hold the removed.
tail light with one hand, and push the middle of the grip
cover upwards with the other hand. Separate the cover and

218 / 223
 the frame slowly until the rear shock absorber upper part is
fitted to the mounting point on the frame, then assembly the
bolts upper the rear shock.

d. Follow this step for vehicles produced before May 25,

2022, and then skip to step f. Use the ratchet wrench + 8#
sleeve to extend under the rectifier and remove the 2 outer
hexagon M6x16 bolts of the rectifier. g. Vehicles produced before May 25, 2022 follow this step,
Caution: the rectifier should not be taken out. Let it hang in and then skip to step h. After fixing the M6×22 bolts with an
the air. 8# sleeve at the bottom, remove the nut with a 10# sleeve at
the top, and remove the rectifier and flange bushing after
removing the gasket.

e. After sorting out the wiring harness of the rectifier, hold

the rear inner clay plate and pull it down according to the
arrow indication until the gap between the frame and the h. Flip to the back and remove 2 M6×14 shoulder bolts
rear inner clay plate is enough to pass the 2 connectors of with 4# hexagon socket. Separate the front and rear of the
the rectifier through the holes reserved on the rear inner clay rear fender after removing the 2 expansion pegs. If
plate in turn. (Caution: The holes on the rear inner mud necessary, remove the blue rubber stopper by hand.
board have not enough place to take out the two rectifier
connectors at the same time, so take out the rectifier
connectors one by one.) Take out the rectifier.

i. 4# hexagon socket and remove the 2 M6×14 shoulder

bolts on both sides.

f. One person lifts the rear or both sides of the frame ，

remove 2 bolts on the upper rear shock, and then lifts it up in
the direction of the big arrow until the gap between the
frame and the rear shock absorber is sufficient and the inner
mud plate is taken out, one person grabs both sides or the
middle of the rear inner clay plate and passes it through in
the direction of the small arrow then take it out.
(Caution: When removing the rear inner fender, the rear
shock absorber will fall forward. In order to prevent
scratches on the paint or damage to the parts, the rear inner j. Flip to the back and remove the upper ST4.2×12 self-
fender should be removed with one hand and the rear shock tapping screws with a 5# inner hexagon, and then remove
absorber should be supported with the other hand). After the rear right turn signal (R) and rear left turn signal (L). After
removing the rear inner clay plate, align the rear shock holding the rear license plate light ①, use a 10# sleeve to
absorber with the mounting point on the frame and lower remove the self-contained nut, and then remove the φ6
219 / 223
washer. After holding the rear reflector ② firmly, use a 10#
sleeve to remove the nut and washer that comes with it.

c. Remove the left part of the fuel tank cover by the same
method.
k. If you need to replace the rear fender, you need to
remove 4 pieces of plywood nuts, 1 piece of side cover
rubber and 1 piece of rear license plate buffer glue. Note that
the rear license plate buffer is pulled out to the side where
the rear license plate is installed.

Disassembly the middle cover of the fuel

tank
a. Use the 4# inner hexagon to remove the 2 M6x14 bolts
fixed in the middle of the cover plate of the fuel tank.
Disassembly of the left, right fuel tank
cover
a. Remove a non-standard M6x14 bolt on the right part of
the fuel tank cover with 4# inner hexagon. Grasp the mark on
the right part of the fuel tank cover (green rectangle) and
pull it upward in the direction of the arrow Until the right
part of the tank cover plate and the middle part of the tank
cover plate (yellow area) (The middle cover is gray, and the
right part of the fuel tank cover is red.) of the 4 buckle
positions separated.
b. Connect the positive and negative terminals of the main
wiring harness of the battery to open the tank lock or open
the tank lock before removing the battery; Remove the
M6x16 bolt fixing the oil tank cover with the 4# inner
hexagon, and unscrew the threaded oil tank

b. Grasp the mark (green rectangle) of the right cover part

of the fuel tank and pull it out in the direction of the arrow
until the two buttons (blue circles) on the fuel tank cover are
pulled out, then remove the right fuel tank cover.
c. Find out and unplug the tank lock connector under
the cushion stand and make the tank lock wire harness well.

220 / 223
 cover bracket. Note that there is a buckle on the head of the
cover that is inserted into the cover bracket.

d. Remove the oil tank cover; Press the cushion bracket

with one hand and take out the middle of the tank cover
plate with the other hand.
Disassembly the left and right storage
Caution: When taking out the middle part of the tank
cover plate, it is necessary to pay attention to the wiring boxes
harness of the tank lock, so as not to get stuck and avoid a. Press the switch indicated by the small arrow to open
pulling the wiring harness of the tank lock; to prevent dirt the front right storage box; Use 4# inner hexagon to remove
matters from entering the tank, immediately screw the tank 2 M6x14 bolts and a M6x16 bolt. Remove 1 nail of the front
cover back to the tank after removing the middle cover. right storage box with the 4# inner hexagon, finally remove
the front right storage box.

e. Remove the fuel tank lock after breaking the clips that
fix the fuel tank lock to both sides. Pay attention to the b. Use needle nose pliers to remove the circlip and pull out
strength when opening the clips to avoid breaking. the rotating shaft. Remove the torsion spring and damper.
Pay attention to the position of the torsion spring when
installing.

f. Use needle nose pliers to remove the circlip and pull out
the rotating shaft. Remove the torsion spring and damper.
Pay attention to the position of the torsion spring when c. Remove 3 M6×14 shoulder bolts with 4# inner hexagon,
installing. and separate the inner and outer covers. Remove the 3-piece
cleat nuts from the outer cover. The foam is attached to the
inner lid with double-sided tape.

g. After removing the ST4.2×12 self-tapping screws with

a 5# inner hexagon, separate the outer cover and the outer

221 / 223
 d. There are three ways to open the front left storage
box :1. Before removing the battery, press the switch next to
the front right storage box switch to open it .2, Use the
battery to connect the positive and negative terminals of the
vehicle to make the vehicle start up, press the switch next to
the front right storage box switch to open it .3. Find out the
front left storage box switch next to the tap lock or behind
the front left storage box, and pull out the protruding part of
the switch according to the direction of the arrow to the
outside.
c. Find out and unplug the PKE bullet connector, PKE
connector, and PKE antenna connector on the right side of
the front storage box panel.

e. Remove 2 M6x14 bolts and 1 M6x16 bolt on the front

left storage box with a 4# inner hexagon. Remove the 1 nail
securing the front left storage box with a 4# inner hexagon.

d. Remove the front storage box panel.

f. Remove the front left storage box to the appropriate

position, unplug the USB connector of the front left storage
box, and remove the front left storage box. Follow the steps
e. Flip to the back and pull the cable out of the lock frame
for the right storage box cover to disassemble the left
in the direction of the arrow. Turn back to the front and
storage box cover.
remove the M6×12 bolts with 4# hexagon sockets
Disassembly the front storage box panel respectively, and hold the PKE bracket assembly ①, the
a. Remove the two M6x14 bolts from the front storage box right storage box lock assembly ②, and the electronic front
panel with the 4# inner hexagon. storage box lock assembly ③ on the back.

b. Find out the the 3 connectors on the left side of storage

box panel and unplug them on the next to the tap lock
f. Flip it over to the back and cut 2 cable ties, remove 3
ST4.2×12 self-tapping screws with 5# hexagon socket, and
then remove the front storage box switch from the panel.
Remove the zipper from the switch.

222 / 223
 g. Use 4# hexagon socket to remove 2 M6×14 shoulder
bolts and then separate the PKE bracket and PKE. For details
on the use and malfunction of PKE, please refer to the
driver's manual delivered with the vehicle.

h. Use 5# hexagon socket to remove 2 M6×16 bolts and

then separate the right storage box lock bracket and the right
storage box lock.

i. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove 3 M4×25 bolts and

then remove the electronic storage box lock.

223 / 223